Survey
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Download DRAFT 0400 Installation Standard
Document related concepts
Loading coil wikipedia , lookup
Switched-mode power supply wikipedia , lookup
Portable appliance testing wikipedia , lookup
Immunity-aware programming wikipedia , lookup
Power engineering wikipedia , lookup
Ground loop (electricity) wikipedia , lookup
Automatic test equipment wikipedia , lookup
Voltage optimisation wikipedia , lookup
History of electric power transmission wikipedia , lookup
Electromagnetic compatibility wikipedia , lookup
Ground (electricity) wikipedia , lookup
Alternating current wikipedia , lookup
Distribution management system wikipedia , lookup
Power over Ethernet wikipedia , lookup
Mains electricity wikipedia , lookup
Transcript
2014 NMEA 1 2 NATIONAL MARINE ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION 3 4 5 6 7 DRAFT 0400 Installation Standard 8 Thank you for volunteering to review the latest draft of the NMEA 0400 Installation Standard version 4.00. You are being provided this copy for technical comments 9 For Marine Electronic Equipment on Vessels only. All of your comments will be considered and responded to by the 0400 10 Installation Standard Committee. 11 12 Proprietary Document – Property of National Marine Electronics Association and shall notProhibited be used for any installation of marine 13 This draft is a work in progress Unauthorized Copying 14 electronics on any vessel. This standard is copyrighted and is the property of NMEA 15 and shall notWORKING be re-distributed or copied in any form. DRAFT Version 4.00N 16 17 18 19 20 DRAFT Version 4.00 N April 2014 Copyright NMEA 2014 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 1 of 313 2014 NMEA 21 22 National Marine Electronics Association 23 24 25 26 27 International Marine Electronics Association Effective Date August 1, 2012 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THE NMEA 0400® INSTALLATION STANDARD 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE NMEA 0400® INTERFACE STANDARD FILES (INCLUDING THE APPENDICES), SOFTWARE AND ANY ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION (ANY AND ALL OF THE FOREGOING, THE “NMEA 0400® STANDARD”). THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD (“AGREEMENT”) GOVERN USE OFTHE NMEA 0400® STANDARD. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1. Grant of License. Upon acceptance of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, NMEA grants a nonexclusive, non-transferable limited license (i) to make, develop or sell Marine Industry Products, utilizing the NMEA 0400® Standard (a) to develop NMEA 0400® Product; or (b) to develop an NMEA 0400® Approved Application; or (ii) if not engaged in the activities in (i) to use the NMEA 0400® Standard for internal business purposes. As stated herein “Marine Industry Product” means a product designed, marketed, advertised or sold for use in the marine industry; “NMEA 0400® Approved Application” means a software application which has received NMEA approval in accordance with the NMEA’s current approval guidelines; “NMEA 0400® and “NMEA Marks” means NMEA’s 0400® trademark or logos, including without limitation those that NMEA may, from time to time, 56 57 58 Licensees may make one copy of the NMEA 0400® Standard or any portion for backup purposes, providing that any copy retains the original NMEA 0400® Standard proprietary notices. NMEA reserves all rights of the NMEA 0400® Standard not expressly granted to licensee in this Agreement. 59 60 61 Without limiting other remedies, the NMEA may take actions it deems appropriate if NMEA determines that licensee has failed to comply with any provision of this Agreement, including, without limitation, using the NMEA 0400® Standard in violation of the license granted to licensee by the NMEA. National Marine Electronic Association (NMEA) / International Marine Electronic Association (IMEA) agree to license the NMEA 0400® Standard and portions thereof on the condition that licensee accepts the terms contained in this Agreement. For the purposes of this standard, NMEA will be used as the brand name for this standard with the understanding that NMEA and IMEA currently co-own this standard .For the purposes of this license agreement NMEA and IMEA are defined as NMEA. By clicking on the “I accept” button below or by downloading, installing or using the NMEA 0400® Standard, licensee is bound to this Agreement and accepts all of the terms. If this Agreement is accepted on behalf of a company or other legal entity, licensee represents and warrants they have the authority to bind the company or legal entity to the terms of this Agreement, and in such event, the “licensee” will be the company or other responsible legal entity. If licensee does not accept the terms of this Agreement, a license for the NMEA 0400® Standard will not be provided, and the Standard must be returned to NMEA for a full refund of relevant fees paid or, if NMEA has made the NMEA 0400® Standard available to licensee for evaluation, licensee must destroy all copies of the NMEA 0400® Standard in licensee’s possession and not transfer it to a third party or location. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 2 of 313 2014 NMEA 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 2. Restrictions. Except as expressly specified in this Agreement, licensee may not: (a) copy (except in the course of loading or installing) or modify the NMEA 0400® Standard, including but not limited to adding new features or otherwise making adaptations that alter the functioning of the NMEA 0400® Standard; (b) transfer, sublicense, lease, lend, rent or otherwise distribute the NMEA 0400® Standard to any third party; or (c) make the functionality of the NMEA 0400® Standard available to third parties through any means, including but not limited to uploading the NMEA 0400® Standard to a file-sharing service or through any hosting, application services provider, service bureau, software-as-a-service (SaaS) or any other type of services. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that portions of the NMEA 0400® Standard, including but not limited to the source code and the specific design and structure of individual modules or programs, constitute or contain trade secrets of NMEA and its licensors. Accordingly, licensee agrees to not disassemble, decompile or reverse engineer the NMEA 0400® Standard, in whole or in part, or permit or authorize a third party to do so, except to the extent such activities are expressly permitted by law notwithstanding this prohibition. 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 3. Ownership. The copy of the NMEA 0400® Standard is licensed, not sold. Licensee owns the media on which the NMEA 0400® Standard is recorded, but NMEA retains ownership of the copy of the NMEA 0400® Standard itself, including all intellectual property rights therein. The NMEA 0400® Standard is protected by United States copyright law and international treaties. Licensee will not delete or in any manner alter the copyright, trademark, and other proprietary rights notices or markings appearing on the NMEA 0400® Standard as delivered to licensee. 4. Term. The license granted under this Agreement remains in effect until terminated in accordance with this Agreement. Licensee may terminate the license at any time by destroying all copies of the NMEA 0400® Standard in licensee’s possession or control. The license granted under this Agreement will automatically terminate, with or without notice from NMEA, if licensee breaches any term of this Agreement. Upon termination, at NMEA’s option licensee must either promptly destroy or return to NMEA all copies of the NMEA 0400® Standard in licensee’s possession or control. 5. Hazardous Activities. Licensee acknowledges that the NMEA 0400® Standard is not designed, intended or authorized for use in hazardous circumstances or for uses requiring fail-safe performance such as the operation of nuclear facilities, air traffic or weapons control systems, or where failure could lead to death, personal injury or environmental damage. Licensee shall not use the NMEA 0400® Standard for such purposes or circumstances. 90 91 92 93 94 6. Trademarks. 6.1 Use of the NMEA Marks. l As an NMEA 0400® Approved Application or NMEA 0400® Product, and in consideration of the rights granted under this Agreement, licensee agrees to use NMEA Marks in connection with licensee’s marketing, promotion, sale and distribution of NMEA Approved Applications and NMEA 0400® Products. 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 6.2 Grant of License. Following acceptance of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, NMEA hereby grants to licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable limited license to use the NMEA Marks during the term of this Agreement solely to identify, market, and sell NMEA 0400® Approved Applications and NMEA 0400® Products. Products include those which use any portions of the NMEA 0400 Standard, All NMEA 0400 products must implement ANSI/TIA/EIA 422-B (RS 422), circuitry Licensee is granted no other right, title or license in or to the NMEA Marks. Licensee may not use the NMEA Marks except in accordance with the license granted herein. All trademarks, service marks, logos, trade names and any other proprietary designations of NMEA used herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of NMEA. 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 6.3. Electrical Interface. As of this Version 4.10 of the NMEA 0400 Standard, the electrical interface for any product development using this version shall incorporate ANSI/TIA/EIA 422-B (RS 422). Marine Products that use a serial interface, excluding USB shall incorporate ANSI/TIA/EIA 422-B (RS 422). The use of RS422 began with Version 2.00 published in 1994. 6.4 Trademark Guidelines and Related Restrictions. Licensee agrees to use and display the NMEA Marks only in accordance with NMEA’s trademark usage guidelines, as provided by NMEA from time to time. Licensee may not combine the NMEA Marks with any other marks, names or logos. Without limiting the foregoing, licensee shall display the NMEA Marks separately from licensee’s own trademarks. Licensee agrees that if a mark, logo or other designation is used in addition to the NMEA Marks (an “Additional Mark”) on NMEA 0400® Approved Applications or NMEA 0400® Products, or in any marketing or advertising materials related thereto, licensee will ensure that each such Additional Mark does not create confusion with the NMEA 0400® Standard. 114 115 6.5 Compliance with Quality Standards. Licensee may use the NMEA Marks hereunder so long as licensee remains in compliance with obligations under this Agreement. Licensee expressly acknowledges and agrees that the 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 3 of 313 2014 NMEA 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 NMEA 0400® Approved Application or NMEA 0400® Products must at all times remain compliant with the NMEA 0400® Standard. In the event that NMEA determines that licensee is using NMEA Marks in a manner not in compliance with the provisions of this Agreement, NMEA will notify licensee to immediately correct or cease such use of the NMEA Marks. Upon NMEA’s request, licensee will make available to an NMEA representative samples of printed materials bearing the NMEA Mark, and provide NMEA access to the NMEA 0400® Approved Application or NMEA 0400® Product to enable NMEA to confirm that licensee is in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If conditions of this agreement are breached, NMEA reserves the right to rescind NMEA 0400® certification from the offender’s products. 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 6.6 Proprietary Rights. Licensee acknowledges that NMEA owns the NMEA Marks and agrees that licensee will do nothing inconsistent with such ownership and that use of any NMEA Marks by licensee, and goodwill arising out of such use, inures solely to NMEA’s benefit. Licensee will give prompt notice to NMEA of any known or potential infringement of the NMEA Marks. Licensee will cooperate with reasonable requests by NMEA for the execution of any documents required to register the NMEA Marks or to record this Agreement with the appropriate authorities. Licensee agrees that nothing in this Agreement will give licensee any right, title, or interest in the NMEA Marks other than the right to use the NMEA Marks in accordance with this Agreement. Licensee will not challenge or aid in challenging the validity of the NMEA Marks or NMEA’s ownership of the NMEA Marks, or take any action in derogation of NMEA’s rights therein, including without limitation applying to register any trademarks, service marks, logos, trade names, or other designation that is confusingly similar to any NMEA Mark. If licensee acquires any rights in the NMEA Marks by operation of law or otherwise, licensees do hereby assign, and agree to assign, such rights to NMEA, at no expense to NMEA. 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 7. No Warranty. THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. NMEA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT, AND ANY WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS ARISING OUT OF COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED FROM NMEA OR ELSEWHERE WILL CREATE ANY WARRANTY OR CONDITION NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NMEA is not obligated to provide licensee with upgrades, updates, fixes, or services related to or for the NMEA 0400® Standard. 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 8. Limitation of Liability. NMEA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO LICENSEE FROM ALL CAUSES OF ACTION AND UNDER ALL THEORIES OF LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNTS PAID TO NMEA BY LICENSEE FOR THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD OR, IN THE EVENT THAT NMEA HAS MADE THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD AVAILABLE TO LICENSEE WITHOUT CHARGE, NMEA’S TOTAL LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO $100. IN NO EVENT WILL NMEA BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, BUSINESS, PROFITS OR ABILITY TO EXECUTE) OR FOR THE COST OF PROCURING SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE EXECUTION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD, WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM ANY CLAIM BASED UPON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, AND WHETHER OR NOT NMEA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL SURVIVE AND APPLY EVEN IF ANY LIMITED REMEDY SPECIFIED IN THIS AGREEMENT IS FOUND TO HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to licensee. No action, whether in contract or tort including but not limited to negligence, arising out of or in connection with this Agreement may be brought by either party more than eighteen (18) months after the cause of action has accrued. 162 163 164 165 9. Indemnity. Licensee agrees to defend, indemnify and hold the NMEA and its officers, directors, and employees harmless from and against any loss, liability, costs or expenses (including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees) arising from or incurred as a result of any third party claims, to the extent that such claims relate to or are based on licensee’s breach of this Agreement or use of the NMEA 0400® Standard. 166 167 168 169 10. Export Regulations. Licensee agrees to comply fully with all U.S. export laws and regulations to ensure that neither the NMEA 0400® Standard nor any technical data related thereto nor any direct product thereof are exported or re-exported directly or indirectly in violation of, or used for any purposes prohibited by, such laws and regulations. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 4 of 313 2014 NMEA 170 171 172 173 174 175 11. U.S. Government End Users. The NMEA 0400® Standard is a “commercial item” as that term is defined in FAR 2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” respectively, as such terms are used in FAR 12.212 and DFARS 227.7202. If the NMEA 0400® Standard is being acquired by or on behalf of the U.S. Government, then, as provided in FAR 12.212 and DFARS 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the U.S. Government’s rights in the NMEA 0400® Standard will be only those specified in this Agreement. 176 177 12. Governing Law. Any action related to this Agreement will be governed by Maryland law and controlling U.S. federal law. No conflict of laws rules or principles of any jurisdiction will apply. 178 179 13. Severability. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable or invalid, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent possible, and the other provisions will remain in full force and effect. 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 14. General. This Agreement is the parties’ entire agreement relating to its subject matter. It supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, conditions, representations and warranties and prevails over any conflicting or additional terms of any quote, order, acknowledgment, or other communication between the parties relating to its subject matter during the term of this Agreement. No modification to this Agreement will be binding, unless in writing and signed by an authorized representative of each party. Licensee may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any rights granted hereunder, by operation of law or otherwise, without NMEA’s prior written consent, and any attempt by licensee to do so, without such consent, will be void. Except as expressly set forth in this Agreement, the exercise by either party of any of its remedies under this Agreement will be without prejudice to its other remedies under this Agreement or otherwise. All notices or approvals required or permitted under this Agreement will be in writing and delivered by confirmed facsimile transmission, by overnight delivery service, or by certified mail, and in each instance will be deemed given upon receipt. All notices or approvals will be sent to the addresses set forth in the applicable ordering document or invoice or to such other address as may be specified by either party to the other in accordance with this section. The failure by either party to enforce any provision of this Agreement will not constitute a waiver of future enforcement of that or any other provision. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive understanding and agreement between the parties regarding its subject matter, and supersedes all proposals, understandings or communications between the parties, oral or written, regarding its subject matter, unless licensee and NMEA have executed a separate agreement. Any terms or conditions contained in licensee’s purchase order or other ordering document that are inconsistent with or in addition to the terms and conditions of this Agreement are hereby rejected by NMEA and will be deemed null. The International Marine Electronics Association (IMEA) is a sister company of the National Marine Electronics Association. IMEA is a U.S. non-profit organization organized under the U.S. tax codes of a 501 (c) (3). This permits IMEA to pursue alternative sources of revenue and to establish a Non-Profit Foundation. The National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) / International Marine Electronics Association Interface Standards are intended to serve the public interest by facilitating interconnection and interchangeability of equipment, minimizing misunderstanding and confusion between manufacturers, and assisting purchasers in selecting compatible equipment. The National Marine Electronics Association, Inc. has registered the trademarks: NMEA® IMEA®; Sale of this product by the Association does not include a license to use its trademarks. Reference to an NMEA trademark and IMEA trademark requires inclusion of the ®symbol to acknowledge NMEA’s ownership. The National Marine Electronics Association and International Marine Electronics Association own the copyright © to NMEA 0400 and to NMEA 0400 HS. Multiple licenses may be available at [email protected]. 15. Contact Information. If licensee has any questions regarding this Agreement, please contact NMEA at [email protected] IF LICENSEE AGREES TO THE FOREGOING TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND DESIRES TO COMPLETE THE DOWNLOAD OR INSTALLATION OF THE NMEA 0400® STANDARD, PLEASE CLICK THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON BELOW. OTHERWISE, PLEASE CLICK THE “I DO NOT ACCEPT” BUTTON AND THE DOWNLOAD OR INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL STOP. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 5 of 313 2014 NMEA 219 220 221 222 223 224 Contributors to the 0400 Revision 4.00 The National Marine Electronics Association would like to thank the following individuals who assisted the NMEA 0400 Technical Standards Committee for their remarkable efforts and dedication in promoting the NMEA mission. 225 Name Company Name Company Steve Wallace Lunde Marine Actisense Aaron Smith Yacht Systems NW Airmar Rich Beattie Uniden Kevin Boughton ICOM Jim Murphy Voyager Marine Standard Horizon Greg Pohl George Irish Digital Yacht Humminbird Furuno Bart Stein Lumishore Greg Whittle Raymarine Mike Spyros Electronics Unlimited Navico John Barry Technical Marine Humminbird Ralph Sponar United Radio Garmin Brian Kane GOST Maretron Peter Lund KVH KVH Matt Wood Furuno USA Flir Juilo De Valle Ron Ramasaran Hemisphere GPS Steve Spitzer Mark Reedenauer Johnny Lindstrom Need to finalize list and add contributors after 60 day public comment period 226 227 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 6 of 313 2014 NMEA 228 229 Forward to Version 4.0 230 231 232 233 234 235 The National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) is proud to publish NMEA 0400, Installation Standards for Marine Electronic Equipment Used on Vessels, Version 4.0, which are also referred in this document as Installation Standards. The Installation Standards are produced by the NMEA 0400 Technical Standard Committee under the guidance of the NMEA Standard Development Program and promote the universality of marine electronic installation as closely as possible. 236 237 238 239 240 The primary objectives of the Installation Standards are to provide guidance and direction for the proper installation and safe operation of marine electronics worldwide, as well as to provide a methodology to yield consistent and professional results in the installation of marine electronics on vessels in the worldwide market. Furthermore, the Installation Standards reflect the NMEA mission to: 241 242 • Advance the technical marine electronics dealer through education, communication, training and certification. 243 244 • Strengthen the industry’s reputation in the marketplace through industry standards and recognition of excellence. 245 • Foster good business management and fair business practices among its members. 246 • Encourage the industry to hire highly-skilled and qualified technical service personnel. 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 With the ever-changing complexity of electronic systems, the convergence of electrical and electronics, and the evolution of systems integration, NMEA recognized the need for a comprehensive review of the Installation Standards. Version 4.0 of the Installation Standards is a global collaborative effort of the NMEA 0400 Technical Standards Committee, an enthusiastic and dedicated international group of industry-skilled professionals who volunteered many hours of their technical and editorial expertise. In this version, special consideration was given to emerging trends, including the increasing implementation of CPU-based and multitasking equipment and system orientation which demands a thorough understanding of proper installation, but not forgetting the basic foundations. As it recognizes the importance of emerging trends, the NMEA 0400 Technical Standards Committee will conduct a periodic review of the Installation Standards to ensure that they are in keeping with today’s technological advancements. 259 260 261 NMEA always welcomes your feedback. If you have comments or questions, you may reach us at www.standards.nmea.org or at [email protected]. If you would like to join the Technical Standards Committee, contact Steve Spitzer, Technical Director at [email protected]. 262 263 264 265 In closing, The National Marine Electronics Association would like to thank the NMEA 0400 Technical Standards Committee for their remarkable efforts and dedication in promoting the NMEA mission. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 7 of 313 2014 NMEA 266 267 268 1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 13 269 2 AC and DC Wiring installation......................................................................................... 19 270 3 Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection ............................................................... 26 271 4 Battery installation ............................................................................................................ 32 272 5 Charging System installation ............................................................................................ 37 273 6 Power Inverter installation ................................................................................................ 42 274 7 COAXIAL CABLE installation........................................................................................ 44 275 8 Data Interfacing- nmea 0183, nmea 2000, Ethernet ......................................................... 62 276 9 Antenna installation ........................................................................................................ 114 277 10 Display installations ........................................................................................................ 118 278 11 Black box installations .................................................................................................... 123 279 12 Transducer INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 126 280 13 Compass INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 142 281 14 RADAR INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 152 282 15 Autopilots........................................................................................................................ 157 283 16 Electromagnetic Interference .......................................................................................... 164 284 17 VHF & SSB Radio Installation ....................................................................................... 168 285 18 Computer System Installation ......................................................................................... 183 286 19 Automatic Identification Systems (AIS) Installation..................................................... 191 287 20 Satellite TV & Communications System installation ..................................................... 200 288 21 Security, Tracking, and Video / Camera Installation ...................................................... 206 289 22 Test Criteria .................................................................................................................... 216 290 Appendix A. Glossary................................................................................................................ 242 291 Appendix B. Vessel Commissioning Checklist ......................................................................... 253 292 Appendix C: Vessel inspection information ............................................................................... 255 293 Appendix D. Wire GAUGE and Voltage Drop Reference Tables ............................................ 256 294 Appendix E. Battery Capacity Calculation .................................................................................... 1 295 Appendix F NMEA 0183 V 4.10 Sentence Descriptions ............................................................ 3 296 Appendix G: NMEA 0183 Version 4.10 Sentence talker Identifiers ............................................. 8 297 Appendix H: NMEA 2000 PGN Numbers & descriptions ........................................................... 10 298 Appendix I VHF / GPS/ DSC NMEA 0183 wiring information ................................................ 27 299 Appendix J: INDEX ..................................................................................................................... 31 300 Appendix K Revision History..................................................................................................... 48 Table of Contents 301 302 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 8 of 313 2014 NMEA 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 List of Figures Figure 1: General use Battery with One Distribution Panel ........................................................ 24 Figure 2: Separate Sub-panel for Electronics .............................................................................. 25 Figure 3: Grounding System Interconnection .............................................................................. 28 Figure 4: DC Common Grounding System (ABYC-E-11).......................................................... 30 Figure 5: Battery Overcurrent Protection .................................................................................... 35 Figure 6: Echo Charger Connection ............................................................................................ 39 Figure 7: Battery Combiner Connection ...................................................................................... 40 Figure 8: Battery Isolator Connection.......................................................................................... 40 Figure 9: Coaxial Cable Cutaway ................................................................................................ 44 Figure 10: Protecting a Cable Junction ........................................................................................ 49 Figure 11: Coaxial Cable Minimum Bend Radius ....................................................................... 50 Figure 12: Cable Stripping ........................................................................................................... 55 Figure 13: Installation of PL-259 Connector on RG8U and RG213 ........................................... 56 Figure 14: Installation of PL-259 Connector on RG58 and RG8X ............................................. 57 Figure 15: Installation of BNC Connectors ................................................................................. 58 Figure 16: Installation of TNC Connectors ................................................................................. 59 Figure 17: Installation of F Connectors ....................................................................................... 60 Figure 18: NMEA 0183-HS Wiring ............................................................................................ 64 Figure 19: RS-232 and RS-422 Circuit Differences .................................................................... 66 Figure 20: Basic NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit .......................................................................... 67 Figure 21: NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit-example 1 .................................................................. 67 Figure 22: NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit example 2 .................................................................. 68 Figure 23: Combining Talkers for One Listener.......................................................................... 69 Figure 24: Combining Talkers for One Listener.......................................................................... 69 Figure 25: NMEA 2000® Network Topology example 1 ........................................................... 72 Figure 26: NMEA 2000® Network Topology example 2 ............................................................ 72 Figure 27: NMEA 2000® high power device with separate power connection ........................... 73 Figure 28: NMEA 2000® Power Tee ........................................................................................... 74 Figure 29: NMEA 2000 Cable examples ..................................................................................... 76 Figure 30: NMEA 2000 Connector pin outs ................................................................................ 77 Figure 31: Barrier Strip Wiring & Terminations ......................................................................... 78 Figure 32: NMEA 2000 Cable Cutaway...................................................................................... 78 Figure 33: Cable Installation Considerations............................................................................... 79 Figure 34: Redundant Power Supplies ......................................................................................... 82 Figure 35: End-Powered Network example ................................................................................. 84 Figure 36: Mid-Powered Network example ................................................................................ 85 Figure 37: Backbone Segment Lengths ....................................................................................... 89 Figure 38: Dedicated Power Leads for Large Loads ................................................................... 90 Figure 39: Single Power Leg Using Battery ................................................................................ 94 Figure 40: Single Leg Using Isolated Supply .............................................................................. 95 Figure 41: Multiple Power Legs Using Isolated Supplies ........................................................... 96 Figure 42: Collocated Power Insertion Points Using Battery ...................................................... 97 Figure 43: Ethernet Topology ...................................................................................................... 99 Figure 44: Maximum Operational Length When Two Hubs Are Used..................................... 101 Figure 45: EIA/TIA Color Codes for Straight and Crossover Cable Wiring ............................. 102 Figure 46: EIA/TIA Color Codes for Straight and Crossover Cable Pin-outs ........................... 103 Figure 47: Installation of RJ45 Connector ................................................................................. 104 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 9 of 313 2014 NMEA 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 Figure 48: Hub vs. Switch .......................................................................................................... 106 Figure 49: Typical Antenna Installation ..................................................................................... 117 Figure 50: Flush-Mount Display Installation Steps .................................................................... 120 Figure 51: Bracket-Mount Display Installation Steps ................................................................ 121 Figure 52: Black box cable routing when mounted vertically ................................................... 124 Figure 53: Transom-Mount Transducer Installation .................................................................. 127 Figure 54: Low-Profile, Tilted Element Installation.................................................................. 128 Figure 55: Thru-Hull Transducer Installation ............................................................................ 128 Figure 56: In-Hull Transducer Installation ................................................................................ 129 Figure 57: Tank-Mount Transducer Installation ........................................................................ 129 Figure 58: Isolating a Transducer .............................................................................................. 131 Figure 59: Transom Mount Transducer Locations .................................................................... 132 Figure 60: In-hull Transducer Mounting ................................................................................... 133 Figure 61: Through-hull Transducer Mounting ......................................................................... 135 Figure 62: Through-hull Transducer / Fairing Block Cross-section .......................................... 137 Figure 63: Preparing a cored fiberglass hull .............................................................................. 138 Figure 64: GNSS Compass Horizontal Separation & Field of View......................................... 147 Figure 65: Radar Vertical Beam Widths .................................................................................... 152 Figure 66: Calculating Radar Range .......................................................................................... 156 Figure 67: Typical Autopilot block diagram .............................................................................. 157 Figure 68: Typical Rotary Rudder Reference diagram ............................................................... 159 Figure 69: Typical Linear Rudder Reference diagram ............................................................... 159 Figure 70: Effect of Antenna Radiation Pattern on Range When Heeling ................................ 172 Figure 71: Basic SSB Components ............................................................................................ 174 Figure 72: Typical Standoff Construction ................................................................................. 176 Figure 73: Typical Ketch or Powerboat Antenna ...................................................................... 177 Figure 74: Typical Backstay Installation ................................................................................... 178 Figure 75: Typical Split Backstay.............................................................................................. 178 Figure 76: SSB Ground System Example 1 ............................................................................... 181 Figure 77: SSB Ground System Example 2 ............................................................................... 181 Figure 78: USB System Diagram .............................................................................................. 187 Figure 79: USB Layout Considerations ..................................................................................... 188 Figure 80: AIS Antenna mounting and spacing considerations................................................. 194 Figure 81: AIS Interfacing Options ........................................................................................... 196 Figure 82: Determining Reference Electronic Position Fixing Antenna Location .................... 199 Figure 83: Typical Satellite System Block Diagram ................................................................. 200 Figure 84: Line-of-Sight Interference ........................................................................................ 202 Figure 85: Satellite System Installation Photograph.................................................................. 203 Figure 86: Radar Vertical Beam width ...................................................................................... 204 Figure 87: Tracking Antenna mounting locations ..................................................................... 211 Figure 88: Typical Serial camera Control connection diagram ................................................. 214 Figure 89: Typical Ethernet camera Control connection diagram ............................................. 215 Figure 90: NMEA 2000 Application software & USB Interfaces ............................................. 220 Figure 91: Examples of NMEA 2000 USB Interfaces............................................................... 221 Figure 92: Example of NMEA 2000 Application / Design Software ........................................ 221 Figure 93: SSB Power test Setup ............................................................................................... 232 Figure 94: SSB Antenna Power test Setup ................................................................................ 233 Figure 95: VHF Radio Test Setup ............................................................................................. 237 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 10 of 313 2014 NMEA 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 List of Tables Table 1: Vessel Grounding Systems ........................................................................................................ 26 Table 2: Emergency Communications 12 Volt Battery Loads ............................................................... 33 Table 3: Maximum Allowed Signal Loss by Application ...................................................................... 47 Table 4: 50 Ohm Marine Coaxial Cable Characteristics ........................................................................ 47 Table 5: 75 Ohm Marine Coaxial Cable Characteristics ........................................................................ 48 Table 6: Connector Types, Frequency, and Usage Chart ....................................................................... 48 Table 7: Coaxial Cable Loss Characteristics (50 Ohm).......................................................................... 52 Table 8: Coaxial Cable Loss Characteristics (75 Ohm).......................................................................... 52 Table 9: Transmission Line Loss Calculation ........................................................................................ 53 Table 10: Example 1 Loss Calculation ................................................................................................... 54 Table 11: Example 2 Loss Calculation ................................................................................................... 54 Table 12: Example 3 Loss Calculation ................................................................................................... 55 Table 13: PL-259 Cable Stripping Dimensions ...................................................................................... 57 Table 14: BNC Cable Stripping Dimensions .......................................................................................... 58 Table 15: TNC Connector Detail & Cable Stripping Dimensions (RG-58) ........................................... 59 Table 16: NMEA 0183 and NMEA 0183-HS Data Transmission Characteristics ................................. 64 Table 17: NMEA 0183 Signal Color Codes ........................................................................................... 70 Table 18: NMEA 2000® Cable Types & Specifications......................................................................... 75 Table 19: NMEA 2000® Signal Color Codes ......................................................................................... 78 Table 20: Maximum Network Voltage Drop .......................................................................................... 83 Table 21: Voltage Drop Range vs. Power and Topology Options ......................................................... 86 Table 22: Detailed Voltage Drop Calculations ....................................................................................... 87 Table 23: End-Powered Network Initial Estimate .................................................................................. 91 Table 24: Mid-Powered Network Initial Estimate for Entire Backbone ................................................ 92 Table 25: Mid-Powered Network Estimate for Each Leg ...................................................................... 92 Table 26: Mid-Powered Network Detailed Analysis .............................................................................. 93 Table 27: Test Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 98 Table 28: Pre-defined Instance Assignments .......................................................................................... 98 Table 29: Characteristics of Hubs vs. Switches .................................................................................... 107 Table 30: Internet Protocol Configuration Parameters ......................................................................... 109 Table 31: IP Address Assignment sheet ............................................................................................... 111 Table 32: Antenna Types ...................................................................................................................... 114 Table 33: Minimum Antenna Horizontal Spacing in Feet .................................................................... 115 Table 34: Minimum Antenna Horizontal Spacing in Meters................................................................ 116 Table 35: Transducer Materials ............................................................................................................ 130 Table 36: Suitable Transducer Selection Combinations ....................................................................... 130 Table 37: Minimum Environmental Protection .................................................................................... 184 Table 38: Computer Application Matrix............................................................................................... 185 Table 39: Common Computer Interfaces .............................................................................................. 186 Table 40: USB Length Considerations by Version............................................................................... 187 Table 41: Vessel Navigation Parameters for AIS Class A and Class B ............................................... 192 Table 42: AIS Pilot Plug Input/output Port Pin Out ............................................................................. 195 Table 43: AIS Navigation Data Formats .............................................................................................. 197 Table 44: Vessel Type Identifiers ......................................................................................................... 198 Table 45: Equipment Tests and Requirements ..................................................................................... 217 Table 46: Typical SSB Transmission Test Measurements ................................................................... 232 Table 47: SSB Transmission Measurements ........................................................................................ 234 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 11 of 313 2014 NMEA 450 451 452 Table 48: VHF Test Measurements ...................................................................................................... 238 Table 49: Satellite System Voltage Test ............................................................................................... 240 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 12 of 313 2014 NMEA 453 1 454 455 456 457 458 459 INTRODUCTION These standards have been published to clarify and define appropriate and consistent installation practices onboard vessels for marine electronics installers, technicians, electricians, surveyors, owners, and/or others who may have occasion to install, service, or modify the installation of electronics, electrical systems, or other associated peripherals. 1.1 Purpose and Scope 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 The National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) has developed these Installation Standards to promote practices that will yield consistent and professional results in the installation of marine electronics on vessels worldwide. The NMEA membership is made up of national and international technical experts, many of whom generously contributed their experience, expertise, and vision to the development of this document. The Installation Standards are created and edited by the NMEA Installation Standards Committee and is one of NMEA’s Technical Standards Committees under the guidance of the NMEA Standards Development Program Committee. 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 The Installation Standards are intended for all vessels that use marine electronics systems for communication, navigation, and electronic electrical distribution purposes. The focus of the Installation Standards is operational safety – safety that comes from reliable equipment operation at the highest performance level achievable. High performance is only achievable when every component is installed in a manner that maximizes the available signal or data while minimizing unwanted influences. These Installation Standards provide the necessary guidance to identify and avoid practices that compromise operational performance in a marine environment. 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 The Installation Standards also address emerging trends for the use of more sophisticated CPU-based and multitasking equipment and systems on vessels. These latest trends have introduced a world of more complex marine electronics products and have increased the capabilities of communication, navigation, and related systems. Along with increased capabilities has come a higher degree of network integration that requires a higher degree of installation knowledge and expertise than at any previous time in the history of boating. The practices in these standards address these changing conditions as well as prepare a foundation for future requirements. 484 485 1.1.1 Disclaimer 486 487 488 489 490 These Installation Standards represent a guide to achieving specific levels of performance and are promulgated by the NMEA for voluntary conformance. NMEA believes that implementing these commonly accepted practices will enhance boating safety and bring continuity and uniformity to marine electronics installation activities which, in turn, improves customer satisfaction industry-wide. 491 492 493 494 495 Prospective users of these Installation Standards are responsible for determining the appropriateness of the information contained herein for a specific vessel and its intended use. NMEA assumes no responsibility whatsoever for the use, or non-use, of these Installation Standards; the adaptation of processes and information contained herein; or any resulting consequences of such use, non-use, or adaptation. Additional 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 13 of 313 2014 NMEA 496 497 limitations on use technical information contained in these Installation Standards may apply; see End User License Agreement. 498 499 Prospective users of these Installation Standards are responsible for protecting themselves against liability for infringement of patents. 500 1.1.2 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 These Installation Standards do not substitute for installation and design requirements that may be imposed by local regulatory agencies pertaining to physical safety of electrical and electronic equipment. Such regulatory requirements establish minimum standards for wiring and associated equipment sufficient to protect equipment and personnel from over-current, fire, shock, or other environmental hazards intrinsic to the marine environment such equipment is installed and operated in. Professionals following these Installation Standards should understand and meet all standards applicable to the locality they are working within. Domestically and internationally, this standard defers to the proper and appropriate standards for power circuitry protection as promulgated by each respective country’s regulatory agency. Refer to Section 1.2.2 for other potentially applicable standards. 1.2 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 Local Regulations References The following Normative references form a part of these Installation Standards to the extent they are referenced herein. Where conflicts exist between this document and the normative references listed below, the normative reference shall take precedence. Informative references provide essential background requirements that may or may not have applicability, depending on the geographic locale. 1.2.1 Normative References ABYC E-11, AC and DC Electrical Systems on Boats, American Boat & Yacht Council, Inc., July 2003. 521 522 523 EIA/TIA-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Electronics Industry Alliance: Telecommunications Industry Association, April 2001. 524 525 IEC 60529, Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code), International Electrotechnical Commission, Edition 2.1, 2001. 526 527 528 529 IEEE 802.3-2005, Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems; Local and Metropolitan Area Networks; Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., December, 2005. 530 531 NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), National Electrical Manufacturers Association, January 1, 2003. 532 NMEA 0183, Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Devices. 533 534 NMEA 0183-HS, 38.4 K Baud Serial Data Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Devices. 535 NMEA 2000®, Standard for Serial-data Networking of Marine Electronic Devices, 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 14 of 313 2014 NMEA 536 537 TT-S-00230C(2), Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component, U.S. General Services Administration, Federal Acquisition Service, October 1970. 538 539 TT-S-227B(1), Sealer Compound; Rubber Base, Two Component, U.S. General Services Administration, Federal Acquisition Service, June 1965. 540 541 1.2.2 Informative References 542 543 ABYC A-31, Battery Chargers and Inverters, American Boat & Yacht Council, Inc., 2005. 544 ABYC E-2, Cathodic Protection, American Boat & Yacht Council, Inc., July 2001. 545 ABYC TE-4, Lightning Protection, American Boat & Yacht Council, Inc., 2006. 546 ABYC E-10, Storage Batteries, American Boat & Yacht Council, Inc., 2006. 547 ABYC C-1500: Ignition Protection Test for Marine Products (Formerly UL1500) 548 549 550 Code of Practice for Electrical and Electronic Installations in Small Craft, Fifth Edition, British Marine Electrical & Electronics Association, 2001, updated to April 2013. 551 552 ISO 10133, Small craft – Electrical systems – Extra-low-voltage D.C. Installations, International Organization for Standardization, 2012. 553 554 ISO 13297, Small craft – Electrical systems – Alternating Current Installations, International Organization for Standardization, 2012. 555 556 557 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2/2.07 SN/Circular 217 11 July 2001: INTERIM GUIDELINES FOR THE PRESENTATION AND DISPLAY OF AIS TARGET INFORMATION 558 559 560 561 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN.1/Circular 243/Add.1 10 December 2008: CORRIGENDA TO SN/CIRC.227 ON GUIDELINES FOR THE INSTALLATION OF A SHIPBORNE AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS) 562 563 564 565 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN.1/Circular 243/Add.1 10 December 2008 AMENDMENT TO GUIDELINES FOR THE PRESENTATION OF NAVIGATION-RELATED SYMBOLS, TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 566 567 568 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN/Circular 243 15 December 2004 GUIDELINES FOR THE PRESENTATION OF NAVIGATION-RELATED SYMBOLS, TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 569 570 571 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN/Circular 244 15 December 2004 GUIDANCE ON THE USE OF THE UN/LOCODE IN THE DESTINATION FIELD IN AIS MESSAGES 572 573 574 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN.1/Circular 289 2 June 2010: GUIDANCE ON THE USE OF AIS APPLICATION-SPECIFIC MESSAGES 575 IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION Reference 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 15 of 313 2014 NMEA 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 T2-OSS/2.7.1 SN.1/Circular 290 2 June 2010 GUIDANCE FOR THE PRESENTATION AND DISPLAY OF AIS APPLICATION-SPECIFIC MESSAGES INFORMATION 586 587 588 Title 46 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Chapter I, Subpart T, Part 183, Small Passenger Vessels (Under 100 Gross Tons), United States Coast Guard (USCG), Department of Homeland Security. IMO INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION SN.1/Circular 322 24 June 2013 INFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY OF AIS-SART, AIS MAN OVERBOARD AND EPIRB-AIS DEVICES Title 33 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 183, Boats and Associated Equipment, United States Coast Guard (USCG), Department of Homeland Security. 589 590 1.3 Comments and Corrections 591 592 593 594 595 NMEA places a high priority on ensuring that its specifications and standards are up to date and sponsors a working committee that continually monitors technological changes in marine electronics in order to periodically update and revise these standards as deemed necessary. If you have comments, corrections, or topics you would like addressed by the working committee, contact the NMEA. 596 597 Requests may be submitted electronically via e-mail to [email protected] or may be mailed or faxed to: 598 599 600 601 602 603 NMEA 7 Riggs Avenue Severna Park, MD 21146-3819 USA Phone: 001 (410) 975-9425 Fax: 001 (410) 975-9450 Web: www.nmea.org 604 605 Please be sure to include the following information in your request: 606 Comments and Corrections Form Date: Name: Company: Address: City: State: Zip: E-mail Address: 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 16 of 313 2014 NMEA Phone Number: Document Title: Document Version/Revision: Document Publication Date: Short Description: NMEA 0400 Installation Standards Version 4.000 2014 Page: Section: Figure Number: Table Number: Item Number: Detailed Description: Include any additional information you think is required 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 17 of 313 2014 NMEA 607 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 18 of 313 2014 NMEA 608 2 609 610 611 612 613 This section identifies recommended standards and practices for providing power to onboard electronic systems. This information is intended to ensure an adequate power distribution system that supports all installed electronics and is easy for the owner to monitor and operate. 2.1 614 615 616 617 618 619 AC AND DC WIRING INSTALLATION General Considerations Power supply connections for onboard electronics installed in accordance with these standards shall meet the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. When requirements cannot be met with existing power distribution systems, additional power distribution components are to be installed in accordance with the remaining provisions of Section 2. 2.1.1 620 621 622 623 Existing Capacity Prior to installation of electronic devices, the onboard power distribution system wiring and panels shall be evaluated to determine if existing capacity will adequately supply the new devices that will be installed. Criteria for determining the power capability of the existing system installation include the following factors: 624 • New electronic device load requirements 625 626 • Existing power capacity of the main distribution panel and/or sub-panel determined by evaluating: 627 o Feed wire size and length 628 o Existing load requirements 629 o Available spare breakers or fuses 630 631 632 A separate evaluation is required for each distribution panel area and/or input voltage available. If both 24VDC and 12VDC are available and used to provide power to electronic equipment, separate evaluations shall be performed for each voltage. 633 634 635 636 Evaluation results will determine if the new equipment can be directly connected to an existing distribution panel, or if new feed cables and over-current protection need to be installed. For new construction, the electrical requirements of vessel service equipment and electronic devices need to be considered to determine the total load requirements. 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 2.1.2 New Electronic Device Load Requirements Load requirements for new electronic devices to be installed shall be determined from the manufacturer’s specifications. If input power is specified in watts, then calculate the input current in amps by dividing the input power in watts by the minimum usable voltage from the following list: • • • For 12-volt systems: use 11 V For 24-volt systems: use 22 V For 32-volt systems: use 30 V 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 19 of 313 2014 NMEA 646 647 648 Consider the example of an electronic device that operates on a nominal 12-volt system and consumes 48 watts. Compute the input amps as follows and round to the nearest 10th of an amp: 649 Input current = 48 watts / 11volts = 4.4 amps 650 2.1.3 Existing Distribution Panel Capacity 651 652 653 654 655 The following method, incorporating methods from ABYC E-11 for determining wire size and type, should be used to determine if existing distribution panels or sub-panels have sufficient capacity for the new equipment. Methods identified by the local regulatory agency may be substituted. All methods should include the following basic steps: 656 657 1. Determine the total load of existing equipment and new equipment to be added. 658 659 2. Verify that the existing panel feed wire and breakers have sufficient current carrying capacity for the determined load. 660 661 662 3. Verify that the existing panel feed wire has a 3% or less voltage drop for the determined load, considering the round-trip distance from the battery to the panel and back to the battery. 663 664 4. If either of the last two verifications fails, the feed to the existing panel must be upgraded or a new distribution panel is required. 665 2.1.4 666 667 668 Sub-panels A separate sub-panel is recommended to consolidate and identify electronics loads separately from other loads or from other electronics at a different helm location. A separate sub-panel should be considered when either of the following conditions exists: 669 670 1. Electronics are to be installed at a helm location at a distance greater than 10 feet (3.04 m) from an existing distribution panel. 671 2. Electronics are to be installed in multiple helm locations. 672 2.1.5 Wiring and Panel Marking 673 674 675 Each breaker shall be clearly and consistently marked or labeled as to the equipment powered from that breaker. The same label should be used at each item of equipment where ambiguity may exist due to multiple equipment of the same function. 676 677 Panels shall be marked according to their source and shall be consistent with marking required in Section 4.2.3, Battery System Marking. 678 For example: 679 680 681 682 683 • • • • • Ships Service Battery #1 Ships Service Battery #2 Electronics Battery #1 Emergency Battery #1 Main Deck Distribution Panel 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 20 of 313 2014 NMEA 684 685 686 687 Wires shall be color coded with a table provided to the vessel owner, or shall be clearly identified within 12 inches (30 cm) of each termination point with a clear marking to identify either the wire number or the wire function. 2.1.6 688 689 690 691 692 693 Wiring System Documentation A diagram and/or table shall be prepared, noting for each installed item of equipment the distribution panel and breaker location for the power source, the wire designation and color, the breaker size, and the location and rating of any in-line fuse at the equipment. The diagram, table, or accompanying description shall note the locations of all connections and terminations and how to gain access to them for routine inspection. 2.1.7 AC and DC Conductor Designations 694 695 696 697 698 699 AC and DC power distribution consists of two current-carrying conductors, one to provide power to a device, and the other to provide a return path for the power back to the power source. Generally, one of the two current-carrying conductors is intentionally connected to ground. In addition, each distribution system also has a third non-current carrying conductor that is also connected to ground in order to protect personnel and equipment from becoming part of the current path. 700 701 702 The following conductor nomenclature has been established for AC and DC systems and is in alignment with other designations and standards within both the marine industry and other industries. 703 704 705 AC Ungrounded Conductor – Also referred to as the hot (live) conductor, this conductor is maintained at a different potential from ground in order to cause current to flow through attached equipment; typically black or brown. 706 707 708 AC Grounded Conductor – Also referred to as the neutral conductor, this conductor is intentionally maintained at ground potential and conducts current from the attached equipment to ground; typically white or light blue. 709 710 711 712 713 AC Grounding Conductor – This conductor normally conducts no current, but acts as a safety ground for AC equipment by conducting current directly to ground in the event that the AC Ungrounded Conductor comes in contact with a conductive equipment case; typically green or green with yellow tracer. Grounding provides an alternate path back to the source of power ensuring that a circuit breaker will trip. 714 715 716 DC Ungrounded Conductor – Also referred to as the positive conductor, this conductor is maintained at a different potential from ground in order to cause current to flow through attached equipment ; typically red. 717 718 719 720 DC Grounded Conductor – Also referred to as the negative conductor, this conductor is intentionally maintained at ground potential and conducts current from the attached equipment to ground or to the negative grounded terminal of a battery or charging source; typically black or yellow 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 DC Grounding Conductor – This conductor normally conducts no current, and its purpose is similar to the AC Grounding Conductor; typically green or green with yellow tracer. The main benefit in marine applications is to protect metal enclosures that may be in contact with seawater from exposure to energized conditions that could lead to stray current corrosion. Unlike the AC Grounding Conductor, the DC Grounding Conductor is normally routed separately from the current carrying conductors, and is frequently used for bonding metal fixtures. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 21 of 313 2014 NMEA 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 Connection of the vessel ground to the earth ground is accomplished through contact with the water. Several grounding systems, in addition to those identified here, are used onboard vessels to increase safety or to improve onboard electronic device performance. The nature and purpose of each grounding system and their interconnection is described in more detail in Section 3, Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection. 2.2 Equipment Wiring Requirements 735 736 737 Electronic equipment shall be connected to the vessel power distribution system in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.3) and the provisions contained in the following paragraphs. 738 739 Data wire and cable selection are addressed separately in Section 7, Coaxial Cables, and Section 8, Data Interfacing. 740 2.2.1 Wire Gauge 741 742 Wire used to provide power to electronic equipment shall have a gauge that is the greatest cross-sectional area of: 743 744 745 1. The gauge determined in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where the equipment is installed to provide the current carrying capacity requirements of the connected equipment (see Section 1.1.3). 746 747 2. For AC circuits, the gauge determined by the methods described in Appendix C to limit the voltage drop to 10% or less. 748 749 3. For DC circuits, the gauge determined by the methods described in Appendix C to limit the voltage drop to 3% or less. 750 Tinned copper wire is recommended in all installations. 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 NOTE: When DC electronic equipment is connected to the power source via one or more distribution panels or sub-panels, the round-trip distance used to compute the voltage drop for the purpose of determining wire size shall be the total round-trip distance from the power source to the equipment, including the round-trip distance(s) of each distribution panel or sub-panel from its respective distribution point, unless the voltage drop is less than 1% at the distribution panel or subpanel from which the equipment is distributed. 758 2.2.2 Connections and Terminations 759 760 761 762 Power supply connections and terminations shall be made using termination types identified in ABYC E-11, provided that the connection remains secure, without parting or disconnecting, when subjected to the Tensile Test Forces for Connections identified therein. Termination methods that satisfy these requirements include: 763 764 1. Insulated ring or captive spade lugs connected to barrier strips, breakers, buss bars, or other devices 765 2. Pressure type terminal strips, such as Wago-strips or Euro-strips 766 3. Manufacturer-provided connectors 767 768 All connections and terminations shall be located where they may be routinely inspected, and their location shall be documented in accordance with Section 2.1.6. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 22 of 313 2014 NMEA 769 2.3 770 771 772 773 774 Electrical distribution panels installed or upgraded to satisfy the requirements of Section 2.1 shall be installed or upgraded in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.3) and the provisions contained in the following paragraphs. 2.3.1 775 776 777 778 779 780 Distribution Panels Capacity Distribution panels or sub-panels shall be designed to accommodate all electronic equipment at a specific helm location and should include at least two spare breaker locations for expansion. The sub-panel load capacity, feed cable size, and feeder overcurrent protection shall be determined in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.3). 2.3.2 Voltmeters 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 Each distribution panel and sub-panel supplying power to electronic equipment and having a total load capacity of greater than 10 amps shall provide a means of displaying the actual, available voltage supplied to the panel. Such means may include a voltmeter or other voltage monitoring equipment. The voltage display shall be mounted within visibility of the panel or within the normal operation of the equipment at the helm and shall be labeled to identify the panel source it is monitoring. If the voltmeter is mounted separately from the panel, over-current protection shall be provided to protect the leads from the panel to the voltmeter. 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 If a voltmeter is used, a digital voltmeter is recommended. An analog voltmeter with an expanded range or a maximum voltage scale of not more than 150% of the rated operating voltage is acceptable. Voltmeters may be connected directly to the input source or may be connected by momentary contact switch for monitoring more than one source, if multiple sources of the same operating voltage are supplying a panel. Meter switch positions shall be clearly labeled in accordance with the identification requirements of Section 2.1.3. 796 2.3.3 Multiple Voltages 797 798 799 800 If a panel contains more than one system voltage, the different system voltages shall be identified clearly on both the front and rear of the panel. Sections of a distribution panel will be electrically and physically isolated if more than one system voltage is included in the design of the panel. 801 802 803 If a panel contains more than one system voltage, there will be separate and independent meters to identify the different system voltages, and identification of the voltage connections at the rear of the panel. 804 805 806 807 NOTE: Voltage monitoring systems that measure and display multiple voltages may be used provided that voltage measurement is performed using independent elements, and there is no possibility of cross connecting the voltages within, or external to, the voltage monitoring system. 808 2.4 809 810 Ignition Protection Potential electrical sources of ignition located in enclosed spaces containing explosive materials, or containing machinery, equipment, or fittings that may contain explosive 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 23 of 313 2014 NMEA 811 812 813 814 materials, shall be ignition protected. Explosive materials include, but are not limited to gasoline, propane, and compressed natural gas (CNG). Refer to CFR-33 and ABYC E11 Standards for more information on enclosed spaces. 2.5 815 816 817 Example Wiring Diagrams The wiring diagrams shown herein illustrate accepted practices for connecting installed electronics and distribution panels to provide power to onboard electronics. 2.5.1 Electronics Power from Main Distribution 818 819 820 Electronics powered from a single main or electronics distribution panel are illustrated in Figure 1. The distribution panel is powered from a battery separate from the main engine cranking battery. This example should be followed when: 821 822 823 1. No battery other than the main cranking battery was available at the start of installation, and the installation includes a new battery and distribution panel to support the installed electronics, or 824 825 2. An existing general use battery and main distribution panel with sufficient capacity for the new electronics. 826 827 Figure 1: General use Battery with One Distribution Panel 828 829 830 831 2.5.2 Electronics Power from Sub-panel Electronics powered from a separate sub-panel devoted to electronic loads are shown in Figure 2. The sub-panel may be powered from the same battery as the main 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 24 of 313 2014 NMEA 832 833 834 835 distribution panel if there is sufficient capacity for the vessel’s intended use. A separate sub-panel is required if an existing distribution panel cannot provide the required current carrying capacity or has insufficient spares for the electronics to be installed. 836 837 Figure 2: Separate Sub-panel for Electronics 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 2.5.3 DC Load Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 25 of 313 2014 NMEA 848 3 849 850 851 852 GROUNDING, BONDING, AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION This section identifies recommended standards for the installation of various grounding systems employed on a vessel. The information provided is intended to explain the purpose of each grounding system and illustrate acceptable interconnection methods. 3.1 General Considerations 853 854 855 856 Onboard electronics installed in accordance with this specification are to be interconnected by appropriately configured ground systems as specified in the following paragraphs. Where identified ground systems are not available, they shall be installed in accordance with the remaining provisions of Section 3. 857 858 859 860 NOTE: Older and restored vessels may use a “Positive Ground” DC distribution system where the Battery Positive connection is grounded. Proper operation of electronic equipment may require additional power conversions not addressed by these standards. 861 3.1.1 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 Grounding Systems The purpose of grounding systems is to establish a common electrical reference at the electrical potential of the earth’s surface, known as Ground Potential, and extend that reference throughout the vessel. Ground Potential is established by connecting the vessel ground to the earth ground through contact with the water, except for floating ground systems. There are several grounding systems onboard a vessel, each intended to perform different but similar functions. Table 1 lists the various ground systems that may be required and identifies where further information may be found. 869 870 Table 1: Vessel Grounding Systems System DC Ground or Negative AC Ground or Neutral AC Grounding (Safety) RF Ground Type Reference Reference Safety Performance Single Side Band (SSB) Ground DC Grounding Lightning Ground Performance When Required All vessels with DC Systems Vessels with AC Shore Power, Generator, or Inverter Installed Vessels with electronics equipment installed Vessels with SSB transceiver installed Reference Safety Further Information Section 2 Section 2 Section 3.2 Section 17.5 Section 3.3 Section 3.4 871 872 873 Ground systems can be classified by function and also by whether they carry current or not. Ground functions include: 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 Safety Grounds – Safety grounds are generally non-current carrying grounds intended to short dangerous potentials away from personnel, equipment, and the vessel in order to prevent injury or damage. Safety grounds include the AC Grounding system and the Lightning Ground system. Although current is not normally being carried in these systems, they must have the capacity to carry the currents they are expected to protect against for short periods of time. In the case of the Lightning Ground system, this current can reach very high levels for a short period of time. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 26 of 313 2014 NMEA 881 882 883 884 885 886 Performance Grounds – Performance grounds are used to reduce noise in electronic equipment and improve signal transmission and reception. Non-current carrying connections are typically made to Loran C receivers, differential radio beacon receivers, and Low Frequency (LF)/ Medium Frequency (MF)/ High Frequency (HF) transceivers for reducing noise. A current-carrying example is the MF/HF SSB antenna system, which does not carry DC current but will carry RF current. 887 888 889 890 891 892 Reference Grounds – Reference grounds are used to establish a potential in order to induce current flow in a desired direction. Obvious uses of reference grounds are the AC and DC distribution systems that use reference grounds to establish the necessary voltage and polarity. Another reference ground is the DC Grounding system that is frequently employed for bonding through-hull fixtures, although the currents in that system are so low that it is usually considered a non-current carrying system. 893 894 895 896 897 898 NOTE: Some vessels, particularly those with multiple DC voltage distribution systems (e.g., 12-volt and 24-volt systems) or a metal hull, may have one or more DC distribution systems floating, meaning that neither positive nor negative conductors are connected to the vessel ground systems. Special care must be taken not to ground floating distribution systems through improperly isolated equipment. 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 An ideal situation would be a single point where all grounding systems come together at Ground Potential and through which there is no current flowing. For practical reasons, a single point is rarely achievable, and each ground system has its own bus that must be connected together with the other busses. A Common Ground, which is part of the DC Common Grounding system as shown in Figure 3, may serve as the single point Ground Potential where all ground plates are connected directly to it. In some vessels with minimal electronics and no ground plates, the engine serves as Ground Potential by virtue of its large mass and contact with water though the shaft and propeller. 907 908 909 The remaining ground system connections in Figure 3 are arranged so that there is no current between any ground system and the Common Ground. No current flow means that there is no voltage differential generated because of conductor resistance. 910 911 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 27 of 313 2014 NMEA 912 913 Figure 3: Grounding System Interconnection 914 915 916 917 The three ground systems related to AC and DC power distribution are addressed in Section 2, AC and DC Wiring and are not discussed further here. The four remaining ground systems are discussed in more detail below. 3.1.2 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 All electronic devices with metallic display cases shall have the equipment display case connected to the RF Ground system identified in Section 3.2. The conductor size between the display case and the RF Ground system bus may be chosen to be compatible with the size of the grounding lug provided on the case, but shall be bonded to a conductor that is a minimum of #10 AWG within 18 inches (45 cm) of the display case. A conductor of #8 AWG is preferred if the distance between the display case and the RF Ground system bus is greater than 3 feet (1 m). 3.1.3 926 927 928 929 930 931 935 936 937 Electrical Equipment Grounding All electrical equipment with metallic cases, including motors, windlasses, pumps, and radar antenna motor base units, shall be connected to the DC Common Grounding system. Conductor type and size shall be as specified in ABYC E-2, Cathodic Protection. Connection may be made to a metallic structure meeting the requirements of Section 3.1.5. 3.1.4 932 933 934 Electronic Equipment and Display Grounding MF/HF SSB SSB transceivers and SSB antenna tuners shall be interconnected with the SSB Ground system in accordance with the provisions in Section 17.3.5, SSB Grounding. 3.1.5 Metal Structures All metallic structures mounted to the vessel, including metallic half towers, metallic radar arches, T-tops, tuna towers, outriggers, davits, etc., shall be connected to the DC Common Grounding system. Conductor type and size shall be as specified in ABYC 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 28 of 313 2014 NMEA 938 939 940 E-2, Cathodic Protection. Structures that straddle the vessel shall have at least two conductors, one run each on the port and starboard sides. The connections shall be clearly labeled as “Ground Connection. Do not disconnect.” 941 942 943 Where other means of lightning protection are not provided and the structure forms a part of the Lightning Ground system, conductor type and size shall be as specified in ABYC TE-4, Lightning Protection. 944 3.1.6 945 946 947 Marking and Color All ground system wiring not subject to other marking requirements shall be insulated with a green or green-with-colored-stripe jacket. Each end of each ground system wire shall be labeled with the name of the ground system of which it is a part. 948 949 NOTE: MF/HF SSB antenna grounding systems may employ copper strap or tubing that is exempt from this requirement. 950 3.2 RF Ground System 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 The primary purpose of the RF Ground system is to enhance or improve the signal-tonoise ratio (SNR) of the received radio signals by reducing stray EMI. It is typically used for receivers in the Very low Frequency (VLF) to HF bands, such as Omega, Loran C, differential beacon, and MF/HF. The RF Ground system is separate from the DC Ground and AC Ground systems and sets electronic equipment cases and cable system shields at a common ground potential, free from noise sources that may be introduced by the DC or AC distribution system. 958 959 960 961 The RF Ground system is not intended to be a current-carrying ground system. The RF ground bus shall be interconnected with the DC Ground system in such a manner that DC ground currents are not carried on any part of the RF Ground system path to Ground Potential. 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 The point of interconnection will depend on where the Ground Potential is defined. On small vessels without any other ground plates, the engine is considered Ground Potential, and the RF Ground system is connected directly to the engine negative terminal. On larger vessels with one or more ground plates, the ground plates or Common Ground bus directly connected to them is considered Ground Potential, and the RF Ground system is connected directly to the ground plate or Common Ground bus. 969 RF Ground system buss conductors shall be a minimum of #8 AWG. 970 971 972 973 NOTE: For vessels with metallic hulls (steel or aluminum), where the DC Ground system is connected to the hull and not floating, the hull shall be considered part of the RF Ground system and may be connected to directly as a means of connecting to the RF Ground system. 974 3.3 975 976 977 978 979 980 DC Common Grounding System The DC Common Grounding system interconnects the other vessel ground systems and may form a part of other systems through shared conductors. Cathodic Protection, if installed, forms a part of the DC Common Grounding system. Cathodic Protection is intended to reduce galvanic corrosion of metal through-hull fittings and metal enclosures for DC powered equipment on the vessel. By virtue of the number of through-hull fittings normally connected to the DC Grounding system, and the DC 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 29 of 313 2014 NMEA 981 982 983 Grounding system’s proximity to the hull and therefore the water, the DC Grounding system is often the main connection between the vessel and earth ground. 3.3.1 DC Common Grounding Connections 984 985 986 987 988 989 Connections with and extensions to the DC Common Grounding system shall be made in accordance with Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. Where elements of the DC Common Grounding system are shared with other ground systems, they shall meet the requirements of whichever system imposes the greater requirement. If Cathodic Protection is used aboard the vessel, it shall be connected with the DC Common Grounding system in accordance with ABYC E-11. 990 991 992 A grid-like connection layout, as shown in Figure 4, is recommended to improve the reliability and performance of the DC Common Grounding system, particularly when additional ground plates for SSB, Lightning, or other grounds are not installed. 993 994 995 996 Figure 4: DC Common Grounding System (ABYC-E-11) 3.3.2 Types of Corrosion 997 998 999 1000 1001 The following descriptions identify different corrosion problems that are encountered on vessels. The first three items are the most common problems the installer will face. The last three are typically the result of a vessel’s berthing location, the type of materials used underwater, or the fabrication of the vessel. Sometimes it is difficult to identify the source(s) of the problem, since many of the results appear to be identical. 1002 1003 1004 Electrolysis – A chemical and/or electrochemical change in a solution due to the passage of electric current. This term is sometimes used incorrectly to mean galvanic or stray current corrosion, or any of the other types of corrosion. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 30 of 313 2014 NMEA 1005 1006 1007 1008 Galvanic Corrosion – Corrosion resulting from electric current flow between dissimilar metals in contact with the same electrolyte. Galvanic Corrosion may also result from dissimilar variations in the composition of a single alloy (sometimes called selective corrosion) in contact with the same electrolyte. 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 Stray Current Corrosion – Similar to galvanic corrosion in that the more positive areas lose material to the less positive areas in an electrolyte, but it is caused by an outside source rather than spontaneously. The boat’s DC or AC system, the dock / marina A/C system, or other boats at the dock/marina could be the source of stray currents. 1014 1015 1016 1017 Velocity Corrosion or Ion Concentration – Most common if the vessel is berthed in a channel where the tide is very strong (water moves at several knots). Tidal flow can cause electrical currents that severely erode props, shafts, and other exposed metal surfaces. 1018 1019 1020 Selective Corrosion – A type of galvanic corrosion where the alloy is not properly made and pieces of different metals are in an electrolyte. The metal has a pitted appearance much like that of stray current corrosion. 1021 1022 1023 Oxygen Starvation – When metal surfaces overlap, the water between surfaces lacks oxygen, making this surface more positive (anodic) to the rest of the same metal and resulting in galvanic corrosion. 1024 3.4 Lightning Ground System 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 The probability of a lightning strike varies with geographic location and the time of the year, but when the conditions that create an electrical charge between clouds and the earth exist, nothing can be done to prevent the lightning discharge. A boat can be struck in open water or while tied to the dock/marina. There are three basic ways that lightning can cause damage aboard a vessel. 1030 1031 1032 1033 Direct Strike – The lightning discharge hits a part of the vessel, such as an antenna, and travels down the cable into the radio or antenna coupler. It may exit into the power or ground lines and be conducted through other equipment before exiting into the water. 1034 1035 1036 Conductive Strike – Lightning strikes a utility line and then is conducted aboard through the main AC power cord. This kind of strike may also be called a power surge and may be either a positive or negative surge. 1037 1038 1039 Inductive Strike – Lightning hits a nearby object such as a tree or flagpole and causes a large magnetic field, which in turn induces a voltage in the vessel’s wiring. The voltage can be either a positive or negative pulse or surge. 1040 3.4.1 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 Conductive and Inductive Strike Protection Several products are available commercially for protection against surges from conductive and inductive strikes. Individual manufacturer specifications should be consulted to determine their best application. 3.4.2 Direct Strike Protection An air terminal connected to the Lightning Ground system is recommended for protection against direct lightning strikes. Air terminals and the Lightning Ground system shall be installed in accordance with ABYC TE-4, Lightning Protection. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 31 of 313 2014 NMEA 1048 4 BATTERY INSTALLATION 1049 1050 1051 1052 This section identifies recommended standards and practices for batteries used to provide power for onboard electronic systems. The information provided is intended to result in a battery of adequate capacity that is easy for the owner/operator to use and maintain in top condition. 1053 1054 1055 NOTE: In these standards, the term "battery" is used to refer to either a single battery or a bank of batteries that are connected in series or parallel so as to provide a desired voltage or capacity. 1056 4.1 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 General Considerations Onboard electronics installed in accordance with these standards shall be provided with power from a battery that meets the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. When requirements cannot be met with existing equipment, additional batteries are to be installed in accordance with the remaining provisions of Section 4. 4.1.1 Power Source for Electronics 1062 1063 1064 Installed electronics shall be provided power from a battery source functionally independent from engine or generator starting batteries. A separate General use battery used for other DC loads, if available, may be used as a source for electronics. 1065 1066 1067 1068 The battery used as the electronics power source may be wired using a selectable battery switch so that it may be paralleled with one or more engine or generator starting batteries or an emergency battery. Parallel connections may be made using any of the following means: 1069 1070 1071 • A multiple-selection OFF-1-BOTH-2 battery switch to disconnect electronic loads, with the 1 terminal connected to the electronic battery source and the 2 terminal connected to a terminal in the cranking conductor path. 1072 1073 1074 • A separate ON-OFF battery switch from the battery switch used to disconnect electronic loads, which connects the positive ungrounded battery terminal to a terminal in the cranking conductor path. 1075 1076 • An electrically operated battery switch that connects the positive ungrounded battery terminal to a terminal in the cranking conductor path. 1077 Parallel connections shall be made as short as possible. 1078 1079 1080 NOTE: When the main power system onboard is a voltage other than 12 volts DC, installed electronics shall not be powered from a tap in between batteries, unless a suitable battery charge/voltage equalizer is installed. 1081 4.1.2 Emergency Communications Battery 1082 1083 1084 1085 An emergency communications battery is used to power the main Very High Frequency (VHF) band radio, navigation lights, and a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, if installed on the vessel. A separate battery to power emergency communications is recommended in installations where either of the following conditions exists: 1086 1087 1. The capacity of the battery sourcing electronics loads is insufficient to provide continued operation for at least 6 hours, or 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 32 of 313 2014 NMEA 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 2. The battery sourcing electronics loads is located in a space subject to flooding. When installed, an emergency communications battery shall be located where it will remain above water level if the machinery spaces are flooded, and shall have sufficient capacity to provide power to connected loads for a minimum of 6 hours. 4.1.2.1 Emergency Communications Battery Capacity 1093 1094 1095 The capacity for the emergency communications battery shall be calculated from the combined load of all connected equipment, taking into account the equipment duty cycle as follows: 1096 1097 • Each unit containing a radio transmitter will use a duty cycle of 50% rated transmit current and 50% rated receive current. 1098 • All other loads will use a duty cycle of 100% rated current. 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 Table 2 shows how the rated equipment loads are tabulated and summed for typical equipment attached to the emergency communications battery. The battery capacity is computed with the following equation using the total current in each column to derive the average discharge rate required from the battery. See Appendix D, Battery Capacity Calculations, to determine the required Battery Reserve Capacity that meets this requirement. 1105 Discharge rate 1106 = ((0.5 x 10.0 A) + (0.5 x 3.0 A) + 6.5 A) = 13.0 Amp 1107 1108 Table 2: Emergency Communications 12 Volt Battery Loads Item Manufacturer & Model VHF GPS Navigation Lights AIS Totals 1109 4.1.3 Transmit Power 6.0 A Receive Power 1.0 A Other Power 0.5 A 6.0 A 4.0 A 10.0 A 2.0 A 3.0 A 6.5 A Battery Construction 1110 1111 1112 1113 Lead-acid batteries are used in most marine applications and consist of lead and lead dioxide plates immersed in a sulfuric acid solution. The following battery construction types are acceptable as power sources for electronics installations and differ primarily in the way the sulfuric acid solution is maintained: 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 • Wet Cell Batteries. Liquid sulfuric acid is used to immerse the plates in Wet Cell (also known as Flooded) batteries. Hydrogen gas generated by the charging cycle is allowed to vent from the battery, reducing the level of acid available to cover the plates. As a result, Wet Cell Lead-Acid batteries require periodic maintenance to ensure that the plates remain submerged. 1119 1120 1121 1122 • Gel Cell Batteries. The sulfuric acid is mixed with other materials to form a viscous substance that completely encases the plates in Gel Cell batteries. Gel Cell batteries are sealed; as a result, hydrogen and oxygen created during charging is recombined internally, forming water that remains inside the case. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 33 of 313 2014 NMEA 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 • Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) Batteries. The sulfuric acid is absorbed in dense fiberglass mats compressed between the plates in AGM batteries. AGM batteries are also sealed, allowing hydrogen and oxygen to recombine internally. In addition, the fiberglass mats tend to reinforce the AGM battery plate structure, making them more shock and vibration resistant. 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 • Lithium Ion Batteries. Lithium ions move from the negative electrode to the positive electrode during discharge and back when charging. Lithium Ion batteries use an intercalated lithium compound as the electrode material. Saves up to 70% in space and weight, can have up to three times the lifespan of traditional batteries (2000 cycles), and have Ultra-fast charging and discharging. See manufacturer’s recommendations for storage, charging, installation, and operation. 1134 1135 NOTE: Batteries shall be charged and maintained using a charging source designed appropriately for their construction. 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 NOTE: Batteries of different construction or age or in different ambient conditions will exhibit different charge and discharge rates. Batteries in the same bank intended to be charged or discharged as a unit shall be of the same construction (Wet Cell, Gel Cell, or AGM) and relative age. In addition, batteries in the same bank shall be located so that they are exposed to the same ambient conditions at all times. 1141 4.1.4 Battery Capacity 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 Batteries used as a power source for onboard electronics shall be of adequate capacity for their intended use. Battery capacities shall be determined in accordance with Appendix D, Battery Capacity Calculations. If using a General use battery, load calculations shall include both electronic and non-electronic loads. Acceptable methods of ensuring adequate capacity include increasing the General use battery capacity or installing a separate electronics battery. 1148 1149 1150 As new electronics are added to a vessel, the available battery power, charging capabilities, distribution panels, and wire sizes need to be re-evaluated and upgraded as demand for power is increased. 1151 4.2 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 Battery System Requirements Battery systems installed or upgraded in order to satisfy the requirements of Section 4.1 shall incorporate the features identified in the following paragraphs. 4.2.1 Voltage Monitoring At least one external voltmeter shall be provided to monitor the battery voltage of each battery bank installed in the vessel and used for engine cranking, generator cranking, general use loads, electronic loads, or emergency communications. Voltmeter leads shall be properly fused, and shall be connected at the battery terminals in order to present the voltage at the battery without variations due to voltage drop in current carrying leads. If a meter select switch is installed to enable a single meter to monitor multiple batteries, the meter switch positions shall be clearly labeled in accordance with the identification requirements of Section 4.2.4 NOTE: A digital voltmeter, or an analog voltmeter with an expanded range, is recommended. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 34 of 313 2014 NMEA 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 4.2.2 Overcurrent Protection Overcurrent protection for batteries shall be within 7” of power source with the following 2 exceptions (See Figure 5). 1. 72” MAX Exception: If the conductor is enclosed in a conduit for its entire length when the connection is directly to the battery terminal. 2. 40” MAX Exception:-If the conductor is enclosed in a junction box, console, or sheath, when the connection is to other than the battery terminal 1175 1176 1177 1178 Figure 5: Battery Overcurrent Protection 4.2.3 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 Access for Inspection and Maintenance If the installation includes the use of Wet Cell Lead-Acid batteries, the installation location shall provide the ability for the batteries to be visually inspected for internal fluid level without the use of special visual aids. Sufficient space shall be provided above the batteries to allow for periodic addition of water to Wet Cell Lead-Acid batteries. 4.2.4 Battery System Marking 1185 1186 1187 1188 Each battery, or its enclosure, shall be clearly labeled with an identification label describing the battery’s intended function. If connected to a battery selection switch, the identification label shall include the connection number, and the battery switch label shall use the same description to identify the corresponding switch position. 1189 For example: 1190 1191 1192 1193 • • • • Port Main Engine Start Battery Starboard Main Engine Start Battery Ships Service Battery #1 Ships Service Battery #2 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 35 of 313 2014 NMEA • • • • 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 4.3 Electronics Battery #1 Emergency Battery # General Use Battery #1 General Use Battery #2 Battery Installation and Connection Batteries shall be installed and connected in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.2). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 36 of 313 2014 NMEA 1203 5 1204 1205 1206 1207 CHARGING SYSTEM INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for onboard charging systems. The information provided is intended to produce a charging system of adequate capacity that is easy for the owner/operator to use and maintain in top condition. 1208 1209 1210 NOTE: In these standards, the term "battery" is used to refer to either a single battery or a bank of batteries that are connected in series or parallel so as to provide a desired voltage or capacity. 1211 5.1 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 General Considerations Charging Systems installed in accordance with these standards shall be provided with the capability to simultaneously charge all batteries while maintaining functional isolation. When requirements cannot be met with existing equipment, additional charging systems are to be installed in accordance with the remaining provisions of Section 5. 5.1.1 Charging Capacity 1218 1219 1220 Sufficient charging capacity shall be provided to maintain the vessel in operational and habitable condition under expected operating conditions, with excess capacity to recharge the battery. Expected operating conditions may include, and are not limited to: 1221 1222 Underway – under either sail or power; includes loads such as navigation electronics, navigation lights, and any other equipment the crew is expected to use while underway. 1223 1224 1225 1226 At Anchor – includes equipment the crew is expected to use while the vessel is at anchor; may be characterized by discharge/charge cycles where a generator or propulsion engine is run on a periodic basis to replenish power drawn over a longer time period from the battery. 1227 1228 Docked – includes equipment the crew is expected to use while the vessel is tied up at the docked / marina, and should be provided on a continuous basis. 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 The vessel owners should be consulted to determine what operating conditions are appropriate for their vessel, and what equipment is to be provided under each operating condition. As new electronics are added to a vessel, the available battery power and charging capacities need to be re-evaluated and upgraded as demand for power is increased. 1234 1235 In addition, if the vessel is wired for AC power, a means of charging from an AC power source shall be provided. 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 5.1.1.1 Underway Charging The charge rate of the charging device(s) connected to the electronics and/or General use battery shall be of sufficient capacity to meet electrical demands while the vessel is underway. Where isolators are used to charge multiple batteries from a single source, the battery voltage will be less than the voltage measured at the charge source. Unless the charge source is equipped to remotely measure battery voltage, the overall result will be a longer time to charge the battery. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 37 of 313 2014 NMEA 1243 1244 Underway charging requirements may be satisfied by any combination of the following methods: 1245 1246 • Alternator Charging – Propulsion system mounted alternator charging capacity may be used to meet underway charging capacity requirements. 1247 1248 1249 • AC Charging - Charging capacity installed to meet the requirements of Section 5.1.1.2 may be used to meet the underway charging capacity requirements if an onboard AC generator is operated at all times when the vessel is underway. 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 NOTE: Alternators are rated by their alternator rotor RPM, not propulsion engine RPM. Alternators usually turn at 2 to 2½ times the engine RPM. 5.1.1.2 AC powered charging device connected to the electronics and/or General use battery shall be of sufficient capacity for the equipment onboard and the manner in which the vessel is used. Charger rated output shall be appropriate for the nominal DC system voltage as follows: • • • 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 5.2 1262 1263 1264 AC Charging For 12-volt systems: use 11 V For 24-volt systems: use 22 V For 32-volt systems: use 30 V Charging System Requirements Battery charging systems installed to satisfy the requirements of Section 5.1 shall incorporate the features identified in the following paragraphs. 5.2.1 Ambient Conditions 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 Battery charging and discharging rates are dependent on ambient conditions in the enclosure or compartment a battery is installed in. In particular, temperature affects the resistance of the battery, decreasing resistance as the battery temperature increases. As a battery is charged or discharged, heat is generated and may increase battery temperature, depending on how well the compartment or enclosure it is in is ventilated. Batteries paralleled together in a bank and enclosed in the same compartment will usually have the same state of charge, and little or no current will flow between them. 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 In extreme situations, where two batteries are paralleled but one battery is located in a compartment with a higher ambient temperature, one battery’s temperature may rise more rapidly than the other. As its temperature rises, a differential develops between the charge states and internal resistance of each battery so that the higher temperature battery begins to draw a significant current from the other battery paralleled with it. The increase in available current, often without any current limiting device between the batteries, further increases temperature and can lead potentially to a thermal runaway. 1279 1280 Accordingly, batteries paralleled in a single bank, intended to be charged or discharged as a unit, shall be located so that they are exposed to the same ambient conditions. 1281 1282 1283 1284 5.2.2 Functional Isolation Where multiple batteries are installed as separate functional power sources in a vessel, functional isolation of battery charging systems is recommended to ensure the ability to charge each battery independently without regard to load connections. Recommended 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 38 of 313 2014 NMEA 1285 1286 1287 methods of charging multiple batteries from a single charging source include series voltage regulators, battery combiners, battery isolators, and similar devices that parallel charging circuits without paralleling load circuits. 1288 1289 1290 Devices used to charge multiple batteries from the same charging source may be installed in parallel with manual or remotely controlled paralleling switches intended to provide alternative power sources to loads under certain operational conditions. 1291 5.2.2.1 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 Series voltage regulators, also known as echo chargers, provide the ability to charge a second battery bank from a charging source used primarily for another battery bank. The series voltage regulator monitors and regulates the voltage to the second battery bank to match the voltage of the source battery bank in accordance with its charging cycle. Series voltage regulators only work in one direction; which charging system is supplying power and which battery bank is being charged is determined by which battery is connected to the input connection and which battery is connected to the output connection. In the example shown in Figure 6, an AC General use battery charger (not shown) will provide power so that the cranking battery charge can be maintained when the AC charger is operational. 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 Series Voltage Regulators Figure 6: Echo Charger Connection 5.2.2.2 Battery Combiners Battery combiners act as an automatic paralleling switch, usually connecting the two batteries when the voltage of either battery rises above approximately 13.3 volts, indicating that a battery charger is operational on that battery. In the example shown in Figure 7, the General use battery will receive power when the alternator is operational and the cranking battery will receive power when the AC charger is operational. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 39 of 313 2014 NMEA 1310 1311 Figure 7: Battery Combiner Connection 1312 1313 1314 1315 NOTE: When the battery combiner is operational, the cranking battery and the General use battery are being charged as a single bank. Batteries charged as a single bank shall be of the same construction (Wet Cell, Gel Cell, or AGM) and relative age and shall be located so that they are exposed to the same ambient conditions. 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 5.2.2.3 Battery Isolators Battery isolators use diodes to direct charging current to more than one battery without allowing current to flow between the two batteries. Since isolators usually exhibit a voltage drop across the diodes, they are only recommended for alternator installations where voltage regulation circuitry can be connected to regulate the voltage on the battery side of the isolator. In the example shown in Figure 8, both the cranking battery and the General use battery will receive power when the alternator is operational. Figure 8: Battery Isolator Connection 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 40 of 313 2014 NMEA 1325 5.2.3 1326 1327 1328 AC Chargers Charging connections from the AC battery charging equipment shall remain functional regardless of the position of battery load disconnect switches. 5.2.4 Documentation 1329 1330 The following documentation shall be provided to the vessel owner for each battery charging system installed or upgraded. 1331 1332 1333 1. Interface diagram – showing each charging system and battery-paralleling device used to connect batteries for the purpose of charging. This diagram shall indicate the operating conditions under which each charge source is online. 1334 1335 2. Charge settings – for each charging source with user-selectable settings, a summary of charge settings at the time of installation. 1336 5.3 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 Charging systems shall be installed in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.3), and in accordance with the applicable provisions in Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. The following paragraphs identify additional requirements that must be met when installing and connecting battery paralleling devices used to support charging systems. 5.3.1 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 Charging System Installation and Wiring Location Battery paralleling devices shall be installed in a location that is free from exposure to water, and shall either be in a protective enclosure, or the exposed terminals shall be protected by an insulating device. 5.3.2 Ratings Unless current limited, automatic battery paralleling devices shall be rated at no less than the maximum current capability of the charging source. Where a charging source exists on both sides of a battery-paralleling device, the combiner-paralleling device shall be rated at no less than the maximum current capability of the larger of the two charging sources. 1352 1353 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 41 of 313 2014 NMEA 1354 6 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 This section identifies recommended standards and practices for power conversion equipment that electronically converts power from DC to AC. The information provided is intended to produce an inverting system of adequate capacity that is easy for the owner/operator to use and maintain in top condition. 6.1 1360 1361 1362 1363 POWER INVERTER INSTALLATION General Considerations AC inverters installed in accordance with these standards shall be selected and sized as described in the following paragraphs. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the provisions in Section 6.2. 6.1.1 Power Inverter Types 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 Power inverters convert DC power to AC power electronically through power switching and transformer technology. During the conversion process, some of the DC energy is lost as heat, and a small amount of energy is used to control the conversion process. Inverters are characterized by their output wave shape and by the available methods of interconnecting them to the DC and AC power supply systems. 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 Basic inverters provide AC power as a modified sine wave. A modified sine wave is closer in appearance to a square wave, but the square wave amplitude and duty cycle have been adjusted so that the power integral under the square wave is equal to the power integral of a true sine wave. Modified sine wave inverters typically generate more EMI, due to the harmonic content of the square wave produced. In addition, some loads, such as slow-turning AC motors and other inductive loads, do not work well from a modified sine wave. In some cases, the heat generated from inefficient use of a modified sine wave may cause motor windings to overheat. 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 More capable inverters using a true sine wave provide AC power that is comparable to utility power. A wider variety of equipment and tools can be used with a true sine wave inverter without concern for inefficient operation or equipment damage. Some AC inverters with sine wave outputs also meet FCC Class B emissions requirements, providing a level of interference protection for onboard electronics such as SSB transceivers. 1383 1384 1385 AC inverters may be manufactured with either integral AC receptacles or hardwired connections that may also incorporate automatic switching between the inverter and some other AC power source. 1386 1387 1388 1389 On the DC input side, inverters may be manufactured either with cable sets designed for mating with accessory plugs or cigarette lighter plugs, or with hardwired connections to a battery or DC distribution system. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 42 of 313 2014 NMEA 1390 6.1.2 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 Selection and Sizing AC inverters shall have fixed DC connections, wired in accordance with Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. AC output connections may use either integral AC receptacles/sockets or fixed wiring to an AC distribution panel board, depending on the load and number of connections required. NOTE: Inverter cable set and cigarette lighter plug wiring is usually inadequate for reliable and consistent operation due to the poor contact arrangement and inadequate wire sizes to carry the DC current required. 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 AC inverters shall be of sufficient capacity for the equipment to be powered from it. DC average load shall be determined in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to account for conversion inefficiencies. Where no manufacturer recommendations have been provided, the DC load can be calculated by converting the total equipment wattage into current for the appropriate system voltage in accordance with Section 2.1.2, New Electronic Device Load Requirements, and then multiplying that value by 1.1. 1405 1406 1407 Consider the example of an inverter that operates on a nominal 12-volt system and provides power to AC devices totaling 500 watts. Compute the DC input amps as follows, and round to the nearest 10th of an amp: 1408 DC input current = (500 watts / 11 volts) X 1.1 = 50 amps 1409 1410 NOTE: Inverter supply wire and over-current protection shall be determined based on manufacturer-provided maximum current ratings. 1411 6.2 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 Power Inverter Installation Power inverters shall be installed in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.3), and in accordance with the applicable provisions in Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. When an inverter also serves as a battery charger, it shall also meet the applicable provisions of Section 5, Charging Systems. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 43 of 313 2014 NMEA 1418 7 COAXIAL CABLE INSTALLATION 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of coaxial cables used to connect radio equipment to their respective antennas. The information provided is intended to produce an installation with minimum practicable losses between the RF source and/or receiver and its antenna. For information regarding digital data cables, refer to Section 8, Data Interfacing. 1424 Figure 9 below illustrates the basic components of a coaxial cable. 1425 1426 1427 Figure 9: Coaxial Cable Cutaway 1428 1429 7.1 General Considerations 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 Onboard electronics installed in accordance with this specification that are primarily designed for transmission of RF signals for communication and navigation use shall be interconnected with coaxial cables that meet the following requirements. Where additional cable or connectors not provided by the equipment manufacturer are to be installed, installation and connection shall be in accordance with the remaining provisions of this section. 1436 Applications and equipment that use or generate RF signals include: 1437 • AIS Receivers 1438 • AM/FM Stereos 1439 • Cellular Telephones 1440 • Differential Receivers 1441 • GPS Receivers 1442 • Navtex / Weatherfax 1443 • Satellite Communications 1444 • Satellite TV Antennas 1445 • SSB & VHF Radios 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 44 of 313 2014 NMEA 1446 7.1.1 Background 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 Coaxial cable is used in marine vessel installations to connect a communication or broadcast device to an appropriate antenna, or to distribute RF signals to various devices on the vessel. Signal attenuation (loss) affects both transmitted and received signals and is expressed in dB. As signal loss is increased, equipment performance will decrease. The result of increased signal loss is an effective decrease in the operating range of a device. 1453 1454 1455 For example, a VHF radio installed with minimal signal losses on a vessel may provide a usable range of 25 miles. The same radio installed with excessive signal losses may provide a useable range of only 10 miles. 1456 1457 As RF signals are transmitted through coaxial cable, the RF signals are attenuated as a result of the following: 1458 1459 1460 1. Transmission Cable Losses – Expressed in dB per unit of cable length; the longer the cable, the greater the cable loss. Typically the cable losses increase as the operating frequency increases. 1461 1462 1463 1464 2. Connector Losses – Expressed in dB per connection; the more connectors between the RF source and/or receiver and its antenna, the greater the connector loss. Also poorly installed connectors may adversely affect the performance by increasing the loss through the connector. 1465 1466 1467 1468 3. Impedance Mismatch Losses – This results from joining cable segments with different impedances, or cable that does not match the equipment impedance. Avoid this by using cables and connectors with the same impedance throughout a transmission path. 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 The goal is to provide an installation with minimal transmission losses. For installations with a short distance between the antenna and communications transceiver, a cable with greater loss characteristics may be used without exceeding the maximum loss specified. On installations where there is a greater cable length distance between the antenna and the communications transceiver, a cable with lower loss unit length characteristics will improve the overall performance of the equipment. 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 4. Crosstalk is a form of EMI and is the undesired effect of a signal from one conductor getting coupled onto another conductor. Crosstalk is more prevalent if two conductors are run in parallel and increases as the distance of the parallel run increases. For this reason it is desirable to avoid long parallel runs of any cables containing transmitted signals and/or signals containing RF power and switching voltages. Transducer cables and Single Sideband transmitter cables are two of the biggest offenders. 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 7.1.2 Length of Cables Coaxial cables shall be installed in a unidirectional path from the antenna to the equipment, without excess coils or looping of the cable back on itself. The cable shall be kept to the minimum length necessary to route the cable while observing the proper bend radius as specified in the cable specifications, and providing appropriate drip and service loops, unless modification of the cable is prohibited by the manufacturer of an antenna or electronic device. The service loop at the equipment shall be not less than 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 45 of 313 2014 NMEA 1489 1490 1491 12 inches (300mm), to allow for replacement of coaxial connectors in the future and to allow for removal of equipment from the installation for service. 7.1.3 1492 1493 1494 1495 Equipment Connections Coaxial connections to equipment shall be made using coaxial connectors designed for the specific type of cable in use. Gender changers or adapters may be used where necessary to mate the cable connector to the connector used on the equipment. 7.1.4 1496 1497 1498 1499 Extension of Cables Where the coaxial cable provided with an antenna or electronic device is of insufficient length, a junction may be made utilizing compatible cable and connectors, and additional coaxial cable may be installed as required, provided that all the provisions of Section 7.2 are met. 1500 1501 1502 NOTE: Cable junctions shall not be created by solder splicing of cable center conductor and shield within a dielectric wrap or enclosure. Under no circumstances are splicing techniques used in the splicing of power/data conductors to be utilized 1503 7.2 Coaxial Cable Installation 1504 Coaxial cables shall be installed or modified in accordance with this section: 1505 1506 To minimize EMI it is best to separate data and power cables from coaxial cables (See Section 16, EMI) 1507 1508 1509 Care should be taken to route coaxial cable separately from wire bundles containing propulsion system or rudder position control signals unless included as part of a manufacturer’s wiring harness. 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 7.2.1 Total Attenuation (Loss) The maximum computed signal loss for a coaxial cable installation shall not exceed the values specified in Table 3 for each of the applications identified. If a manufacturer specifies a lower signal loss value, then the computed signal loss shall not exceed the manufacturer-specified loss. Signal loss calculations include transmission and connector losses and shall be computed prior to installation in accordance with the method described in Section 7.3.1. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 46 of 313 2014 NMEA 1519 1520 Table 3: Maximum Allowed Signal Loss by Application Equipment Maximum Allowed Total Operating Frequency Type Signal Loss1 VHF Radio 3dB 156 MHz AIS 3dB 162 MHz SSB Radio 2dB 2 – 30 MHz Cell Phone 3dB 850 MHz or 1.9 GHz Sat Phone (note 2) TV 6 dB (prior to splitting) 54 – 806 MHz Satellite TV 6dB 1.6 GHz GPS 3dB 1.5 GHz DGPS 3dB 150 – 500 kHz Notes: (1) Unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. (2) Refer to manufacturer specifications for the specific band and technology employed. 1521 7.2.2 Cable Selection 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 Coaxial cables shall be selected in accordance with their signal loss and impedance. Tables 4 & 5 summarize the characteristics of coaxial cable types typically used in marine installations. Coaxial cables of different types may be joined and used in equipment installation provided that all the provisions of Section 7.2 are met and that the impedances of all cables in the transmission path are the same, within ± 2 ohms. 1527 NOTE: 1528 1529 Coaxial cables of different impedances shall not be used in the same transmission path. Nominal O.D. Conductor (AWG) Impedance Velocity Factor % Table 4: 50 Ohm Marine Coaxial Cable Characteristics RG58U RG8X RG8U RG213 RG-214 LMR240 LMR400-50 RG-174 0.18in/ 4.76mm 20 50 66 0.25in / 6.35mm 16 50 78 0.40in / 10.32mm 0.40in / 10.32mm 13 50 66 0.425in 10.8mm 13 50 66 0.25in 6.35mm 15 50 84 0.40in / 10.32mm 9 50 85 0.1in / 2.54mm 13 52 80 26 50 66 1530 1531 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 47 of 313 2014 NMEA 1532 Table 5: 75 Ohm Marine Coaxial Cable Characteristics 1533 Nominal O.D. Conductor (AWG) Impedance Velocity Factor (%) RG-6 0.185in / 4.7mm 18 75 75 RG-11 0.285in / 7.2mm 14 75 66 RG-59 0.146in / 3.7mm 20 75 66 LMR400-75 0.375in / 9.525mm 10 75 85 1534 1535 NOTE: There are various coaxial cable calculators available on line and as mobile apps 1536 For example: 1537 1538 http://timesmicrowave.com/calculator/?productId=118#form 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 7.2.3 Connector Selection Connectors shall be selected in accordance with their type and maximum operating frequency. Table 6 identifies typical connectors used in marine installations and identifies permitted application of each. Check with connector manufacturer for exact specifications. Table 6: Connector Types, Frequency, and Usage Chart Maximum Operating Frequency 300 MHz 4.0 GHz 11.0 GHz 11.0 GHz 2.0 GHz 2.5 GHz 18.0 GHz 4.0 GHz 200 MHz Connector Type Impedance Permitted Uses UHF (PL-259) 50-Ohm VHF, SSB, DGPS, STEREO, AIS BNC 50-Ohm HF, SSB, DGPS, CELL, GPS, AIS TNC 50-Ohm VHF, SSB, DGPS, CELL, GPS, MINI-M “N” 50-Ohm VHF, SSB, DGPS, CELL, GPS , AIS “F” 75-Ohm TV, GPS “Mini UHF” 50-Ohm CELL “SMA” 50-Ohm SAT Phone, Satellite Radio “SMB” 50-Ohm Satellite Radio “FME” 50-Ohm Satellite Radio Abbreviations: DGPS = Differential GPS (150 – 500 kHz) VHF = VHF Radio (160 MHz) SSB = Single Side Band (2 – 30MHz) CELL = Cellular Phone (850 MHz) or (1.96 GHz) GPS = Global Positioning System (1.5 GHz) STEREO = AM/FM Stereo (100MHz) MHz = Megahertz (1 MHz = 1,000 kHz) GHz = Gigahertz (1 GHz = 1,000 MHz) AIS = Automatic Identification System (162 MHz) 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 48 of 313 2014 NMEA 1546 7.2.4 Cable Junctions 1547 1548 Cable junctions shall be created using matching connectors and an appropriate gender adapter for the transition. 1549 1550 1551 1552 Wherever possible, cable junctions shall be located where they are protected from direct exposure to rain, spray, or splash. Where cable junctions are exposed, selfvulcanizing tape or shrink tubing shall be applied to the junction to ensure that the connectors are not exposed continuously to direct environment. 1553 1554 1555 1556 Cable junctions shall be secured to immobilize the junction and ensure that the cables do not impose direct strain on the connectors. Strain relief shall be provided not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from the junction. Figure 10 illustrates proper sealing and mounting of a junction. 1557 1558 1559 Figure 10: Protecting a Cable Junction 7.2.5 Physical Installation 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 Coaxial cable shall be installed in a path that provides the most direct path possible and observes the minimum bend radius for the type of cable in use. Figure 11 shows how to measure the bend radius and lists the minimum bend radius for each type of cable. If a cable manufacturer specifies a larger bend radius than listed, then the minimum bend radius shall not be less than the manufacturer-specified bend radius. 1565 NOTE: 1566 1567 Coaxial Cable bend radius affects cable impedance. A gentle “S” curve over a longer distance is preferred over a straight run with multiple tight right angle (90 degree) bends. Refer to purple and blue lines in Figure 11. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 49 of 313 2014 NMEA 1568 Cable Type RG58U Minimum Bend Radius (inches /mm) (R) 2.0”/ 50mm RG8X 2.4”/ 60mm RG8U 1569 1570 4.5”/ 112mm RG213 5.0”/ 125mm LMR240 0.75”/20mm LMR400 1.0”/ 25mm Figure 11: Coaxial Cable Minimum Bend Radius 1571 1572 7.3 Signal Loss Calculations 1573 1574 1575 1576 Signal loss calculations shall be performed to determine whether a planned cable selection and length will meet the maximum transmission loss requirements of Section 7.2.1. Transmission line signal loss between communication equipment and antennas shall be calculated using the following formulas: 1577 Total loss = Cable loss (due to type & length of cable) + (all Connector Losses) 1578 1579 Cable loss = (Loss dB (per 100' or 100 meters) @ the operating frequency) (Cable length in feet (or meters)/100) 1580 Connector losses = (Number of complete connector junctions) (0.5 dB) 1581 1582 NOTE: 1583 1584 For the equation above, Connectors at both ends of transmission lines ARE NOT considered junctions. (Radio chassis connector and antenna base connector are NOT considered junctions) 1585 NOTE: If the connector is not properly assembled this loss may increase significantly. 1586 1587 If the maximum cable loss with the connectors exceeds the maximum specified loss permitted in Section 7.2.1, the following changes may be made to the planned 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 50 of 313 2014 NMEA 1588 1589 installation, and the signal loss recalculated, to decrease total loss to an acceptable value: 1590 1. Change the cable type to a lower loss cable. 1591 2. Change the cable routing to reduce the overall cable length. 1592 3. Eliminate intermediate cable splices to reduce connector losses. 1593 NOTE: 1594 1595 1596 To ensure that longer transmission lines do not exceed the maximum attenuation specified for the application, consider selecting antennas that have a connector at the base, rather than an attached length of coaxial cable, so that a better quality cable can be used for the entire length. 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 7.3.1 Calculation Method The loss characteristics of coaxial cables used in marine installations will vary with the cable type and even the specific cable manufacturer of similar cable. Tables 7 and 8 identify representative examples of commercially available cable and the loss characteristics vs. frequency for each cable type. Table 7 lists 50-ohm cables used in a wide variety of onboard applications, and Table 8 lists 75-ohm cables typically used for TV applications. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 51 of 313 2014 NMEA 1605 Table 7: Coaxial Cable Loss Characteristics (50 Ohm) Frequency (MHz) 50 100 160 200 400 700 900 1000 1900 1606 1607 1608 RG 58 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 9.0 13.0 15.0 16.0 37.0 Signal Loss per 100 Feet (30.5 m) (dB) RG 8X RG 8/U RG 213 LMR240 2.5 1.3 1.3 1.7 3.7 2.2 2.2 2.5 4.0 2.6 2.6 3.1 5.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 7.0 4.5 4.5 5.0 9.0 5.0 5.0 6.6 11.0 6.5 6.5 7.6 13.5 9.0 9.0 8.0 15.2 12.1 12.0 11.2 LMR400 0.9 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.5 3.4 3.9 4.1 5.8 Table 8: Coaxial Cable Loss Characteristics (75 Ohm) Frequency (MHz) 50 100 200 400 700 900 1000 Signal Loss per 100 Feet (30.5 m) (dB) RG 59 RG 6 RG 11 2.4 1.5 0.9 3.4 2.1 1.2 5.0 3.2 1.7 7.4 4.5 2.4 10.0 5.9 3.3 11.3 6.8 3.7 12.0 7.3 3.9 1609 1610 1611 Loss characteristics shall be obtained from the manufacturer for each cable to be installed. If a cable manufacturer specifies a greater signal loss than the loss listed, then the installer shall use that loss value in all signal loss calculations. 1612 1613 1614 Table 9 can be used to calculate the proposed total transmission loss for the cable type and frequency of operation. The following steps ensure that the formulas listed above are appropriately applied: 1615 • Enter the appropriate frequency for the communication application. 1616 • Enter the cable type and length of each segment to be used. 1617 1618 • From Tables 8 or 9 (or manufacturers data sheet), enter the signal loss for the frequency entered. 1619 1620 • For each cable type, divide the total length by 100, and multiply that by the signal loss per hundred feet (30.5 m) to get the total loss for that length of cable. 1621 • Sum all cable losses. 1622 1623 • Enter the number of planned cable junctions, and multiply by 0.5 dB to get the total signal loss at junctions. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 52 of 313 2014 NMEA 1624 1625 • 1626 1627 1628 The final value can be compared with the allowed signal loss in T for the specific application to determine if the planned installation meets the requirements in Section 7.2.1. Finally, add the total cable loss and the loss due to junctions to get the total transmission line loss. 1629 Table 9: Transmission Line Loss Calculation Cable Type Total Length Divide Length by 100 Total Cable Loss (dB) Number of Junctions Total Transmission Line Loss (dB) Loss Per 100' at ___ MHz Total Loss (dB) 0.5 dB 1630 NOTE: There are various coaxial cable calculators available on line and as mobile apps 1631 For example: 1632 http://timesmicrowave.com/calculator/?productId=118#form 1633 7.3.2 1634 1635 Loss Calculation Examples The following three examples show how to compute cable and connector losses for typical VHF installations: 1636 1637 EXAMPLE 1: Extending the manufacturer supplied 20 foot (6 m) cable for a total installed distance of 52 feet (16 m). 1638 1639 EXAMPLE 2: Extending the manufacturer supplied 20 foot (6 m) cable for a total installed distance of 68 feet (20.7 m) 1640 1641 EXAMPLE 3: Same requirements as Example 2, except substituting cable type to reduce total transmission loss. 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 In each case, the maximum allowed signal loss from Table 3 of 3 dB for VHF applications is used for comparison. 7.3.2.1 Extending Cable to 52 Feet (16 Meters) Using RG8X The calculations to extend a manufacturer supplied antenna lead to 52 feet (16 m) using RG8X cable are shown in Table 10. The manufacturer-supplied cable is 20 feet (6 m), so the distance for the extension cable is 32 feet (9.75 m). The cable losses are determined at 160 MHz from Table 7.. Total transmission loss in this example is 2.78 dB, which is less than the 3 dB allowed; therefore, the planned installation is acceptable. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 53 of 313 2014 NMEA 1652 1653 Table 10: Example 1 Loss Calculation Cable Type RG58 RG8X Total Length Divide Length by 100 Loss Per 100' (30.5 m) at 160 MHz Total Loss (dB) 20 32 0.2 0.32 5.0 4.0 1.00 1.28 0.5 dB 2.28 0.50 2.78 Total Cable Loss (dB) 1 Number of Junctions Total Transmission Line Loss (dB) 1654 1655 7.3.2.2 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 Extending Cable to 68 Feet (20.7 Meters) Using RG8X The calculations to extend a manufacturer supplied antenna lead to 68 feet (20.7 m) using RG8X cable are shown in Table 11. The manufacturer-supplied cable is 20 feet (6 m), so the distance for the extension cable is 48 feet (14.6 m). The cable losses are determined at 160MHz from Table 7. Total transmission loss in this example is 3.42 dB, which is greater than the 3 dB allowed, so the planned installation is not acceptable, and will have to be changed to decrease total loss to an acceptable value. 1662 1663 Table 11: Example 2 Loss Calculation Cable Type Total Length Divide Length by 100 Loss Per 100' (30.5 m) at 160 MHz Total Loss (dB) 20 48 0.20 0.48 5.0 4.0 1.00 1.92 0.5 dB 2.92 0.50 3.42 RG58 RG8X Total Cable Loss (dB) 1 Number of Junctions Total Transmission Line Loss (dB) 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 7.3.2.3 Extending Cable to 68 Feet (20.7 Meters) Using RG8U The recalculation of Example 2 using RG8U cable instead of RG8X cable is shown in Table 12.. Total transmission loss is now 2.75 dB, which is less than the 3 dB allowed, so the planned installation with RG8U is acceptable. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 54 of 313 2014 NMEA 1669 1670 Table 12: Example 3 Loss Calculation 1671 Cable Type Total Length Divide Length by 100 20 48 0.20 0.48 RG58 RG8U Total Cable Loss (dB) 1 Number of Junctions Total Transmission Line Loss (dB) Loss Per 100'(30.5 m) at 160 MHz 5.0 2.6 0.5 dB Total Loss (dB) 1.00 1.25 2.25 0.50 2.75 1672 1673 7.4 1674 1675 1676 Connector Assembly General guidance for installing coaxial connectors in the field is provided in this section. 7.4.1 Cable Stripping 1677 1678 The steps in Figure 12 below show proper coaxial cable stripping techniques using readily available cable stripping tools. 1679 1680 Setup and exact steps will vary by manufacturer and strip lengths will vary by coaxial cable type. 1681 1682 Figure 12: Cable Stripping 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 55 of 313 2014 NMEA 1683 7.4.2 PL-259 Connector Installation 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 The PL-259 or UHF connector is one of the most common connectors found in marine applications, and shall be limited to use with VHF, SSB, Differential GPS (DGPS), and Stereo applications. It is available for RG8U, LMR-400, and RG213 cable; with an adapter, it may also be used on RG58 and RG8X cable. Figure 13 shows the assembly of the PL-259 on RG8U and RG213 cable; Figure 14 shows the assembly of the PL-259 with adaptor on RG58 and RG8X cable. Typical cable stripping dimensions are given in Table 13 for each coaxial cable type; different manufacturers may vary. 1691 NOTE: 1692 PL-259 connectors are typically not used for applications above 300 MHz, such as Cell, GPS, and Sat Phone. 1693 a b c Solder 2 Places 1) Slide coupling ring onto cable. Cut end of cable even and strip jacket, braid, and dielectric to dimensions shown in table. All cuts are to be sharp and square. Do not nick braid, dielectric, or center conductor. Tin exposed center conductor and braid, avoiding excessive heat. 2) Screw the plug sub-assembly on cable. Solder assembly to braid through solder holes, making a good bond between braid and shell. Solder conductor to contact. Do not use excessive heat. 3) Move coupling ring forward and screw in place on plug sub-assembly. 1694 1695 1696 Figure 13: Installation of PL-259 Connector on RG8U and RG213 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 56 of 313 2014 NMEA 1697 1698 1699 Figure 14: Installation of PL-259 Connector on RG58 and RG8X 1700 Table 13: PL-259 Cable Stripping Dimensions Cable Type RG8U / RG213 RG58U / RG8X Strip Dimensions (inches & mm) a b c 1 ¼ (31.5 mm) 11/16 (17.5 mm) 5/8 (16 mm) ¾ (19 mm) 3/8 (9.5mm) 5/8 (16 mm) 1701 1702 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 57 of 313 2014 NMEA 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 7.4.3 BNC Connector Installation The BNC connector is also commonly found in marine applications. Field-installable BNC connectors have more parts than PL-259 connectors. Each connector is dimensioned specifically for the intended cable, and the installation steps are the same. Figure 15 shows the assembly steps and lists the specific strip dimensions for each type of cable. Typical cable strip dimensions are given in Table 14 for each coaxial cable type; different manufacturers may vary. Figure 15: Installation of BNC Connectors 1712 1713 1714 Table 14: BNC Cable Stripping Dimensions Cable Type RG8U / RG213 RG58U / RG8X Strip Dimensions (inches & mm) a b 1/2 (12.7 mm) 3/16 (4.8 mm) 3/8 (9.5 mm) 3/16 (4.8 mm) 1715 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 58 of 313 2014 NMEA 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 7.4.4 TNC Connector Installation The TNC connector is also commonly found in marine applications. Field-installable TNC connectors have more parts than PL-259 connectors. Each connector is dimensioned specifically for the intended cable, and the installation steps are the same. Figure 16 shows the assembly steps and lists the specific strip dimensions for each type of cable. Typical cable strip dimensions are given in Table 15 for each coaxial cable type; different manufacturers may vary. 1724 1725 Figure 16: Installation of TNC Connectors 1726 1727 1728 Table 15: TNC Connector Detail & Cable Stripping Dimensions (RG-58) 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 59 of 313 2014 NMEA 1729 1730 1731 1732 7.4.5 1733 1734 NOTE: Typical F Connector cable strip dimensions are ¼, ¼, and ¼. 1735 1736 1737 F Connector Installation F connectors are used primarily for video, cable, and TV applications. They are typically used with 75 ohm coaxial cable. Figure 17 below shows the assembly steps and lists the specific strip dimensions for one type of connector. Figure 17: Installation of F Connectors 1738 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 60 of 313 2014 NMEA 1739 1740 1741 7.4.6 Other Installation Methods Other installation methods may include Crimp Style coaxial connectors. Refer to manufacturer instructions for proper installation. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 61 of 313 2014 NMEA 1742 8 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 DATA INTERFACING- NMEA 0183, NMEA 2000, ETHERNET This section identifies recommended standards and practices for connecting electronic equipment for the purpose of exchanging data between them. The information provided is generally intended for equipment from one or more manufacturers that utilize a third-party open standard to facilitate communications. Refer to manufacturer installation and data-sheets for proprietary interface installation requirements. 8.1 General Considerations 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 Data interface connections provide the ability for two or more electronic devices to share data by exchanging that data between them. When installing data interface connections between new equipment, or when connecting data interface connections between new equipment and existing equipment or data interfaces, installation and connections shall be in accordance with the following paragraphs and any manufacturer-provided installation instructions. 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 Equipment employing NMEA interfaces shall be installed in accordance with the applicable NMEA standard and provisions of Section 8.2, NMEA 0183 Wiring Requirements, or Section 8.3, NMEA 2000® Wiring Requirements. Equipment employing Ethernet interfaces shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions and provisions of Section 8.4, Ethernet Network Wiring Requirements. 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 NOTE: Certain CAN based manufacturer interfaces may be capable of operation with either NMEA 2000® or the manufacturer’s own proprietary network. Ensure that NMEA 2000® networks including products from multiple manufacturers contain only certified NMEA 2000® devices. Refer to manufacturer installation instructions for appropriate interface modules or cabling to connect with the NMEA 2000® backbone. 1766 8.1.1 Cable Routing and Labeling 1767 1768 Data interface cabling, cableways, and interconnections shall conform to the following characteristics: 1769 1770 1771 • Interface cables shall be installed in a unidirectional path from equipment to connection points or between connection points, without excess coils or looping of the cable back on itself. 1772 1773 • Interface cables shall be kept to the minimum length necessary to route the cable while observing bend radius and providing appropriate drip and service loops. 1774 1775 1776 • Interface cables shall be bundled separately from power or other cables having a higher insulation temperature rating to prevent insulation breakdown and other problems due to overheating and noise caused by high currents. 1777 1778 1779 1780 • All interface cables and terminations shall be clearly labeled in accordance with their intended function and shall conform to the wire color code for the interface standard employed. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 62 of 313 2014 NMEA 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 NOTE: Equipment using manufacturer proprietary interfaces may also provide an NMEA 0183 interface that can be connected to, using a Personal Computer with HyperTerminal, for the purpose of observing and confirming non-proprietary data transiting the interfaces. 8.1.1.1 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 Electromagnetic Interference At installation completion, all communication receivers on the vessel shall be turned on and tested in accordance with Section 22, Test Criteria, to verify that no interference is radiated from the interface cables. Then verify that no interference is present from any and all electronic devices including all transmitters/emitters of electronic signals. 8.1.2 Documentation 1791 1792 The following documentation shall be provided to the owner for each interfaced system and shall be kept on file by the installing dealer for future reference: 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1. Interface diagram(s) in accordance with the examples contained herein, showing all interfaced units and connections between them. This diagram shall identify all interface modules and junction barrier strips included in the installation and shall include the name and location of each device or module. All diagrams shall be annotated with the vessel’s name and date of installation. 1798 1799 2. Identification by device of all hardware input and output ports in use, including programming steps necessary to set the ports into the proper mode for operation. 1800 3. Wire colors used. 1801 1802 4. A list of all barrier strips, T-connectors, and terminations that identifies their physical location aboard the vessel. 1803 5. Intended data flow showing input and output ports. 1804 6. Verification that interface testing was successfully completed. 1805 1806 1807 8.2 NMEA 0183 Interfacing & Wiring Requirements 1808 1809 1810 1811 NMEA 0183 is a low-cost, low-capacity, single-transmitter/multi-receiver network for interconnecting marine electronic devices, also known as a “single talker/multiple listener” interface. This section identifies requirements and recommended practices for installing and connecting devices using the NMEA 0183 interface standard. 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 There are multiple versions of the NMEA 0183 specification in use in the marine industry. Prior to NMEA 0183 version 2.0, including NMEA 0180 and NMEA 0182, the hardware employed a Single-Ended interface implemented with one signal wire and a common ground, based on EIA-232. All implementations from 2.0 and later employ a differential interface with two signal wires, based on EIA-422. Most remaining differences between versions are related to the content of the data sentences sent between devices. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 63 of 313 2014 NMEA 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 NOTE: Due to the difference between the Single-Ended and differential interfaces implemented in ANSI/TIA/EIA-232-F (RS-232) and ANSI/TIA/EIA-422-B (RS422), older versions of NMEA 0183 prior to version 2.0 shall not be connected to equipment supporting NMEA 0183 version 2.0 or higher without proper interface circuitry. Do not connect one of the signal wires of the differential interface to the common ground of the Single-Ended interface 1826 1827 1828 1829 A high-speed version, NMEA 0183-HS also exists for devices that require greater bandwidth. Table 16 compares the data transmission characteristics of NMEA 0183 and NMEA 0183-HS, and identifies approximate aggregate throughput of each interface. 1830 1831 Table 16: NMEA 0183 and NMEA 0183-HS Data Transmission Characteristics NMEA 0183 4,800 8 (d7 = 0) None One 450 Baud Rate (bits/sec) Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Usable Throughput (char/sec) 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 8.2.1 NMEA 0183-HS 38,400 8 (d7 = 0) None One 3,600 NMEA 0183-HS (High Speed) NMEA 0183-HS implements the same sentences as NMEA 0183 Version 2.0 and above, but at a higher baud rate. NMEA 0183-HS devices utilize an additional signal ground connection (C) in addition to the A & B signal lines and cable shield. This C connection ensures that the common mode voltage is equal at all 0183-HS TALKERs and LISTENERs. Figure 18: NMEA 0183-HS Wiring 1840 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 64 of 313 2014 NMEA 1841 1842 All signal and common line connections "A", "B" and “C” are connected in parallel. See Figure 18. 1843 1844 1845 1846 With single shielded cables and a separate wire as common line “C” (signal ground), it is recommended that the shield be connected to the TALKER chassis only and not be connected to any LISTENER. And it is recommended that the shield shall be continuous (unbroken) between all LISTENERs (see Figure 18). 1847 1848 1849 1850 With double shielded cables and the inner shield used as common line “C” (signal ground), it is recommended that the outer shield shall be connected to the TALKER chassis only and not be connected to any LISTENER. And it is recommended that the outer shield shall be continuous (unbroken) between all LISTENERs 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 With double shielded cables and a separate wire as common line “C” (signal ground), it is recommended that the inner shield be connected to the TALKER chassis only and not be connected to any LISTENER. And it is recommended that the inner shield shall be continuous (unbroken) between all LISTENERs. The outer shield may be connected to chassis on either side if required. 1861 NOTE: NMEA 0183-HS devices shall not be directly connected to standard NMEA 0183 devices (4,800 baud). With single shielded cables, it is recommended that the shield be connected to the talker chassis only, and not be connected to any listener. 8.2.2 1862 1863 RS-232 and RS-422 Overview This is a summary of information for a very basic understanding of Serial Data Communications with emphasis on two standards: RS-232 and RS-422. 1864 • Serial Data Communications over dedicated conductors: 1865 • Data is transferred with Digital Signaling 1866 • In Digital Signaling, data is labeled either as High and Low or as Zero and One 1867 • These are Binary Numbers and are known as data bits. 1868 • Groups of data bits are packaged into ‘words’ which are called Bytes. 1869 1870 • It is commonly considered that eight bits make up a Byte which allows for a count of 0 to 255 defining specific characters (letters, punctuation, etc.) 1871 1872 • An example of a Byte: 0101 0011 and is read right to left: 128 64 32 16 (space) 8 4 2 1. This example, therefore, equals a numeric value of 83 1873 • Bytes are how information is packaged into NMEA0183 Sentences. 1874 8.2.2.1 Data Transfer 1875 1876 The data is transferred on two conductors per circuit called a Communications Pair. The voltage is measured from one conductor to the next on this pair of wires 1877 Two voltage ranges exist to represent either a High or a Low or as a Zero or a One. 1878 The rate per second at which these voltages change is called the Baud Rate. 1879 1880 Standard NMEA0183 data is transmitted at a Baud Rate of 4800 which is also referred to as 4800 bits per second. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 65 of 313 2014 NMEA 1881 1882 High Speed data, NMEA0183 HS, which is used for AIS data and other things, is transmitted at a Baud Rate of 38,400 bits per second. 1883 1884 1885 Two different Serial Data Communications Standards are used by different marine electronics products. These are referred to as RS-232 and RS-422. These standards define voltage levels on the Communication Pair as well as some other parameters. 1886 8.2.2.2 1887 1888 1889 1890 In RS-232 only one conductor changes voltage, and the COMMON or Signal Ground stays at a constant voltage close to zero. The wire that changes voltage should swing from at least 3 volts positive to below 3 volts negative. 8.2.2.3 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 RS-232 RS-422 In RS-422 both conductors have changing voltages on them. The voltages change from a high state (about three to five volts) to a low state (about zero to one volt). (Insert graphics of RS-422 waveforms showing three to four bits of data). The voltage is measured from one conductor (TX+ or RX+) to the other conductor (TX- or RX-). This is called Differential Signaling. 8.2.2.4 What are the other differences between RS-422 and RS-232? 1898 1899 Data voltages in the RS-422 standard are Isolated meaning that no DC Voltage is carried from a transmitting device to a receiving device. 1900 1901 1902 RS-232 is Ground Referenced meaning the communication circuit connects Ground from one device to the next. This will always cause a Ground Loop to be created. 1903 8.2.2.5 How do we tell if a circuit (a Communication Pair) is RS-422 or RS-232? 1904 1905 In RS-232 you will see ONE wire for TX and ONE wire for RX, and both will use a COMMON wire, sometimes called Signal GND. 1906 1907 1908 In RS-422 you will see TWO wires for TX Data, or Transmit Data, and another TWO wires for RX Data, or Receive Data. (See Figure 19) 1909 1910 1911 Figure 19: RS-232 and RS-422 Circuit Differences 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 66 of 313 2014 NMEA 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 NOTE: Some equipment manufacturers still use RS-232 and call their equipment NMEA0183 Rev 2.0 compatible (RS-422). This is not electrically true and the only way to interface the two devices correctly is with an aftermarket RS-232 to RS-422 converter (there are several commonly available on the market). This ensures that both devices see the correct loads / inputs for a coherent transfer of data. 1917 8.2.3 NMEA 0183 Circuit 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 NMEA 0183 interfaces are based on a bus topology, where each device connects to the bus in accordance with whether they are a talker or a listener. There is only one talker on an NMEA bus, or interface circuit, and there may be multiple listeners, depending on the driving capability of the talker. Figures 20, 21, and 22 illustrate an NMEA 0183 interface circuit and identifies the required connections. 1923 1924 Figure 20: Basic NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit 1925 1926 1927 Figure 21: NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit-example 1 1928 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 67 of 313 2014 NMEA GPS (talker) "A" "B" Shield "A" "B" Shield To other devices (listener) (listener) RADAR 1929 (talker) Chart Plotter 1930 1931 Figure 22: NMEA 0183 Interface Circuit example 2 1932 1933 1934 1935 Multiple interface circuits may be provided to accommodate vessels with more than one talker, but each circuit has only one talker and is independent and wired separately. Note that a single device that sends and receives data using NMEA 0183 may participate as a talker in one circuit and as a listener in another. 1936 8.2.3.1 Talker Circuit 1937 1938 1939 Each NMEA 0183 interface circuit shall have only one talker, and a maximum of 3 listeners. Where more than 3 listeners for a single talker is required, a signal expander shall be provided that amplifies the talker output to drive a greater number of listeners. 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 Older Single-Ended devices may operate as a talker with a single differential listener by connecting the Single-Ended talker signal to listener’s “A” connection and connecting the listener’s “B” connection to ground. Where more than one listener is desired, a signal expander that converts the Single-Ended signal into a differential signal is recommended. 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 8.2.3.2 Multiple Talker Circuits Where a single listener requires data from multiple talkers, a data multiplexer or combiner shall be provided as indicated in Figures 23 and 24. Data multiplexers buffer the input sentences from each talker, and provide a single data stream that may then be connected to multiple listeners. As shown in the figure, combining two talkers through a multiplexer results in a third talker circuit driven from the multiplexer. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 68 of 313 2014 NMEA 1951 1952 Figure 23: Combining Talkers for One Listener 1953 GPS Talker Circuit 1 (talker) (listener) (talker) Multiplexer (listener) (talker) Talker Circuit 3 Talker Circuit 2 (listener) 1954 1955 (talker) (listener) Chart Plotter Autopilot Figure 24: Combining Talkers for One Listener 1956 1957 1958 1959 There is a practical limit to the number of talkers that can be combined based on the available bandwidth and the number of sentences that each talker transmits. Products are available that combine up to four talkers and replicate the combined output into four or more new talker circuits, each capable of supporting multiple listeners. 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 NOTE: At 4,800 bits per second the total available throughput is limited to 450 characters per second. When combining talkers, the installer shall ensure that the combined transmitted data made up of sentences from both talkers can be handled within the available bandwidth. The total bandwidth used can be computed by multiplying each transmitted sentence length for each talker by the sentence repetition rate, and summing the results. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 69 of 313 2014 NMEA 1966 8.2.4 1967 1968 1969 Cabling and connections between equipment using NMEA 0183 shall be in accordance with the following paragraphs. 8.2.4.1 1970 1971 1972 Cable Requirements Maximum Operational Cable Length Interface cables shall be kept as short as possible and shall not exceed 150 feet (45.75 meters). 8.2.4.2 Cable Type 1973 1974 1975 Interface cables, regardless of length, shall be composed of multi-conductor tinned shielded cable with a minimum 95 percent shielding. A twisted pair employing 22 AWG stranded wire shall be used for the NMEA 0183 data signals. 1976 1977 NMEA 0183-HS requires a third conductor, which is used to ensure that the common mode ground potential is the same at all drivers and receivers. 1978 1979 8.2.4.3 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 All interface cables shall be terminated at a common barrier strip for each interface circuit, in accordance with the requirements of Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. Additional barrier strips may be used to join interface extension cables to a manufacturer pigtail where it is impractical to route the pigtail directly to a common barrier strip. 8.2.4.4 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 Connections Shielding The interface cable shield shall be grounded only at the talker and shall be left unterminated at each listener. Shield continuity shall be maintained at all barrier strips. 8.2.4.5 Color-Coding The NMEA 0183 standard does not establish specific color-codes for NMEA 0183 interface signals. Table 17 identifies signal color codes frequently used by manufacturers to identify and differentiate between NMEA 0183 Talker and Listener connections in supplied pigtails. 1993 1994 Table 17: NMEA 0183 Signal Color Codes 1995 1996 1997 Color codes used by each device shall be confirmed by the installer using the manufacturer’s documentation before equipment connections are made. When 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 70 of 313 2014 NMEA 1998 1999 2000 equipment pigtails cannot all be joined at the same barrier strip location and the NMEA 0183 network wiring is extended, the Talker color code should be used for cabling between barrier strips. 2001 2002 NOTE: NMEA 0183 color codes will vary by manufacturer. Refer to manufacturer wiring diagrams before installing connections 2003 8.2.5 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Power Requirements Individual NMEA 0183 interface circuits are not powered separately from the connected devices; the devices themselves provide all transmission power. Accordingly, no over-current protection is required in circuit wiring used specifically for NMEA 0183 data transfer. 8.2.6 2009 2010 2011 Interface between Versions, to NMEA 2000®, and to Other Devices Connections between NMEA 0183 version 2.0 or later and NMEA 0180, 0182 and 0183 version 1.5 or lower shall only be made using buffers or transceivers that provide opto-isolation and voltage level shifts necessary to protect interface circuitry. 2012 2013 2014 2015 NOTE: Equipment with multiple configurable ports as noted in 8.2.5 may be configured with one port in single ended mode (version 1.5 or earlier) and another port in differential mode (version 2.0 or later) in order to support a wide variety of interface requirements. 2016 2017 Interfaces between NMEA 0183 or NMEA 0183-HS and an NMEA 2000® backbone must be provided using NMEA 2000® certified devices intended for that purpose. 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 Opto-isolation and voltage level shift may be required to interface devices designed to communicate using RS-232 with NMEA 0183 compatible devices. Refer to NMEA 0183 for specific details on opto-isolation requirements for connecting with non NMEA 0183 devices. Alternatively, Universal Serial Bus (USB) equipped multiplexers are available with software that provides virtual serial ports for communicating with PC based navigation and diagnostic software. 2024 8.2.7 2025 2026 2027 2028 NMEA 0183 Setup On installation completion, the equipment shall be initialized, and the talker and all listeners shall be set for the same data transfer format. Each piece of equipment shall be turned on, the interface data format shall be verified, and the specific interface port in use shall be activated and configured for the hardware connections in use. 2029 2030 2031 2032 NOTE: High-end equipment may be provided with ports that can be configured as either Single-Ended or differential outputs. Manufacturer instructions shall be followed to ensure that all interconnected ports are configured to use the same electrical interface. 2033 2034 2035 2036 8.2.8 NMEA 0183 Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 71 of 313 2014 NMEA 2037 8.3 NMEA 2000® is a low-cost, moderate-capacity, bi-directional multi-transmitter/multireceiver network for interconnecting marine electronic devices. This section identifies requirements and recommended practices for installing and connecting devices certified to communicate with each other using NMEA 2000®. 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 NMEA 2000® Interfacing & Wiring Requirements 8.3.1 General Requirements NMEA 2000® devices shall be connected in a strict bus topology, based on a continuous backbone. Each device shall be connected to the backbone via individual taps and drop cables. Figures 25 & 26 illustrate a minimal NMEA 2000® network and identify significant components. 2047 2048 2049 Figure 25: NMEA 2000® Network Topology example 1 Other I/O NMEA 2000® Device (a) Terminating Resistor Backbone Cable Over Current Protection Required + VDC Gnd Shield 2050 2051 2052 2053 Device Power Connection Tap (T-connector or barrier strips) Network Power Supply Connection Terminating Resistor Drop Cable NMEA 2000® Device (b) (powered from backbone) Figure 26: NMEA 2000® Network Topology example 2 A maximum of 50 physical nodes shall be connected to the backbone, and the disconnection of any device shall not interrupt the backbone. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 72 of 313 2014 NMEA 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 NOTE: Only NMEA 2000® Certified devices should be connected to an NMEA 2000® backbone; uncertified devices that are “compatible with” or “work with” NMEA 2000® have not undergone the same testing to ensure that interoperability and safety requirements have been met. (See www.nmea.org for a list of NMEA 2000® Certified devices.) 8.3.1.1 Device Power 2060 2061 2062 2063 NMEA 2000® interface driver circuitry in devices connected to the NMEA 2000® backbone always receives power from the backbone power leads. Operational power for the remaining device circuitry will be provided from one of the following three sources: 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 1. A separate power supply connection – Most high power devices (MFDs for example), and all devices with other electrical connections in addition to the NMEA 2000® interface, will incorporate a second power supply connection that is isolated internally from the backbone power connections. The MFD Device in Figure 27 illustrates this wiring configuration. 2069 2070 2071 Figure 27: NMEA 2000® high power device with separate power connection 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2. Backbone power – Devices with no electrical connections other than the NMEA 2000® interface, and which draw no more than 1.0 amp, may be designed to draw all operational power from the backbone. Device (b) in Figure 26. illustrates this device type. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 73 of 313 2014 NMEA 2077 2078 2079 Figure 28: NMEA 2000® Power Tee 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 3. Dedicated interface power – Devices with no electrical connections other than the NMEA 2000® interface, but which draw more than 1.0 amp may be designed to connect to the network power source using a separately routed, dedicated power lead as illustrated in Section 8.3.5.2. 2085 2086 2087 Only one of these three sources of power will be implemented for the NMEA 2000® interface driver circuitry on any specific device. See the manufacturer’s documentation to identify power supply connections used. 2088 2089 2090 NOTE: Power connections should follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding power lead size and shall be made in accordance with Section 8.3.5.2 and other applicable regulatory agency over-current protection and isolation requirements. 2091 8.3.2 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 Cable Requirements Cabling and connections shall be in accordance with the following paragraphs. 8.3.2.1 Cable Types Network backbone and drop cables shall be either of the three cable types defined in NMEA 2000® Standard. Significant characteristics of each cable type are provided in Table 18.. NMEA 2000® cable selection and application shall be made in accordance with all standards applicable to the locality where they are installed (see Section 1.1.2), and the following paragraphs. Recent industry changes have included the addition of many different manufacturers offering NMEA2000 cables. Networks complexity warrants the correct calculations to be made on networks that exceed 15 nodes and 30 meters in length. Since calculating the different cable types can be difficult, one should consider isolating different cabling networks with network bridges. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 74 of 313 2014 NMEA Table 18: NMEA 2000® Cable Types & Specifications 2104 Cable Name Lite Cable Mid Cable* Heavy Cable Signal / Data Wire Gauge 24 AWG min 20 AWG min 18 AWG min Power Wire Gauge 22 AWG min 16 AWG min 15 AWG min Cable Type Lite Mid Heavy Connector type Micro Micro or Mini Mini Current Capacity** 3 Amps 4 A Micro | 8 A Mini 8 Amps Cable Resistance .057 Ω per Meter .015 Ω per Meter .012 Ω per Meter Max Backbone Length 100 Meters 250 Meters 250 Meters Max Drop Length 6 Meters 6 Meters 6 Meters 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 NOTE: Only NMEA 2000® Approved cables and connectors should be used with an NMEA 2000® backbone. (See http://www.nmea.org for a list of NMEA 2000® Approved cables and connectors.) 2110 2111 2112 2113 NMEA 2000® is a high speed data bus, similar to Ethernet. At these speeds, the signals do not travel cleanly from one end of the cable to the other, but are subject to many reflections from each connector, branch and cable join. These reflections cause the signal to degrade significantly, and at some point the network fails to work. 2114 2115 2116 NMEA have established a set of requirements for NMEA 2000® networks which, when followed, will ensure that the signals remain strong enough for the messages to get through. Some of these requirements limit cable lengths and the number of nodes, 2117 Check your design to confirm that these requirements are met. 2118 2119 2120 2121 Other requirements dictate the physical characteristics of the cabling and connectors to ensure clean signals. . Use of cabling that does not meet NMEA 2000® requirements will result in weaker signals and lower voltages than expected and will invalidate all the calculations. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 75 of 313 2014 NMEA 2122 8.3.2.2 Maximum Operational Cable Length 2123 2124 2125 The maximum length of the network backbone is constrained by limitations associated with data transmission and with DC power distribution. The length of installed backbone cable shall not exceed the lesser of: 2126 • 250 meters, if using Heavy Cable 2127 • 250 meters, if using Mid Cable 2128 • 100 meters, if using Lite Cable 2129 2130 2131 The maximum length attainable while maintaining the minimum voltage specified in Section 8.3.3.1 2132 2133 In addition, the length of any drop cable from a tap to the device shall not exceed 6 meters. 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 NOTE: Short NMEA 2000® networks with a small number of devices may generally be powered from the vessel’s 12-volt battery with proper over-current protection. Networks that employ one or more isolated power supplies will usually be capable of supporting more devices and longer backbone lengths, see Section 8.3.7.2. 8.3.2.3 Connection Methods 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 Backbone and drop cable connections at taps shall be made using either NMEA 2000® Mini- or Micro-style connectors (Figure 29) or barrier strips(Figure 31), as identified in the NMEA 2000® Standard. The pin-out for Mini- and Micro-style connectors is shown in Figure 30.. Connection of drop cables to equipment may be made using manufacturer-specified connectors. 2144 2145 Figure 29: NMEA 2000 Cable examples 2146 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 76 of 313 2014 NMEA 2147 2148 Figure 30: NMEA 2000 Connector pin outs 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 NOTE: Pre-made NMEA 2000® cables and T’s are polarized with male and female ends; be sure to decide which end of the bus will be male and which will be female before pulling cables to avoid the need to re-pull cable, install gender changers, or replace connectors in the field. 8.3.2.4 Shielding 2155 2156 2157 The backbone shield drain wire shall be connected at only one power insertion point and shall be connected to the RF Ground system as identified in Section 3, Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection. 2158 2159 Shield wires can be easily identified by having grey colored jacketing for external connections or a bare wire within the cable assembly. 2160 2161 2162 2163 NOTE: The backbone shield is intended to be grounded in only one place. Manufacturerprovided connectors or field connections made to connect the drop cable to NMEA 2000® devices shall leave the shield drain unconnected. 8.3.2.5 Terminations 2164 2165 NMEA 2000 networks shall have two termination resistors to reduce transmission-line reflections, one at each end of the linear network backbone cable. 2166 2167 Both ends of the NMEA 2000® network backbone shall be terminated using a 120-ohm ± 5%, ¼Watt, termination resistor. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 77 of 313 2014 NMEA 2168 2169 2170 2171 In order to minimize network disturbance when nodes are disconnected from the network, termination resistors shall be connected only to the ends of the main network backbone cable and not to cable drops leading to an electronic device and not within electronic devices. 2172 2173 2174 The resistor shall be connected using an integral NMEA 2000® termination connector, or connected between the NET-H and NET-L backbone signal leads if using barrier strips as shown in Figure XX below. 2175 2176 Figure 31: Barrier Strip Wiring & Terminations 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 When termination connectors are used at both backbone cable ends (vs. barrier strips) one-termination connector shall be male and the other female. Following this practice allows for future lengthening of the network backbone cable. 8.3.2.6 Color Coding Color-coding of signals on the NMEA 2000® backbone and drop cables shall be in accordance with Table 19 and Figure 32.. Table 19: NMEA 2000® Signal Color Codes Name Shield NET-S NET-C NET-H NET-L 2184 2185 Pair Drain Power Power Signal Signal Color Bare Red Black White Blue Figure 32: NMEA 2000 Cable Cutaway 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 78 of 313 2014 NMEA 2186 8.3.2.7 2187 2188 2189 Cable Installation Refer to the manufactures cabling requirements for properly installing and securing NMEA 2000 Approved cables and connectors. Figure 33 provides guidance for properly securing NMEA2000 or any multi stranded cabling. 2190 2191 2192 2193 Figure 33: Cable Installation Considerations 2194 2195 8.3.3 Backbone Power Requirements 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 Backbone power is used to power all transceivers directly coupled to the NET-H and NET-L signal conductors, and optionally a portion of the connected node. Manufacturers specify the amount of power drawn from the backbone power conductors using a Load Equivalency Number (LEN). One network load, or LEN, is defined as 50 mA or any portion thereof. For example, a device taking 51 mA from the backbone power conductors is a 2 LEN device. 2202 2203 2204 A wide variety of options may be considered by installers to ensure that adequate power is available to drive all connected NMEA 2000® transceivers. The various options differ with respect to the following installed characteristics: 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 79 of 313 2014 NMEA 2205 2206 2207 2208 Backbone Power Leg – A length of an NMEA 2000® backbone that has its own power (NET-S) and ground (NET-C) connections and is isolated from the power and ground connections of any other backbone power leg. The installer can vary the number and length of power legs to provide the necessary capacity based on equipment distribution. 2209 2210 2211 2212 Power Insertion Point – A physical connection to the power (NET-S) and ground (NET-C) pair used to connect a backbone power leg to a power source. This can be implemented using a standard Tee, or by the use of power taps manufactured specifically for that purpose. 2213 2214 Power Source – A backbone power leg must have sufficient voltage and current for the attached devices, and may incorporate redundancy for reliability. 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 The two main considerations in determining backbone power leg number and length, power insertion point location(s), and power source(s) are the total voltage drop on the backbone due to connected devices (as discussed in Sections 8.3.4 and 8.3.5), and the common mode offset voltage in the reference used by the transceivers to interpret the NET-H and NET-L signals. 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 To ensure highly reliable operation, the NET-H and NET-L signals must be measured by the NMEA 2000® transceivers with respect to the same common network reference. Some allowance is provided to account for voltage drops along the NET-C conductor, but the NET-C value at all transceivers must be within 2.5 volts of each other for the transceivers to be guaranteed to operate. For single power leg backbones, the common network reference is simply located at the power insertion point. However, more complex multi-leg backbones require identifying a specific location as the common network reference. This location may be at one of the power insertion points, or may be a separate location chosen to simplify connections to the common network reference from each of the power insertion points. 2230 2231 2232 NOTE: Backbone power is used primarily to supply the transceivers that drive the NET-H and NET-L signal lines, and is not intended to be the only power supply for all device electronics. NMEA 2000® backbone power shall be provided in accordance with the following paragraphs. 2233 2234 2235 8.3.3.1 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 Minimum and Maximum Voltage The minimum voltage experienced at any point along the network backbone or device drop cables shall be not less than 9.5 volts. The maximum voltage supplied to the backbone shall be not more than 16 volts. 8.3.3.2 Maximum Device Load Devices with no electrical connections other than the NMEA 2000® interface that draw more than 1.0 amp shall not draw power directly from the network backbone but shall be powered from a separate supply connection routed back to the power application point. Refer to Figure 27 and manufacturer documentation NOTE: NMEA 2000® devices that report a LEN of 0 employ dedicated interface power connections and shall be connected in accordance with Section 8.3.5.2. 2246 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 80 of 313 2014 NMEA 2247 8.3.3.3 Backbone Power Source 2248 NMEA 2000® backbone power shall be provided using one of the following means: 2249 2250 2251 2252 1. Direct Battery – The vessel’s 12-volt battery may be connected via the vessel’s DC supply system to the backbone power connections. Only one connection shall be provided, which may be located at either end of the backbone or at any point along the backbone. 2253 2254 2255 2. Isolated Power Supply – One or more isolated 15-volt power supplies may be connected directly to backbone power insertion points. Multiple power supplies may be used for redundancy or to accommodate load. 2256 2257 2258 NOTE: Battery connections and isolated power supply connections shall not be combined on the same NMEA 2000® network. 8.3.3.4 Each NMEA 2000® backbone power leg shall have only one power insertion point using a single connection each to the power (NET-S) and ground (NET-C) connections. 2259 2260 2261 Backbone Leg Power Connection 8.3.3.5 Backbone Leg Over-current Protection 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 Each NMEA 2000® backbone power leg shall be provided with over-current protection in accordance with ABYC E-11, AC and DC ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ON BOATS, subsection E-11.10.1, and the following provisions. Internationally, this standard defers to the proper and appropriate international standards for power protection for that respective country’s regulatory agency. 2267 2268 2269 Over-current protection shall be rated at no more than 150 percent of the backbone cable rated current (See Table18.). The over-current protection location may vary depending on the source of power: 2270 2271 2272 2273 1. Direct Battery – When over-current protection for the branch circuit feeding the NMEA 2000® backbone power leg is larger than 150 percent of the backbone rated current, backbone leg over-current protection shall be located at the power insertion point. 2274 2275 2276 2277 2. Isolated Power Supply – When the rated output for an isolated power supply feeding the NMEA 2000® backbone power leg is larger than the backbone rated current, backbone leg over-current protection shall be located at the power insertion point (also see 8.3.3.6). 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 NOTE: Isolated power supplies approved for use with NMEA 2000® networks are required to have built-in over-current protection limiting their output to 150 percent of rated capacity and do not require external over-current protection on their output when used singly to power a backbone power leg. 8.3.3.6 Redundant Power 2283 2284 2285 When multiple power supplies are connected to any power insertion point in order to provide redundant sources for the associated backbone power leg, the connection shall meet both of the following requirements as illustrated in Figure 34. 2286 2287 1. Power supply outputs shall be diode protected to prevent back feeding a defective or de-energized supply. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 81 of 313 2014 NMEA 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2. The power supply outputs shall be connected together ahead of the over-current protection for the associated power leg. NOTE: Over-current protection is always required between the point where supplies are paralleled for redundant applications and the backbone even when using output limited power supplies. The level of over-current protection, 3 or 8 Amps, is determined by the rating of the backbone cable in use. Net-H Net-L Net-S Net-C Shield Over Current Protection (3 or 8 Amp) To DC Main Negative Bus Isolated Power Supply 2294 2295 2296 Figure 34: Redundant Power Supplies 8.3.3.7 2297 2298 2299 2300 Isolated Power Supply Common Network Reference The NET-C connection of each power insertion point shall be connected together at a common network reference point that shall in turn be connected to the vessel DC Main Negative Bus. 8.3.3.8 Isolated Power Supplies 2301 2302 When isolated power supplies are used, the connection to the power insertion point shall meet all of the following requirements: 2303 2304 1. The drop cable from the power insertion point to the power supply shall be less than or equal to 6 meters in length. 2305 2306 2307 2. The conductor gauge used in the drop cable from the power insertion point shall be at least as large as the power pair conductor gauge used in the backbone at the power insertion point. 2308 2309 2310 3. The drop between the power insertion point and power supply shall incorporate over-current protection unless the power supply is output limited to no more than 150 percent of the backbone cable rating (see 8.3.3.5). 2311 2312 2313 8.3.4 Network Planning Network planning involves verifying that the network cabling and devices can be connected in the intended manner while still meeting all the applicable requirements. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 82 of 313 2014 NMEA 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 The requirements placed on manufacturers of certified NMEA 2000® devices ensure that transmission characteristics and communication protocols inter-operate within the operational bounds established by the specification. In order to accommodate a wide variety of maritime applications, the specification provides a similarly broad variety of options for cabling and powering NMEA 2000® devices. As a result, power distribution quickly becomes the limiting factor in planning an NMEA 2000® network as the number of nodes, the power required, and the network size increases. 2321 2322 2323 In order to meet the requirements of Section 8.3.3.1, the maximum network distribution voltage drop shall be equal to or less than the values given in Table 20 for networks powered from the indicated source. 2324 Table 20: Maximum Network Voltage Drop Power Source Battery Isolated Power Supply 2325 2326 2327 2328 Maximum Voltage Drop 1.17 Volts 3.61 Volts NOTE: If redundant power is provided using diodes to combine output from multiple power sources into a single power source, the maximum allowed voltage drop identified in Table 20 shall be reduced by the voltage drop expected across the diodes, typically 0.6 volt. 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 This section describes two basic NMEA 2000® topologies and provides a quick analysis for ensuring that the maximum voltage drop is not exceeded for networks powered from either the vessel’s battery or a single power supply. Networks powered from multiple power supplies should not be planned using these methods. The analysis, known as the Initial Voltage Drop Estimate, consists of a simple calculation to characterize how critical power distribution will be for the intended installation. The initial calculation is based on the conservative assumption that the total load on a network produces a voltage drop over the entire length of the network. 2337 2338 2339 2340 This initial calculation will determine whether one of two standard network topologies may be implemented without further analysis. A detailed analysis of the voltage drop on each segment is described in Section 8.3.5, and shall be used if the Initial Voltage Drop Estimate reveals that additional analysis is required. 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 8.3.4.1 End-Powered Network An end-powered network will typically be employed on smaller vessels with a small number of NMEA 2000® devices in a single location, or where one end of the network is terminated in the machinery spaces or near the vessel batteries. Prepare a network diagram similar to Figure 35, which illustrates an end-powered network and identifies the network details. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 83 of 313 2014 NMEA 2347 2348 Figure 35: End-Powered Network example 2349 2350 A network diagram shall contain: 2351 • The length of each network segment and drop cable 2352 • The identity and network load of each equipment on the network 2353 • The planned location where power will be supplied to the network 2354 • The planned equipment locations 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 A completed network diagram contains all information necessary to complete the necessary voltage drop calculations and should be consulted to ensure that all required materials are on-hand for the installation. A copy of the completed diagram shall be provided to the vessel owner as well as kept on file with any installation notes. 8.3.4.2 Mid-Powered Network 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 A mid-powered network is any network where the power is connected to the network at some location other than at the end. This network consists of two legs, one leg extending in each direction from the power insertion point. Prepare a network diagram similar to Figure 36, which illustrates a mid-powered network and identifies the network details. In addition to the information required for an end-powered network, be sure to identify the direction of each leg from the power supply application point. 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 Large networks (networks that draw >2Amp) incorporate mid power taps, this allows two network legs to be balanced with an equal amount of current supplied to both legs. Power taps of this nature have female connections to opposite sides of the power insertion point. A technician can identify a mid-powered network by observing the gender of the terminator providing a gender changer has not been used. 2371 2372 2373 NOTE: When adding a device to one side of a mid-powered network use a NMEA2000 certified network meter to ensure common mode voltage has not reach fault status.) 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 84 of 313 2014 NMEA 2374 2375 Figure 36: Mid-Powered Network example 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 A mid-powered network is likely to be found on larger vessels where power is provided to the network near where it passes a power distribution panel. As Figure 36 shows, duplicate equipment may be present where the same capability is desired at more than one helm location. 8.3.4.3 Initial Voltage Drop Estimate Perform the following calculation to determine if the desired equipment and cable arrangement can be used for a particular installation VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION is Ohms Law (E= I x R) 2385 • E = Voltage Drop (VD) 2386 • I = Total Network LEN (NL) 2387 • R = Backbone Length (BL) 2388 EQUATION VD= .1 x NL x BL x Cable Resistance 2389 Cable Resistance is in Ohms (Ω) per Meter 2390 • Lite Cable = .057 Ω / Meter 2391 • Mid Cable = .015 Ω / Meter 2392 • Heavy Cable = .012 Ω / Meter 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 Table 21. lists several voltage drop ranges and identifies the applicable power source and network topology options. Use the table in conjunction with the previously developed network diagram to develop a final topology that satisfies NMEA 2000 requirements. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 85 of 313 2014 NMEA 2398 2399 Table 21: Voltage Drop Range vs. Power and Topology Options # Voltage Drop Power Source 1 2 Less than 1.5 V Greater than 1.5 V and less than 3.0 V Greater than 1.5 V and less than 5.0 V Greater than 3.0 V Greater than 5.0 V and less than 10.0 V Greater than 10.0 V 3 4 5 6 Either Battery End Network Yes No MidNetwork Yes Yes Power Supply Yes Yes Battery Power Supply No Yes Power Supply Detailed Calculation Optional Required Required 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 First, use the computed Initial Voltage Drop to identify the applicable range from the Voltage Drop column, then read across to determine the options and topologies that will meet NMEA 2000® requirements. For example, if the calculated initial voltage drop was 2.0V, and the network was to be powered from the vessel battery, Table 21 shows that an end-powered network will not meet requirements, and that a midpowered network is required. 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 When a mid-powered network is required, as indicated by Rows 2 and 5, the Initial Voltage Drop shall be recomputed for each leg of the mid-powered network, to ensure that the voltage drop for each leg does not exceed 1.5 V for a battery powered network or exceed 5.0 V for a power supply powered network. If the voltage drop on one leg is higher than required, consider picking a new power insertion point one or more devices to the right or left of the original insertion point and recalculating the voltage drop estimate for each leg. A Detailed Segment Voltage Drop analysis must be performed if rearrangement does not produce a voltage drop for each leg within the required values. 2415 2416 2417 2418 NOTE: Initial Voltage Drop calculations are conservative in nature and may not identify the best topology and arrangement for a particular situation. A more detailed analysis may yield results or options better suited to a particular vessel. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 86 of 313 2014 NMEA 2419 8.3.5 2420 2421 Advanced Network Planning Advanced network planning is required for networks with more complex power distribution requirements, and is indicated when any of the following situations occur: 2422 2423 1. Initial Voltage Drop calculations identify that detailed calculations are required, as shown in Row 4 or 6 in Table 21.; 2424 2425 2426 2. One or more NMEA 2000® devices have no electrical connections other than the NMEA 2000® interface and draw more than 1.0 amp using a dedicated power interface as identified in Section 8.3.1.1; 2427 OR 2428 2429 3. Initial Voltage Drop calculations yield results that are marginally within range, and the installer requires more flexibility in arranging equipment in the topology 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 This section provides a more detailed analysis of voltage drop within a network, and identifies the requirements for connecting devices using a dedicated power interface. The analysis, known as a Detailed Segment Voltage Drop, is a detailed calculation of the voltage drop on each network segment using the loads that are connected downstream from that segment. 8.3.5.1 Detailed Segment Voltage Drop A detailed segment voltage drop analysis is required for end- and mid-powered networks, where the Initial Voltage Drop estimate was greater than the maximum voltage drop identified in Table 21 for the intended power source. To perform the detailed analysis, first prepare a network diagram for the desired topology as discussed in Sections 8.3.4.2 and 8.3.4.3. The diagram will provide the necessary information to complete the detailed power distribution analysis worksheet shown in Table 22. Table 22: Detailed Voltage Drop Calculations The left-hand column of the worksheet lists each device, beginning with the device closest to the power connection point; the lengths of each cable segment are entered across the top. Use the following procedure to complete the worksheet. Complete a single worksheet for end-powered networks and two worksheets for mid-powered networks, one worksheet for each leg extending from the power insertion point. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 87 of 313 2014 NMEA 2450 2451 2452 1. In the left-hand column, list devices in the order they are connected, starting with the device connected closest to the power connection. Also enter the network load specified by the manufacturer for each device. 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2. Across the top, enter the segment cable lengths: Segment 1 being the length of the backbone cable between the power supply connection tap and the first device tap; Segment 2 being the length of backbone cable between the first device tap and second device tap, etc. For the last segment, include the length of the drop cable to the last device in the segment length to account for the full wire distance from the power application point to the device, as shown in Figure 37. 2460 2461 2462 3. Working down each segment column, compute the round-trip voltage drop for each segment due to the current draw of each device connected after the segment using the following formula 2463 VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION is Ohms Law (E= I x R) 2464 • E = Voltage Drop (VD) 2465 • I = Total Network LEN (NL) 2466 • R = Backbone Length (BL) 2467 EQUATION VD= .1 x NL x BL x Cable Resistance 2468 Cable Resistance is in Ohms (Ω) per Meter 2469 • Lite Cable = .057 Ω / Meter 2470 • Mid Cable = .015 Ω / Meter 2471 • Heavy Cable = .012 Ω / Meter 2472 2473 4. 2474 2475 2476 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each column, noting that each column has one less device contributing to the voltage drop. For example, Device 1 only draws current through Segment 1 and not through any of the remaining segments. 2477 2478 6. After all columns are completed, add the total for each column across the bottom to compute the total voltage drop at the end of the last segment. 2479 2480 2481 Add the computed value in each cell of the column to calculate the total voltage drop in the segment, and enter the value at the bottom of the column. If the total voltage drop at the end of the last segment is less than 1.5 volts for battery power, or less than 5.0 volts for an isolated power supply, the network cabling plan meets the requirements of NMEA 2000®. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 88 of 313 2014 NMEA Depth Sounder 0.3 meter 2 loads 10 meters Electronic Compass Compass Display 0.3 meter 2 loads 0.3 meters Over Current Protection Required 0.3 meters 2 meter 1 load 2 meters 0.3 meter 2 loads Speed Log 5 meters 2 meter 1 load Autopilot Add the drop length to the last segment only Power from Battery Use these backbone lengths as segment lengths 2482 2483 Figure 37: Backbone Segment Lengths 2484 2485 In some situations, the device at the end of the network may not experience the greatest voltage drop. Such a situation exists under either of the following conditions: 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 1. The length of the last backbone segment and drop cable for the last device is short and the length of a drop cable to another device is longer, so that the total cable distance from the power connection tap to the other device is greater than the cable distance from the power connection tap to the last device; OR 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2. The power draw for another device is significantly more than the power draw for the last device, so that the voltage drop in its drop cable is greater than the voltage drop in the remainder of the backbone cable plus the voltage drop in the drop cable for the last device. Remember that the remainder of the backbone cable still carries current from all devices that are farther from the power connection tap than the device in question. 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 In these situations, the voltage drop at the suspected device should be calculated and compared with the result obtained in Step 6. The voltage drop for the suspected device is obtained by first calculating the voltage drop in the drop cable of the suspected device, and then adding it to the sum of voltage drops for all backbone segments between the power supply connection tap and the connection tap of the suspected device. 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 8.3.5.2 Connecting Devices Drawing More Than 1 Amp NMEA 2000® certified devices with no electrical connections other than the NMEA 2000® interface that draw more than 1.0 amp and have an indicated LEN of 0, as identified in Section 8.3.3.2, shall not be connected to the NET-S and NET-C power pair on the NMEA 2000® network. Instead, a separate pair of power leads shall be provided, as shown in Figure 38., which originates at the same network connection point where the power is applied to the network cable. Devices (a) and (b) in Figure 38 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 89 of 313 2014 NMEA 2511 2512 illustrate other more common power connection configurations as previously illustrated in Figures 26 and 27.. (powered from backbone) NMEA 2000® Device Other I/O Standard Device Power Connection (a) (b) Over Current Protection Required + VDC Gnd Shield 2513 2514 NMEA 2000® Device NMEA 2000® Device Dedicated Power Lead for Device Drop Cable Without Power Connection (Provided by Manufacturer) Device Requiring Separate Power Figure 38: Dedicated Power Leads for Large Loads 2515 The dedicated power lead shall meet all three of the following requirements: 2516 2517 • The dedicated power lead shall be a twisted pair of red and black, connected in accordance with the Signal Color Codes in Table 19. 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 • The dedicated power lead shall be the larger of 18 AWG, the gauge required to limit the voltage drop to less than the Maximum Voltage Drop specified in Table 20, or the manufacturer’s recommended wire gauge. The dedicated power lead shall be provided with over-current protection in accordance with ABYC E-11, AC and DC Electrical Systems On Boats, subsection E-11.10.1, or other applicable local regulatory agency requirements. 2524 2525 2526 • When dedicated leads are provided to power a device with a large load, the network load for that device should be omitted from the Initial Voltage Drop and Detailed Voltage Drop analyses. 2527 8.3.5.3 Other Considerations 2528 2529 2530 The requirements provided herein are intended to cover a majority of installation scenarios encountered in the field. Refer to the NMEA 2000® Standard for more information regarding NMEA 2000 networks that include the following options: 2531 2532 Multiple NMEA 2000® backbones and bridges; or Devices redundantly connected to more than one NMEA 2000® backbone. 2533 8.3.6 Example Calculations 2534 2535 2536 The following three examples demonstrate how to compute network voltage drops using both initial and detailed calculation methods and illustrates the effects of various choices available to the installer on the final network configuration. 2537 2538 2539 End-Powered Network Initial Estimate – Calculation of Initial Voltage Drop estimate for the network described in Section 8.3.6.1, using the Equation from Section 8.3.4.3 based on a backbone composed of Light Cable. 2540 2541 Mid-Powered Network Initial Estimate – Calculation of Initial Voltage Drop estimate for the network described in Section 8.3.6.2, using the Equation from Section 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 90 of 313 2014 NMEA 2542 2543 8.3.4.3, comparing the results from a backbone composed of Light Cable versus one composed of Heavy Cable. 2544 2545 2546 Mid-Powered Network Detailed Analysis – Calculation of Detailed Network Segment Voltage Drop for the network described in Section 8.3.6.3, using the worksheet in Table 22. and the procedure described in Section 8.3.5.1. 2547 8.3.6.1 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 End-Powered Network Initial Estimate An Initial Voltage Drop estimate is calculated for the end-powered network described in Section 8.3.4.1 in order to determine if the network can be connected to the vessel battery at one end of the network. Table 23 below summarizes the total backbone length and network loads. The Initial Voltage Drop estimate is computed based on using Light Cable from the Equation in Section 8.3.4.3. The voltage drop of 0.80 volt is well within Range 1 in Table 21, indicating that the network can be provided power from the vessel battery at either end of the network. Table 23: End-Powered Network Initial Estimate Network Loads Network Length Lite Cable Resistance Voltage Drop Estimate 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 8.3.6.2 8 17.6 meters .057 ohms / meter 0.80 volt Mid-Powered Network Initial Estimate An Initial Voltage Drop estimate is calculated for the mid-powered network described in Section 8.3.4.2 in order to determine if the network can be connected to the vessel battery, and whether Mid or Heavy Cable will be required. Table 24 summarizes the total backbone length and network loads as calculated for an end-powered network. The Initial Voltage Drop estimate is computed based on Light, Mid and Heavy Cable, using the Equation from Section 8.3.4.3. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 91 of 313 2014 NMEA 2565 Table 24: Mid-Powered Network Initial Estimate for Entire Backbone Network Loads Network Length Lite Cable Resistance Voltage Drop Estimate Light Cable 20 60.2 meters 057 ohms / meter 6.86 Volts Mid Cable 20 60.2 meters .015 ohms/ meter 1.81 Volts Heavy Cable 20 60.2 meters .012 ohms/ meter 1.44 Volts 2566 2567 2568 2569 Results for all three cable types indicate that an end-powered network would not be suitable for this application. The voltage drop of 1.81 and 1.44 volts for Mid and Heavy Cable respectively is within Range 2 of Table 21, indicating that a network powered from a battery applied at the network midpoint may be acceptable. 2570 2571 2572 2573 A recalculation for each network leg using Heavy Cable is summarized in Table 25. The calculated voltage drop for each leg is less than 1.5 volts, indicating that the selected power application point is acceptable for a network using Heavy Cable and powered from the vessel’s battery. 2574 Table 25: Mid-Powered Network Estimate for Each Leg Network Loads Network Length Heavy Cable Resistance Voltage Drop Estimate 2575 8.3.6.3 Left Leg 11 35.6 meters .012 ohms/ meter 0.47 Volts Right Leg 9 24.6 meters .012 ohms/ meter 0.27 Volts Mid-Powered Network Detailed Analysis 2576 2577 2578 2579 A detailed voltage drop analysis is performed for the mid-powered network described in Section 8.3.4.2 to determine the best combination of cable type and power connection point and illustrates the potential drawback of relying solely on the initial estimate calculation. 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 A Detailed Network Segment Voltage Drop analysis was prepared using the procedure described in Section 8.3.5.1, as shown in Table 26 shows a separate tabulation of values for each leg of the network based on the use of Light Cable, beginning with the first network segment connected to the power supply and working out. Recall that the last segment length includes the length of the last drop cable, making the segment lengths 11.0 meters and 0.6 meter for the last device connected to the left and right legs, respectively. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 92 of 313 2014 NMEA 2588 Table 26: Mid-Powered Network Detailed Analysis 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 The detailed analysis shows that both legs are well within the 1.5-volt maximum voltage drop for battery-powered networks. Comparing these results with the result from the Initial Voltage Drop calculations in Section 8.3.6.2 for Light Cable, it is apparent that the Initial Voltage Drop calculations are highly conservative. An installer is encouraged to perform detailed analysis any time the initial estimate results show criteria that are marginally out of range. 8.3.7 Example Power Connections 2599 2600 2601 2602 The following three examples demonstrate acceptable methods of connecting power to NMEA 2000® backbones, using either battery power or one or more isolated power supplies. The examples show the electrical connections implied in the previous backbone diagrams. 2603 2604 2605 2606 Single Leg Backbone – A backbone where the NET-S and NET-C conductors run the entire backbone length uninterrupted. The power insertion point may be located anywhere along the backbone and may be powered from either a vessel battery or an isolated power supply. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 93 of 313 2014 NMEA 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 Multiple Leg Backbone – A backbone where the NET-S and NET-C conductors are interrupted at one or more locations along the backbone creating two or more backbone power legs. The power insertion point for each power leg may be located anywhere along the leg, and each power leg must be powered using its own isolated power supply. 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 Two Leg Backbone with Collocated Power Insertion Points – A special case of the second example where the NET-S and NET-C are interrupted at a single point on the backbone and the power insertion points for each power leg are located immediately to either side of that interruption. This example may be powered from either a vessel battery or an isolated power supply. 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 8.3.7.1 Single Leg Backbone Power The simplest and most common method of powering an NMEA 2000® backbone is a single power insertion point incorporating the connections to NET-S, NET-C and the Shield. The power insertion point may be located anywhere along the backbone as determined using the analysis methods of Section 8.3.4 or 8.3.5. Figure 39.illustrates a direct connection from the DC power distribution system powered from the vessel battery. 2624 2625 2626 Figure 39: Single Power Leg Using Battery 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 A single power leg may also be powered from an isolated power supply. Figure 40. illustrates two possible electrical connections, depending on whether the power supply is connected to an AC or DC power source. The difference between the diagrams is how the NET-C and Shield connections are made because the NET-C cannot be connected to the AC power ground. Instead, the NET-C and Shield are connected together, creating the common network reference point, and a dedicated conductor is used to connect from there to the DC Main Negative Bus. The conductor is sized in accordance with the RF Ground System requirements (8 AWG). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 94 of 313 2014 NMEA 2635 2636 Figure 40: Single Leg Using Isolated Supply 8.3.7.2 Multiple Leg Backbone Power 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 Multiple legs may be necessary to support longer backbones and/or more connected devices. Figure 41. illustrates a backbone that has been isolated into three power legs, with each leg powered using an isolated power supply. Between power legs, both the NET-S and NET-C connection is broken to isolate the power in each leg. The NET-H, NET-L and Shield connections remain continuous for the entire backbone length. 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 One overriding consideration in supplying power to multiple power legs is to ensure that the ground reference for all legs is within the common mode offset voltage limit required by the NMEA 2000® transceivers, namely 2.5 volts. This requires that all NET-C connections are connected to the same common network reference using a dedicated connection with no voltage drop. 2647 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 95 of 313 2014 NMEA Over Current Protection (3 or 8 Amp) Net-H Net-L Net-S Net-C Shield Isolated Power Supply Common Network Ground Isolated Power Supply Isolated Power Supply To DC Main Negative Bus To RF Ground System 2648 2649 Figure 41: Multiple Power Legs Using Isolated Supplies 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 As with the single power leg examples, each leg is provided with its own over-current protection based on the type of cable being used. One advantage of multiple power legs is that each leg can be constructed of the type of cable appropriate for that leg; for example the center power leg in Figure 41.may be constructed of heavy cable and use an 8 amp fuse, while the legs on either end could be constructed of light cable and use a 3 amp fuse for each. 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 8.3.7.3 Two Leg Backbone with Collocated Power Insertion Points One special case is a backbone where the NET-S and NET-C are interrupted at a single point on the backbone creating two power legs. It is still possible to provide power to these two backbone legs using the vessel battery provided that the power insertion point for each leg is at the isolation point between the two legs, as shown in Figure 42. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 96 of 313 2014 NMEA Net-H Net-L Net-S Net-C Shield Over Current Protection (3 or 8 Amp) Common Network Ground To Vessel Battery Positive To DC Main Negative Bus To RF Ground System 2661 2662 Figure 42: Collocated Power Insertion Points Using Battery 2663 2664 2665 Note that just as in the Single Power Leg example, the single battery source can be replaced with a single AC/DC or DC/DC isolated power supply. 8.3.8 Interfaces between the NMEA 2000® backbone and other data interfaces, such as NMEA 0183, NMEA 0183-HS, or RS232, must be provided using NMEA 2000® certified devices intended for that purpose. 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 Interface to NMEA 0183 and Other Networks 8.3.9 General Test and Setup The backbone power shall be energized and network signal and power integrity shall be verified after the installation of the network backbone, all T-connectors and/or barrier strips, and the terminating resistors has been completed. Measure the characteristics identified in Table 27 at each end of the backbone, in the last drop connection before the terminating resistor. If the last drop connection is the power connection, measure the characteristics at the second to last drop connection from the terminator. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 97 of 313 2014 NMEA 2677 Table 27: Test Characteristics Test 1 2 3 Pin / Signal (1) Shield (2) NET-S (4) NET-H (5) NET-L Measurement Resistance between shield and pin (3) NET-C () Voltage between NET-S and pin (3) NET-C (Gnd) Resistance between NET-H and NET-L Nominal Value 0Ω 12 V to 13.84V 60 Ω Tolerance > 0 Ω ≤ 15 Ω ≥ 9 V≤ 15.75 V ≥ 54 Ω≤ 71 Ω 2678 Upon completion, de-energize the network and connect the NMEA 2000® devices. Refer to device manufacturer documentation for specific device initialization or powerup ordering intended to automatically detect and identify certain types of NMEA 2000® devices. Verify that all devices operate in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Optionally, check that the sustained Bus Error Rate (errors/sec) is not more than 1 per second. Bus Error Rate may be obtained from the diagnostic screen of some NMEA 2000® products, or from dedicated NMEA 2000® test tools. 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 8.3.9.1 Instance Configuration Manual device instance configuration may be required on NMEA 2000® backbones that contain more than one device of a given type, or where an interface is provided to more than one tank, battery bank, engine, or environmental control. Table 28 identifies predefined instance assignments that have been established for specific device types, and shall be followed to ensure that instance assignments are uniform across low-cost instrumentation. 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 Table 28: Pre-defined Instance Assignments Device Type Engine Instance 0 1 etc. Definition Single Engine or Dual Engine Port Dual Engine Starboard For more than 2 engines, instances will start with port bow (0) to starboard stern (n) 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 In the absence of a pre-defined instance assignment, instances shall be numbered sequentially from port bow (0) to starboard stern (n), increasing in value from port to starboard, and from bow to stern. 8.3.9.2 Variations of parameter Instancing Certain PGNs created allow for a device to supply a source ID allowing instancing to be configured. This is commonly known as data instancing. Devices may transmit the same PGNs in separate intervals carrying different data measurements. A display can properly define each data type /data source in conjunction with data instance can be defined and stored. This allows for a display to accept multi parameters using one common PGN. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 98 of 313 2014 NMEA 2705 2706 2707 Data instance when transmitted on the NMEA2000 bus should be properly configured from the originating device/node address in order to eliminate parameter instancing conflicts. 2708 2709 Review a devices datasheet prior to connecting to the NMEA2000 bus to verify if a data instance should be assigned. 2710 2711 2712 8.3.10 NMEA 2000 Installation Testing 2713 8.4 2714 NOTE: This section is not intended to be a comprehensive Ethernet installation tutorial. For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 Ethernet Network Interfacing Requirements Ethernet is a low-cost, high-capacity, bi-directional multi-transmitter/multi-receiver network for interconnecting computational devices, and is widely used in non-marine applications. Ethernet standards support a variety of physical media and transmission characteristics that can be made interoperable through proper selection and installation of equipment. This section identifies some recommended practices for installing and connecting Ethernet devices in a marine environment. 8.4.1 General Practices Marine devices connected using Ethernet are typically connected in a star topology, where one or more hubs represent the center of the star, and each device is connected directly to a hub. Figure 43. identifies a minimal Ethernet network and identifies the significant components. 2726 2727 Figure 43: Ethernet Topology 2728 2729 2730 2731 A maximum of 1,024 segments may be connected in any one network, a segment being each connection between a device and the hub, or a connection between two hubs. Networks and cabling installed in accordance with this standard shall be capable of supporting 100BaseT transmissions (See IEEE 802.3). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 99 of 313 2014 NMEA 2732 8.4.1.1 Generalized Topology 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 The star topology described is typically implemented in a general way through the use of multiple hubs, dual speed hubs, and switches. The notion of a star configuration can be maintained when all the interconnecting hubs are grouped together in the center of the star, and network segments that radiate out from the equipment at the center connect all nodes. 2738 2739 2740 The operational differences in equipment used to interconnect nodes are summarized in the following basic definitions. Most commercially available devices are represented by these basic building blocks, or some combination thereof: 2741 2742 2743 Repeater (or hub) – a device that joins two or more networks with the same network protocol and address space. Signals are re-timed and amplified, but repeaters also add latency and reduce the maximum number and length of cables that a signal can traverse. 2744 2745 2746 2747 Bridge – a device that joins two network segments using the same network protocol and address space. Signals are forwarded independent of the originating network. Data rate and physical media may differ on the two sides of a bridge. A bridge may perform message filtering. 2748 2749 Router – a device that joins two networks with the same network protocol. On each side of a router, the address space, data rate and physical media may differ. 2750 2751 2752 Switch – typically a device that incorporates several bridges, allowing the creation of complex networks where the signal timing and cable length of each network segment may be determined independent of the other connected segments. 2753 2754 2755 2756 For example, a dual-speed hub is a combination device that incorporates two repeating hubs, one for each speed supported and a bridge that connects the two repeaters together. The interface connectors are wired to internal logic that automatically senses the speed of the connection and connects the segment to the appropriate hub internally. 2757 8.4.1.2 Multiple Protocols 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 Ethernet is capable of supporting multiple independent protocols over the same network, such as IP, IPX (Novel), and NetBEUI. Protocol identification is contained in the frame header or first few bytes of the data packet, depending on the framing type used. Except for the potential impact on overall throughput and the amount of traffic generated, proprietary and other standard protocols may be intermixed on the same Ethernet network, unless otherwise prohibited by the manufacturer. 8.4.2 Cabling 2765 Cabling and connections shall be in accordance with the following paragraphs. 2766 2767 8.4.2.1 Maximum Operational Cable Length 2768 2769 2770 2771 The maximum length of the network cables is determined by limitations associated with data transmission and detecting those transmissions at each connected device. Ethernet cabling shall be installed so that it meets each of the following limitations: • The maximum length of any network segment shall be 100 meters (See IEE 802.3). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 100 of 313 2014 NMEA • 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 The maximum length between any two nodes, inclusive of any inter-hub segments shall be 400-(R 90) meters, where R is the number of repeaters or hubs that the network passes between the two nodes. Figure 44 illustrates how at least one segment must be shorter than the maximum segment length of 100 meters in a network using more than one hub. Node Node 100m Hub Hub (Repeater) (Repeater) Figure 44: Maximum Operational Length When Two Hubs Are Used 8.4.2.2 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 100m Max length = 400 - (2 x 90) = 220m. 2777 2778 2779 20m Cable Type Segment cables shall be stranded, tinned, 4-pair cables that, as a minimum, meet the requirements of EIA/TIA 568-5, also known as Category 5 or CAT5, CAT5e, or CAT6 cable. (See IEEE 802.3, ISO/IEC 11801 Amendment 2)) 8.4.2.3 2785 2786 Connections All connections between cables and between cables and equipment shall be made using RJ45 style connectors, in accordance with Section 8.4.3. 2787 2788 2789 NOTE: Be sure to use CAT6 connectors with CAT6 cable, CAT5, CAT5e connectors with CAT5 cable. 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 NOTE: Insulation displacement connectors, as found on punch-down blocks (also known as 110 and 66 blocks), shall not be used, as they are known to score the wire even when the wire is properly inserted using a punch-down tool. 8.4.2.4 Shielding Ethernet cable shielding is not required. Shielded cabling is recommended for noisy environments to improve reliability. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 101 of 313 2014 NMEA 2797 8.4.3 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 Connectors Ethernet connectors are typically RJ45 type connectors. Where connections are in locations exposed to moisture, connectors shall be rated IP 67 or higher in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60529. Closure caps shall be provided for any fixed mount connector, so that the requirements of IEC 60529 are still met when the fixed mount connector is not used. 8.4.3.1 Color Coding 2804 2805 2806 When field installing connectors, wiring and signals shall conform to the requirements of EIA/TIA 568A as listed in Figures 45 and 46. .All four pairs shall be terminated at each connector. 2807 2808 Figure 45: EIA/TIA Color Codes for Straight and Crossover Cable Wiring 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 102 of 313 2014 NMEA 2809 2810 2811 NOTE: EIA/TIA 568A and 568B both provide the same pair grouping of pins, and differ only in the color code and Pair ID assigned to Pins 1, 2, 3, and 6. Either standard is correct, maintain the same standard throughout the network. 2812 2813 Figure 46: EIA/TIA Color Codes for Straight and Crossover Cable Pin-outs 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 Crossover cables are used to connect hubs and switches without an available crossover port and to connect two computers without an intervening hub. Crossover cables may be created by connecting a connector at one end in accordance with EIA/TIA 568A and the other end in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B. Crossover cables shall be clearly marked as such within 12 inches (300 mm) of each end. 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 8.4.3.2 Connector Assembly General guidance for installing crimp-on RJ45 connectors in the field is provided in this section. RJ45 connectors are available for both flat and round cables, and for both solid and stranded wire. Ensure that the RJ45 connector to be installed is rated for stranded wire, and matches the cable cross-section, flat or round, before proceeding. Figure 47. illustrates the correct procedure for preparing the cable and crimping the connector, including typical strip dimensions. Refer to manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on attaching a waterproof back-shell when required. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 103 of 313 2014 NMEA Pin 1 1) Remove approximately 1" of the cable jacket. 1/2" 2) Untwist each pair, and straighten wires between fingers. 3) Rearrange wires in order of 568 A or 568 B identified above. Pin 8 4) Cut wires at a perfect right angle to cable, 1/2" from jacket. 5) Insert wires into connector, pins facing up. 3/16" 6) Push wires until fully inserted, cable jacket should penetrate connector 3/16". 7) Use a crimp tool to compress pins into wires and capture cable jacket in connector. 2827 2828 Figure 47: Installation of RJ45 Connector 2829 2830 2831 2832 NOTE: 2833 8.4.4 2834 2835 2836 2837 There are high quality crimping tools that allow you to install the eight conductors in any RJ plug, and slide them completely through the connector, thereby allowing the installer to ensure the colors were placed into the right slot before crimping. There are also connection tools for Cat6 and Cat7. Power Requirements Individual Ethernet interface circuits are not powered separately from the connected devices; the devices themselves provide all transmission power. Accordingly, no overcurrent protection is required for Ethernet circuits. 8.4.4.1 Power over Ethernet 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 Power over Ethernet (POE) is a means of utilizing the spare pairs in an Ethernet cable to distribute power to connected hubs or other devices in remote locations. Devices supporting POE may be utilized, provided that they conform to IEEE 802.3-2005, Section 33, Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Power via Media Dependent Interface (MDI). Devices conforming to IEEE 802.3-2005, Section 33 use two pairs of a four pair cable to provide a maximum of 350 mA at 48 volts DC. 2844 2845 2846 NOTE: Lack of standardization in legacy equipment resulted in multiple, incompatible, implementations of POE. Be sure that all POE equipment conforms to the same standard before interconnecting them. 2847 8.4.5 2848 2849 Ethernet Network Planning Network planning involves verifying that the network cabling, interconnecting hubs, and connected devices can be installed in their intended locations while still meeting all 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 104 of 313 2014 NMEA 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 the applicable requirements. Manufacturers of Ethernet products ensure that the transmission characteristics of their products are within the operational bounds established by specification. The installer is responsible for ensuring that equipment is interconnected in a manner that the combined performance also falls within those operational bounds. 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 The overriding consideration is to ensure that signals transmitted propagate to their destination within a specific time frame. Since signal propagation is based on transmission characteristics established by specification, the cable length and cable type determine the delay in any single network segment. However, network planning is made more complicated in the general case by the flexibility to repeat and/or retransmit data to multiple segments within the bounds of the same network. 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 Computers that are interconnected so that they receive all the signals as they are transmitted are said to belong to the same Collision Domain, because each computer is affected by any and all computers that attempt a transmission concurrently, resulting in a collision and lost messages. All computers in the same Collision Domain must be within range so that the signal can travel to and return from any other computer in the same Collision Domain within the specified time frame. The round-trip distance that a message can travel within the required time frame is known as the network diameter, and may span multiple segments and hubs. 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 NOTE: While the propagation characteristics of a 100BaseT and a 10BaseT network are the same, as determined by the type of cable (CAT5) used, the time frame for detecting collisions in a 100BaseT network is shorter than a 10BaseT network due to the higher throughput and shorter message duration used in 100BaseT. This results in a smaller network diameter and is the reason that 10BaseT design guidelines, such as the “5-4-3 rule,” are inappropriate for 100BaseT networks. 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 8.4.5.1 Choosing Interconnection Devices Generally, hubs, switches, or a combination of each will be used to interconnect Ethernet segments. The difference between a hub and a switch is shown Figure 48, which compares the Collision Domains created by each configuration. A hub simply boosts the signal as it passes from one segment to the other regardless of any other traffic that may exist, extending the Collision Domain and also the network diameter. A switch receives the complete message into a buffer and does not relay the message to the next segment unless the segment is idle. In this way, the switch separates the traffic into two separate Collision Domains. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 105 of 313 2014 NMEA Single Collision Domain Node Node Hub (Repeater) Node Node Switch (Bridge) Independant Collision Domains 2884 2885 2886 Figure 48: Hub vs. Switch 2887 2888 2889 Benefits of using hubs and/or switches are listed in Table 29, which identifies the advantage or disadvantage of using a hub or switch for a number of operational characteristics. 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 The disadvantage of a switch can be illustrated by adding a network analyzer to the hub and the switch in Figure 48. When connected to the hub, the analyzer becomes part of the same Collision Domain as the nodes, and can receive all traffic originated by either node. When connected to the switch, the analyzer creates its own Collision Domain and can only receive traffic directed to that Collision Domain; any problems being experienced between the nodes in the network go undetected. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 106 of 313 2014 NMEA 2897 Table 29: Characteristics of Hubs vs. Switches 2898 Characteristic Bandwidth Utilization Hub Shared by all nodes Network Diameter Switch Max bandwidth available to each node Unlimited segments with full 100 meter length Each hub reduces the maximum allowed network diameter by up to 90 meters Troubleshooting Visibility All traffic visible to analyzer No traffic visible to analyzer connected to any port (Note 1) Cost Low Moderate Note 1: Managed switches typically provide the ability to mirror traffic from any one port to another designated port; these switches are usually more expensive. 2899 8.4.5.2 Equipment Locations 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 Once the overall topology is developed and the equipment for interconnecting the segments in the topology is determined, the locations for the nodes and the interconnecting hubs or switches are planned. In order to provide ease for troubleshooting later, all interconnecting equipment should be located in close proximity to one another. 2905 2906 Interconnecting equipment shall be located in a closed area, away from environmental hazards. 2907 NOTE: 2908 Depending on the vessel type and size, the closed area may be a location under the helm, or a climate controlled compartment below deck. 2909 Multiple Ethernet Networks 8.4.5.3 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 Multiple Ethernet networks may be used to segregate traffic from different applications in order to preserve security, to reserve sufficient capacity to ensure reliable performance, or to maintain clear administrative bounds for systems employing independent resources. VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks) are where a router can manage a whole series of Virtual LANs, thus removing the need to physically install multiple LANs. These types of routers are more expensive but becoming the norm for larger more complex installations. Situations where independent networks should be installed with no interconnection between them are discussed below. 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 Security - System security goes beyond protecting resources from unauthorized access – it also includes protecting equipment and software from unintended configuration changes or modifications due to malicious software that is readily distributed via the Internet and other communications means. Such software may affect the performance of equipment critical to vessel safety, or even render it unusable under certain circumstances. Independent networks are used to isolate safety-critical applications from other applications in order to preclude the ability for malicious software to gain access to those systems. 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 Continuous video or audio streaming - As the number of video or audio sources that are expected to be continuously operational grows, so does the bandwidth required to support them. Homogeneous networks that combine streaming traffic with other traffic are subject to conflicts between the traffic priorities and limitations on processing required to forward traffic at each hub and switch. Many routers now have Quality of 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 107 of 313 2014 NMEA 2931 2932 2933 2934 Service (QoS) where you can set a certain "guaranteed bandwidth" to some services such as VoIP or ensure they do not take more than a certain level of bandwidth. The most direct method however is to segregate the high bandwidth traffic from the remaining traffic. 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 Independent administration - Applications involving multiple computers or displays using a network may be administered by different organizations. For example, navigation information sources such as radars and GPS, their displays, and other applications may be installed and administered by a dealer with specific experience with navigation systems. Such systems should be configured and remain in their installed configuration without modification while the vessel is in operation. 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 The remaining networked computers may be used for a variety of applications, including Internet communications, voyage management, or vessel accounting. Such systems are likely to be administered by the owner, or by an agent of the owner that specializes in accounting or voyage management applications, and are likely to be updated on a continuous basis, even while the vessel is in operation. 2946 2947 2948 2949 Since the operation and reliability of each of these different applications is the responsibility of different organizations, their networks should be independent of one another. 2950 8.4.5.4 Network Diagram 2951 2952 2953 A network diagram shall be prepared and provided to the vessel owner on completion of installation and testing. The diagram should contain the following information, as appropriate for the installation and protocols employed: 2954 • The location and model of each hub or switch used to interconnect network segments 2955 • The addresses, if any, assigned to any equipment connected to the network 2956 • The location and configuration information for any routers or wireless access points 2957 • Any provisions for future network connections 2958 8.4.6 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 Advanced Network Planning Advanced network planning involves consideration for the higher-level protocols to be transmitted over the Ethernet network. Manufacturer documentation should be consulted to determine what protocols might be in use between any specific equipment. One protocol that is gaining in popularity for marine applications is Internet Protocol (IP) 8.4.6.1 Internet Protocol Planning Planning for IP based communications on an Ethernet network involves determining the configuration parameters for each node, and how each node receives its parameters. The configuration parameters that must be considered by all nodes are listed in Table 30. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 108 of 313 2014 NMEA 2970 2971 Table 300: Internet Protocol Configuration Parameters Parameter IP Address Address Mask Default Gateway DHCP Server DNS Server Description Unique address that identifies each node on the network Numeric value that determines what addresses are reachable on the local network, and what addresses are reached via the default gateway Address, typically of a router, which can be used to reach addresses not on the local network – for example, addresses on the Internet (Dynamic Host Control Protocol) A flag that identifies whether the node should attempt to get configuration parameters from a designated node on the local network (Domain Name System) The address of a node that can provide mappings between node names and node addresses 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 The IP address and address mask are two parameters that are critical to the proper operation of the network. IP addresses must be unique, and all nodes on the network must be using the same address mask. The Default Gateway and DNS Server may not be required unless provision is made for communicating with some other network. 2977 2978 There are several methods for ensuring that each node is supplied with the correct parameters, including: 2979 • Default address assignments programmed into each node 2980 • Manual configuration of address assignments to each node (Static IP). 2981 2982 • Automatic configuration of address assignments through random selection and conflict negotiation (Ad-Hoc). 2983 • Automatic configuration of address assignments using DHCP 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 In many cases where the networked nodes are all from one manufacturer, default address assignments may be provided by the manufacturer and programmed directly into the equipment. For example, the address assigned to a particular model GPS may be 192.168.100.1 and the address assigned to a particular model radar may be 192.168.100.2. When these two devices are connected to a network and powered on, they will begin to communicate using the default addresses programmed into them. As long as not more than one device of each type is connected to the network, the addresses will be unique and communication will occur. 2992 2993 2994 2995 When a network is planned to have equipment from multiple manufacturers, the default addresses and masks may conflict between the two manufacturers. Please refer to manufacturer-specific documentation connecting to manufacturer's "closed" Ethernet systems. 2996 2997 2998 2999 On larger networks, IP address administration can be simplified using a DHCP server and setting each node to query the DHCP server for IP configuration information. Many devices come with DHCP servers built in and configured to operate automatically on power-up. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 109 of 313 2014 NMEA 3000 3001 3002 3003 NOTE: Multiple DHCP servers operating on the same network may try to assign the same address to more than one node. Installers shall disable all DHCP servers not being actively used. 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 If you connect a computer to a network and the IP address that the computer has is 169.x.x.x then this is a self-assigned address that the computer gave itself when it could not get an IP address by DHCP. Also if the address is 0.0.0.0 then this indicates that for some reason the specific computer does not have an IP address. This issue is a common indicator of network problems. 3009 8.4.6.2 IP Address Allocation 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 IP addresses are represented by a 32-bit number, which means that there are a total of more than four billion IP addresses available for assignment. Several address ranges have been reserved for specific functions, and three address ranges have been set aside for local network use. The remaining addresses are administered by international organizations that ensure that no address is ever assigned to more than one user. 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 Because arbitrary addresses in the range from 0 to 4+ million are difficult to remember and group, IP addresses are typically represented in a format called the dotted quad. A dotted quad is represented as four numbers separated by dots (as in 1.2.3.4). Each number in the dotted quad represents 8 of the 32 bits in an IP address. An 8-bit number can take the values from 0 to 255, so each value in the dotted quad can be represented in the range from 0 to 255. 3021 3022 3023 3024 When manual or DHCP configuration of addresses is required, IP addresses shall be chosen from one of the following three ranges of address. These addresses have been set aside for use by local networks and will not cause conflicts if the local network is ever connected to the Internet. 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 3025 3026 3027 16+ million available addresses, address mask 255.0.0.0 1+ million available addresses, address mask 255.240.0.0 65,536 available addresses, address mask 255.255.0.0 Assign addresses to all equipment to be connected to the network using the following procedure to enter equipment and address information, as shown in the address assignment sheet in Table 31. 3028 1. Pick an address range and subnet mask from the previous table. 3029 2. List all equipment in the left-hand column that requires an IP address. 3030 3031 3032 3. Pick a starting address from within the address range chosen, and enter addresses in the IP address column, using the starting address for the first equipment and numbering consecutively thereafter. 3033 3034 3035 3036 4. The remaining columns can be used to enter Default Gateway and DNS addresses that may be required to access the Internet via a router. If provided, the gateway address should be within the same range as chosen in Step 1, and no other equipment should have that address. 3037 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 110 of 313 2014 NMEA 3038 Table 31: IP Address Assignment sheet 3039 Equipment Radar GPS Voyage Data Recorder Satellite Tracking IP Address 192.168.1.100 192.168.1.101 192.168.1.102 192.168.1.103 Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway DNS DNS 3040 3041 3042 8.4.6.3 Web-Based Configuration 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 Many multi-functional devices are now being shipped with a means of configuring the device using a standard Web browser. Typically, the device requires a network connection for normal operation, so the addition of a Web-based configuration capability can be provided with no or, at most, a small incremental investment in hardware. 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 There is no current standard for the default IP address programmed into a particular device for access to its Web-based configuration tool. The arbitrary nature of assignment makes it likely that the equipment will not work in any given network without first being configured to work in that network. These devices can be configured by first connecting them individually to a laptop configured to communicate with the device and then using the Web-based configuration capability to reconfigure the device with an address and mask suitable for use on the local network. Specific steps are listed below: 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 1. Choose a convenient location to begin installing your router such as an open floor space or table. This does not need to be the permanent location of the device. Particularly for wireless routers, you may find it necessary to re-position the unit after installing it as the cables / signals may not reach all areas needed. At the beginning, it’s better to choose a location where it's easiest to work with the router and worry about final placement later. 3062 3063 2. Plug in the router's electrical power source, and then turn on the router by pushing the power button. 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3. (Optional) Connect your Internet modem to the router. Most network modems connect via an Ethernet cable but USB connections are becoming increasingly common. The cable plugs into the router jack named "WAN" or "uplink" or "Internet." After connecting the cable, be sure to power cycle (turn off and turn back on) the modem to ensure the router recognizes it. 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 4. Connect one computer to the router. Even if the router is a wireless model, connect this first computer to the router via a network cable. Using a cable during router installation ensures the maximum reliability of the equipment. Once a wireless router installation is complete, the computer can be changed over to a wireless connection if desired. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 111 of 313 DHCP 2014 NMEA 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 5. Open the router's administration tool. From the computer connected to the router, first open your Web browser. Then enter the router's address for network administration in the Web address field and hit return to reach the router's home page. 3083 3084 3085 3086 6. Log in to the router. The router's home page will ask you for a username and password. Both are provided in the router's documentation. You should change the router's password for security reasons, but do this after the installation is complete to avoid unnecessary complications during the basic setup. 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 7. If you want your router to connect to the Internet, you must enter Internet connection information into that section of the router's configuration (exact location varies). If using DSL Internet, you may need to enter the PPOE username and password. Likewise, if you have been issued a static IP address by your provider (you would need to have requested it), the static IP fields (including network mask and gateway) given to you by the provider must also must be set in the router. 3094 3095 3096 8. If you were using a primary computer or an older network router to connect to the Internet, your provider may require you to update the MAC address of the router with the MAC address of the device you were using previously. 3097 3098 3099 9. If this is a wireless router, change the network name (often called SSID). While the router comes to you with a network name set at the factory, you will never want to use this name on your network. 3100 3101 3102 10. Verify the network connection is working between your one computer and the router. To do this, you must confirm that the computer has received IP address information from the router. 3103 3104 3105 11. (If applicable) Verify your one computer can connect to the Internet properly. Open your Web browser and visit a few Internet sites such as http://compnetworking.about.com/. 3106 3107 12. Connect additional computers to the router as needed. If connecting wirelessly, ensure the network name (SSID) of each is computer matches that of the router. 3108 3109 13. Finally, configure additional network security features as desired to guard your systems against Internet attackers. 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 Many routers are reached by either the Web address "http://192.168.1.1" or "http://192.168.0.1" Consult your router's documentation to determine the exact address for your model. Note that you do not need a working Internet connection for this step. 8.4.6.4 Wireless Networks Wireless networks provide a means to extend the physical cabled network to mobile devices or devices otherwise unreachable with a physical cable. A variety of technologies are available under the general umbrella of IEEE 802.11 compatible devices. Wireless access points shall be configured to use WPA or higher security settings. Security settings including encryption codes shall be documented and provided to the vessel owner. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 112 of 313 2014 NMEA 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 NOTE: Wireless standards continue to advance in order to provide new capabilities and greater security, such as Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) for better encryption and Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for creating multiple wireless access points. Older equipment may be incompatible with the new standards and may not inter-operate when the new functions are enabled. 8.4.6.5 3123 3124 3125 The requirements provided herein are intended to cover a majority of installation scenarios encountered in the field. Additional information and training may be required for Ethernet networks that include any of the following options: • • • • 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 Other Considerations 8.4.7 Multiple Wireless Access Points Fiber Optic Segments Redundant Loops & Spanning Tree Algorithms Sub netting Ethernet Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 113 of 313 2014 NMEA 3133 9 ANTENNA INSTALLATION 3134 3135 3136 3137 This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of antennas used to receive or radiate signals associated with radio equipment and their respective systems. The information provided is intended to produce structurally sound installations with minimum interference between RF signal sources and receivers. 3138 3139 Additional information on specific antenna installations is detailed in the following sections: 3140 • Satellite Compass Antennas- Section 13 3141 • Radar Antennas- Section 14 3142 • VHF Antennas Section 17 3143 • SSB Antennas- Section 17 3144 • AIS Antennas- Section 19 3145 • Satellite Communications- Section 20 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 9.1 General Considerations Antennas installed in accordance with these standards shall meet the requirements identified in this section. Table 32 identifies RF applications requiring antenna installation, and describes the application use and signal direction; transmit and/or receive. Table 32: Antenna Types 3153 Type Description Signal Direction VHF Communication T/R GPS Navigation R Satellite Communication Communication T/R Satellite TV Entertainment R Cellular Communication T/R SSB Communication T/R DGPS Navigation R Radar Collision Avoidance T/R AM/FM Entertainment R AIS Vessel Tracking T/R Navtex Information R ADF Direction Finding R Mini-M Communication T/R Signal Direction Key: R = Receive only T/R = Transmit and Receive 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 114 of 313 2014 NMEA 3154 9.1.1 3155 3156 3157 Coaxial cables used to connect each antenna with its intended electronic device shall be installed in accordance with Section 7, Coaxial Cables. 9.2 3158 3159 3160 Installation Requirements Antennas shall be installed in accordance with the requirements specified in the following paragraphs. 9.2.1 3161 3162 3163 3164 Transmission Lines Arrangement Antennas shall be installed for a clear, unobstructed operating environment with maximum spacing between adjacent antennas. Specific separation and mounting relationship requirements identified in the following paragraphs shall be observed 9.2.1.1 3165 3166 Location Location of antennas shall be determined by specific manufacturer’s requirements with the following criteria and priority: 3167 3168 • GPS / DGPS Antennas – installed with a clear view to the sky, with as little obstruction as possible. 3169 3170 • Satellite TV Antennas – installed with a clear view to the sky, with as little obstruction as possible. 3171 3172 3173 • Wind / Weather Antennas – installed with a clear view to the sky, with as little 360 degree horizontal obstruction as possible so wind readings will not be compromised by other nearby on-board structures. 3174 3175 3176 • VHF / AIS Antennas-installed with a clear view of the horizon and as elevated and free as possible. Optimal mounting for sailboat VHF installations is at the top of the mast. 3177 3178 • SSB Antennas – installed as far away as possible from any receive antennas, such as a differential beacon. 3179 3180 • Radar Antennas – With as clear a view forward as possible, some shadowing aft is permissible. 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 9.2.1.2 Minimum Spacing The minimum spacing between antenna types mounted in the same horizontal plane, as identified in Tables 33 & 34, shall be observed. The table lists different antenna types across the top and down the side. The minimum spacing, in feet, is identified in the cell where the row and column of the types to be separated intersects. 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 Table 33: Minimum Antenna Horizontal Spacing in Feet 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 115 of 313 2014 NMEA 3192 3193 Intersecting cells identify minimum spacing between antennas of given types in feet and/or reference to table notes. VHF /AIS GPS Differential SSB RADAR Sat. Comm Cell Phone Sat. TV ADF 3194 3195 3196 3197 VHF/AIS GPS Differential SSB 4 3 1 3 2 6 2 3 6 3 /2 1 4 (a) 6 (e) 5 (c) 3 1 1 1 1 /2 4 2 10 1 1 1 3 4 4 10 2 6 2 4 6 1 Radar Sat-Com Cell Sat TV ADF 2 (a) 3 3 (b) 6 (a) 4 (d) 4 6 6 (e) 10 6 6 6 6 6 10 2 5 (c) 1 2 (a) 6 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 4 (d) 6 4 4 4 6 1 1 6 4 10 4 4 4 Table 34: Minimum Antenna Horizontal Spacing in Meters Intersecting cells identify minimum spacing between antennas of given types in feet and/or reference to table notes. VHF/AIS GPS Differential SSB Radar Sat-Com Cell Sat TV ADF 1.2m 92cm 30.5cm 92cm 61cm 1.8m 1.2m 61cm 1.8m VHF /AIS 92cm 15cm 30.5cm 1.2m (a) 1.8m(e) 92cm 1.5m(c) 30.5cm GPS 30.5cm 30.5cm 15cm 1.2m 92cm 10 30.5cm 30.5cm 30.5cm Differential 92cm 1.2m 1.2m 3m 92cm 1.8m 92cm 61cm 1.8m SSB 61cm (a) 61cm 61cm (b) 1.8m 61cm (a) 1.2m RADAR 1.8m 1.8m(e) 10 1.8m 1.8m 1.8m 1.8m 1.8m 1.8m Sat. Comm 61cm 1.5m(c) 30.5cm 61cm (a) 1.8m 61cm 92cm 1.2m Cell Phone 92cm 92cm 30.5cm 1.2m 1.2m(d) 1.8m 92cm 1.2m 1.2m Sat. TV 1.8m 30.5cm 30.5cm 1.8m 1.2m 3m 1.8m 1.2m 1.2m ADF 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 Notes: 3211 3212 3213 NOTE: Figure 49 below shows a professional antenna installation. Note that all antenna installations are a compromise based on vessel type and available mounting space (a) GPS antennas, satellite TV antennas, and/or cell phone antennas shall not be installed in the direct beam of a radar antenna. The GPS antenna shall be raised above or mounted below the radar transmit beam. (b) Radar antennas shall not be installed at the same vertical height as another radar antenna. Sufficient vertical spacing shall be provided to ensure that the transmitting antenna of the radar is separated by a minimum of 18 inches (45 cm) in height from another radar. (c) Cell phone transmission can interfere with GPS reception if the cell phone transmit antenna is in proximity to the GPS receiving antenna. (d) Spacing of satellite TV antennas from radar antennas will depend on output power of the radar. Higher output radars (6 kW, 10kW, 25 kW) require greater spacing to avoid interference. (e) GPS antennas shall be mounted below the transmitted beam of SATCOM antennas. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 116 of 313 2014 NMEA 3214 3215 3216 3217 Figure 49: Typical Antenna Installation 9.2.2 Antenna Support 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 Antenna mounting hardware shall be through bolted or screwed into supporting structures of sufficient strength for the intended use. Support structures and hardware shall be of sufficient material to withstand 10 pounds (5kg) of force applied 24 inches (60 cm) from the mount in the fore-aft and side-to-side axes. This can easily be tested with a rope and portable scale. Backing plates or other means of strengthening decks, cabin walls, or other structures should be used to ensure sufficient strength when existing structures are inadequate. 3225 3226 Mounting and cable feed-through holes shall be adequately sealed to prevent water intrusion. 3227 9.2.2.1 Multipoint Mounting 3228 3229 Antennas of 8 feet (2.4 m) or less may be mounted with a single freestanding base mount of either fixed or ratchet type construction. 3230 3231 3232 Antennas greater than 8 feet (2.4 m) in length, and antennas employing extensions greater than 4 feet (1.2 m) in length, shall be provided with an upper support bracket installed a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) above the base mount. 3233 3234 3235 3236 9.2.3 Antenna Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 117 of 313 2014 NMEA 3237 10 3238 3239 DISPLAY INSTALLATIONS This section identifies recommended standards and practices for locating and installing electronic displays. These include, but bare not limited to the following: 3240 • Stand Alone displays (Fish finder, Radar etc.) 3241 • Multi-Function Displays 3242 • Touchscreen displays 3243 • Computer displays 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 The information provided is intended to produce structurally sound installations, protected from the elements when required, that are easy to operate and maintain. 10.1 General Considerations Onboard electronic displays installed in accordance with these standards shall meet the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. Onboard displays include both primary displays used for navigation and secondary displays used to monitor and control onboard functions and equipment. 10.1.1 Visibility 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 Equipment mounted at the helm station shall be adequately visible to allow use of all functions of the equipment under all lighting conditions. All displays that employ separate backlighting connections shall be connected to an appropriate lighting circuit. In mounting locations that are not fully enclosed, the installer shall, within the limitations of display technology, ensure that the equipment can be seen for all primary functions with direct sunlight on the display. 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 Care should be taken when selecting a mounting location to ensure that the operator’s line of sight and/or field of vision ensures visibility of any display fitted with a polarizing filter. Many polarized corrective lenses and sunglasses may create a condition at certain viewing angles to a screen fitted with a polarizing filter that “blacks out” the display, rendering it partially or completely invisible. The viewing angle of any display thus fitted should be adjusted by the installer and checked for visibility with polarized lenses 3265 3266 Visibility improvements shall be implemented as required through the use of mounting wedges, brackets, and hoods. 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 10.1.2 Accessibility All displays with integral controls shall be mounted so that the controls may be operated with one hand, while the other hand may be used to grasp a handrail or wheel. Primary navigation equipment, identified in the following list, shall be installed in a manner that permits normal operation of the electronics equipment controls without the user having to leave the helm or other normal watch keeping position. • • • • • VHF Radio (primary) MFD GPS Radar Chart plotter 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 118 of 313 2014 NMEA • • 3278 3279 3280 10.1.3 Touchscreen Displays 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 Touch screens can be affected by water, oil, or grease. This has the potential to not see where you touch the display, which could lead you to activate another point on the display. If a capacitive display is installed in an area where it will be getting wet, you will want to make sure the touch screen portion can be shut off and that it also has hard keys so you can still have functionality of the display. 10.1.4 Serviceability 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 Depth sounder/Fish finder Autopilot Displays shall be mounted so that any display may be serviced without requiring more than one additional piece of equipment to be removed in addition to the display being serviced. Sufficient cable shall be provided behind equipment displays to allow the equipment to be fully removed from the mounting location and operated for service. 10.2 Installation Displays shall be installed in accordance with the following paragraphs. 10.2.1 Mounting 3295 3296 3297 3298 Displays shall be mounted using hardware fasteners and brackets appropriate for the installation. All sealing gaskets supplied with the equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Custom brackets may be used instead of or in addition to manufacturer-provided hardware to secure equipment displays. 3299 3300 Display cases shall not be permanently modified to preclude equipment replacement under warranty. 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 NOTE: Check with manufacturers temperature specifications and make sure the mounting location does not exceed the operating temperatures. 10.2.1.1 Flush Mount Display Installations Flush Mount Displays shall be installed in accordance with the following bullets and as illustrated in Figure 50. 3306 • Confirm layout before cutting & drilling holes 3307 • Use supplied mounting hardware & gaskets when applicable 3308 • Marine-Grade silicone (Not 5200) can also be used as a gasket 3309 • Provide service loops in cabling for equipment removal 3310 • Allow space for proper ventilation 3311 • Allow for manufacturer’s compass safe distance 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 119 of 313 2014 NMEA 3312 3313 3314 Figure 50: Flush-Mount Display Installation Steps 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 120 of 313 2014 NMEA 3315 3316 3317 10.2.1.2 Bracket Mount Display Installations Bracket Mount Displays shall be installed in accordance with the following bullets and as illustrated in Figure 51. 3318 • .Confirm layout before cutting & drilling holes 3319 • Use supplied mounting hardware where applicable 3320 • Thru-bolt display brackets when applicable 3321 • Leave room behind display for connections and display removal 3322 • Provide service loops in cabling for equipment removal 3323 3324 • Seal all cable entrances into the dash using marine-grade silicone (Do not use a permanent bonding agent) 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 Figure 51: Bracket-Mount Display Installation Steps 10.2.1.3 Cored Construction Where mounting locations involve cutting into hulls or decks with cored construction, the core material shall be protected by removing the core in the area surrounding the mounting location and replacing the core with a solid plug of fiberglass or epoxy. When the plug has cured, mounting holes may be drilled in the plug material. 10.2.2 Environmental Protection Displays shall be mounted in a manner that prevents direct water exposure during normal operation of the boat, unless the specifications guarantee the display as fully waterproof. Waterproof displays installed in exposed locations shall have all exposed 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 121 of 313 2014 NMEA 3336 3337 3338 connectors protected from direct water spray through the use of properly fitted rubber boots or dummy connectors. 10.2.3 Cabinets and Enclosures 3339 3340 3341 3342 Cabinets and enclosures used to protect equipment shall be of sufficient volume to provide air circulation for cooling behind the equipment displays. If the equipment displays include the use of an internal cooling fan, provision shall be made for air to be exchanged externally from the cabinet or enclosure. 3343 3344 3345 A drain hole shall be made in sealed electronic boxes located in exposed locations to prevent the accumulation of water that may leak into the electronics box and to allow water to drain out and away from the electronic equipment and associated wiring. 3346 3347 A small bead of silicone may be used as a sealant to prevent water from leaking into the cabinet or enclosure from around the mounting surface of flush-mounted displays. 3348 3349 NOTE: Silicone sealant or other such sealant/adhesive shall not be used as the only means of mechanically fixing a display to a mounting surface. 3350 10.2.4 Marking 3351 3352 At the completion of display installation, best installation practice is that all connected cables shall be labeled with the following information: 3353 1. Equipment Name 3354 2. Equipment Model 3355 3. Connection Function 3356 3357 3358 In addition, display locations that include displays and equipment that are not guaranteed waterproof, and where the location may be inadvertently exposed to water by leaving access doors open, shall be clearly labeled as follows: EQUIPMENT NOT WATERPROOF! DO NOT EXPOSE TO DIRECT WATER SPRAY. 3359 3360 3361 3362 10.2.5 Display Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 122 of 313 2014 NMEA 3363 11 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 BLACK BOX INSTALLATIONS This section identifies recommended standards and practices for locating and installing black box sensors. The information provided is intended to produce structurally sound installations, protected from the elements when required, that are easy to operate and maintain. 11.1 3369 General Considerations Examples of Black box sensors include, but are not limited to the following: 3370 • Fish finder transceiver boxes 3371 • Autopilot Course Computer boxes 3372 • NMEA 0183 / NMEA 2000 Interface boxes 3373 • Radar processor boxes 3374 3375 • AIS Receiver boxes 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 11.2 Installation Sensor boxes shall be installed in accordance with the following paragraphs. 11.2.1 Mounting Location & Orientation Most sensor boxes can be mounted on a bulkhead wall, desktop, or deck. Sensor boxes shall be mounted in a central location where all required cables necessary for connection to the box can be reasonably routed. 3382 • Mount all boxes using manufacturer-supplied hardware 3383 3384 • All sealing gaskets supplied with the equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3385 3386 3387 • The preferred mounting orientation is on a vertical surface, where all cable exits are facing downward, if there is only one side of the box that has cable exits. .(See Figure XX) 3388 3389 • If the box has 2 sides with cable exits, the preferred mounting method is to have the cables exiting the sides or side/bottom of the box.(See Figure XX) 3390 3391 • Mount boxes where the path for running the required electrical cabling is reasonably direct; keep in mind the different cable lengths. 3392 3393 • Leave slack, including service loops in cables for maintenance and servicing ease 3394 3395 • Mount where the status indicator on the box can be observed for system testing and troubleshooting. 3396 • Mount all black boxes in a dry location, above bilge water levels. 3397 • Locate all black boxes away from exhaust pipes and vents. 3398 3399 • The mounting location should be well ventilated, and the temperature and humidity should be moderate and stable. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 123 of 313 2014 NMEA 3400 • Mount the unit where shock and vibration are minimal. 3401 3402 • Keep the unit away from electromagnetic field-generating equipment such as motors and generators. 3403 3404 • Observe the compass safe distances noted in the safety instructions to prevent disturbance to the magnetic compass. 3405 3406 3407 NOTE: Check with manufacturers temperature specifications and make sure the mounting location does not exceed the operating temperatures. 3408 3409 3410 NOTE: When possible, do not mount black boxes with cables exiting the top of the box, as this could cause water intrusion. 3411 3412 3413 3414 Figure 52: Black box cable routing when mounted vertically 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 11.2.2 Serviceability Boxes shall be mounted so that they may be easily serviced. Sufficient cable lengths including service loops shall be provided at all cable connection points to allow the equipment to be fully removed from the mounting location and be operated for service. 11.2.3 Environmental Protection Black boxes shall be mounted in a manner that prevents direct water exposure during normal operation of the boat, unless the specifications guarantee the box as fully waterproof. Waterproof black boxes installed in exposed locations shall have all exposed connectors protected from direct water spray through the use of properly fitted rubber boots or dummy connectors. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 124 of 313 2014 NMEA 3427 3428 NOTE: Silicone sealant or other such sealant/adhesive shall not be used as the only means of mechanically fixing a sensor box to a mounting surface. 3429 11.2.4 Cable Marking 3430 3431 At the completion of installation, best installation practice is that all connected cables shall be labeled with the following information: 3432 • Equipment Name 3433 • Equipment Model 3434 • Connection Function 3435 3436 3437 In addition, mounting locations that include black boxes and equipment that are not guaranteed waterproof, and where the location may be inadvertently exposed to water by leaving access doors open, shall be clearly labeled as follows: EQUIPMENT NOT WATERPROOF! DO NOT EXPOSE TO DIRECT WATER SPRAY. 3438 3439 3440 3441 11.2.5 Black Box Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 125 of 313 2014 NMEA 3442 12 3443 3444 3445 3446 TRANSDUCER INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for the installation of transducers used with depth sounders and fish finders. General guidance is provided for selecting transducers appropriate for the intended application, and installation requirements are identified that maximize transducer performance. 3447 3448 NOTE: The installation steps within this section may also apply to the installation of Underwater Lights. Refer to manufacturer specific instructions for more details. 3449 12.1 3450 3451 3452 General Considerations Transducers installed in accordance with these standards shall be selected and located in accordance with the criteria identified in the following paragraphs. 12.1.1 Transducer Types and Construction 3453 3454 3455 This section applies to a wide variety of transducers used for depth, speed, and temperature measurement of the water surrounding a vessel’s hull. Transducer types include the following: 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 Depth Transducer – A device that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy or sound. It is intended to operate as part of an echo sounder system and is generally a piezoelectric crystal that resonates at a specific frequency, expressed in kilohertz (kHz). The transducer is a two-way device – it converts electrical energy at its resonant frequency into mechanical energy (during transmission) and turns received mechanical energy (during reception) into electrical signals. The transducer is connected to the depth sounder display, black box, or MFD by a wire connection. This connection may or may not have a manufacturer specific connector 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 Multi-Frequency Transducer (AKA Dual Frequency) – A transducer that is capable of operating at more than one frequency (e.g., 50 kHz and 200 kHz). This is accomplished either by using a single crystal element that resonates in both the thickness and radial mode or by including separate elements or an array of elements for each frequency in a single housing. 3469 3470 3471 3472 Broadband / CHIRP Transducer A transducer that is capable of operating at a multitude of frequencies as specified by the transducer manufacturer. This transducer usually includes two separate elements or an array of elements for each frequency band in either a single housing or two separate housings. 3473 3474 3475 3476 Speed/Temp Sensor – A device that contains two independent sensing devices. The first is designed to generate electrical pulses at a rate proportional to the speed of the boat through the water. The second is electrically related to the temperature of the water. (Possibly consider rewriting this entire paragraph for clarity) 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 Combination Transducer or Triducer® Multisensor – A transducer that contains a depth transducer with a speed and temperature sensor, all-in-one mechanical housing. The electronics for the speed/temp sensor may be permanently mounted in the transducer housing or may be contained in a retractable insert within the housing design. 3482 3483 3484 Integrated Transducer (AKA Smart Transducer) – A transducer that contains integrated electronics in order to provide a standard digital signal at its output. Signals will typically conform to either NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® communication 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 126 of 313 2014 NMEA 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 standards. Integrated Transducers process the depth, speed and temperature information, and transmit numeric data via the noted protocols for the instrument to display. 12.1.2 Transducer Configurations Transducers are generally constructed to be mounted in one of the three following configurations: 12.1.2.1 Transom Mount Transom mount transducers are mounted to the exterior of the transom of the vessel; only a signal cable penetrates the hull, generally above the waterline. Figure 53: Transom-Mount Transducer Installation 3496 3497 NOTE: Transom mount transducers are ONLY recommended for vessels under 35 feet (10.6 m) with Outboard or I/O engines. 3498 3499 NOTE: Transom mount transducers are not recommended for sailboats or powerboats with inboard engines. 3500 12.1.2.2 Through-Hull 3501 3502 3503 Through Hull transducers are mounted through a penetration in the vessel bottom. Installation requires that a hole be drilled through the hull and may require the use of a fairing block to level the face of the transducer parallel to the water’s surface. 3504 There are three types of through hull transducer styles: 3505 3506 1. Low-profile / flush-mount models are designed for hulls with low dead rise (less than 7 degrees). No fairing block is required. 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 2. Tilted Element™ models are similar to Low Profile / flush mount models but can accommodate hull dead rise angles up to 24°. The ceramic element(s) inside the transducer is tilted to compensate for hull dead rise as shown in Figure 54. Installers must match the tilt angle of transducer to dead rise of the vessel hull at the specific location of installation. 3512 3513 3514 3515 Triducer® Multisensor and Tilted Element™ are trademarks of Airmar Technology Corporation, Milford, NH 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 127 of 313 2014 NMEA 3516 3517 Figure 54: Low-Profile, Tilted Element Installation 3518 • 12° transducer for dead rise angles from 8° to 15° 3519 • 20° transducer for dead rise angles from 16° to 24° 3520 • No Fairing block is required on Tilted Element transducers 3521 3522 3523 3524 Be sure your transducer model matches the dead rise angle of your hull at the selected mounting location. The tilt angle is printed on the top of the transducer. To measure the dead rise angle of your hull at the selected mounting location, use an angle finder or a digital level. 3525 3526 NOTE: Low Profile and Tilted Element transducers are ONLY recommended on powerboats under 35 feet (10.6 m) and sailboats of all sizes. 3527 3528 3529 NOTE: For powerboats over 40 feet (12 m), a through hull stem transducer or in hull transducer is recommended for optimal performance. 3530 3531 3. Traditional Stem style transducers and Long stem thru hull versions with and without fairings are typically installed on vessels over 35 ft.(10.6m). 3532 3533 3534 3535 Figure 55: Thru-Hull Transducer Installation 3536 3537 3538 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 128 of 313 2014 NMEA 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 12.1.2.3 In-Hull Transducers In hull transducers are mounted inside the hull in direct contact with the hull. Generally installed using a glue or epoxy to form a void-free connection to the hull. In-hull transducers radiate energy directly through the hull into the water below as shown in Figure 56. Some models employ a plastic housing which is filled with propylene glycol (non-toxic anti-freeze/coolant) or mineral oil to conduct the energy from the transducer through the hull. Figure 56: In-Hull Transducer Installation NOTE: In Hull transducers are only recommended for solid fiberglass hulls 12.1.2.4 Commercial Tank Mount Commercial tank mount transducers are typically installed on steel hulled commercial fishing vessels and commercial ships. The transducer is mounted in a steel blister on the outside of the ship’s hull. In this type of installation, the shipyard usually performs installation on the transducer as they typically do all work below the waterline on regulated commercial vessels. Figure 57 illustrates how a commercial tank mount transducer is installed. Figure 57: Tank-Mount Transducer Installation 3559 3560 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 129 of 313 2014 NMEA 3561 3562 Table 35 identifies materials used for the manufacture of transducers, characterized by the method of mounting: transom mount, through-hull, or in-hull. 3563 Table 35: Transducer Materials Transom Through-hull Bronze Plastic Stainless steel Aluminum Epoxy Resin Urethane Rubber Plastic 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 In-hull Plastic Plastic (oil-filled tank) 12.1.3 Transducer Selection Transducer selection involves consideration of a number of factors, including the intended application, hull thickness and material, vessel speed, and potential transducer locations. Table 36 provides a matrix of hull materials, transducer types, and propulsion methods and identifies suitable selections for various combinations of criteria. Table 36: Suitable Transducer Selection Combinations Hull Material Fiberglass (solid) Fiberglass (cored) Wood Steel Aluminum Transom Mount OutSternInboard drive board P P N/R Through-Hull Mount OutSternInboard drive board BR, P BR, P BR, P In-Hull Mount OutSternInboard drive board P P P P P N/R BR, P BR, P BR, P N/R N/R N/R P P P P N/R N/R BR SS BR SS1, RB N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R P P N/R SS1, AL1 SS1, AL1, RB, TM BR SS1, RB, TM SS1, AL1, RB, TM N/R N/R N/R Abbreviations: AL = Aluminum BR = Bronze P = Plastic RB = Resin Blister Housing SS = Stainless Steel TM = Urethane or Rubber Tank Mount N/R = Not Recommended Notes: (1) Transducer isolated from hull using dielectric material. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 130 of 313 2014 NMEA 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 Transducers shall be selected after reviewing available mounting locations, as described in Section 12.1.4, keeping in mind the various options identified in Table 36 and the considerations in the following paragraphs. 12.1.3.1 Hull Thickness Verification of hull thickness shall be performed prior to transducer installation. The intended installation may require an extended-length transducer to permit proper installation and sealing. For through-hull types, ensure that the stem length is sufficient to permit installation with a fairing block, if required, to adapt to the hull dead rise in the intended location. 12.1.3.2 Steel and Aluminum Hull Vessels On metal hull vessels, special installation techniques need to be followed to ensure that a potential corrosion problem is not introduced by installing the transducer. Only plastic or stainless steel transducer housings are recommended for metal hulls. All metal transducers must be properly isolated from the metal hull to reduce potential electrolysis as shown in Figure 58. Follow specific transducer manufacturer instructions for proper isolation 3588 3589 3590 Figure 58: Isolating a Transducer 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 12.1.3.3 Vessel Speed High speed vessels can result in more turbulence over the face of the transducer from below waterline fittings, strakes or steps. Transducers are adversely affected by turbulence and are therefore more sensitive to the proximity of below-waterline fittings on high-speed hulls than on low-speed hulls. Locations that provide acceptable performance at low speed may not have the same performance at higher speeds. 12.1.3.4 Transducer / Display Matching Wherever possible, transducers and transceivers shall be used that are from the same manufacturer and/or are recommended for use by the transceiver manufacturer. Other transducers may be used, provided that the transducer is selected to match the characteristics of the transceiver electronics. The installer shall verify that the 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 131 of 313 2014 NMEA 3603 3604 3605 operating frequency (or frequencies) and impedance of the transducer and transceiver match. Speed/temp sensor electrical signals must also be verified to be compatible with the transceiver. 3606 3607 NOTE: Previously installed or other used transducers that are unmarked with regard to operating frequency and impedance shall not be connected to new displays. 3608 3609 NOTE: Unused or disconnected transducers shall be removed from the vessel and the hull shall be repaired. 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 12.1.3.5 Non-penetrating Installations An in-hull transducer may provide adequate performance, and offers the advantage of being able to perform the installation without drilling a hole in the hull – possibly while the vessel is still in the water. In-hull transducers are most effective when they can be installed in areas with less than 5 degrees dead rise. Liquid-filled tank type transducers shall be used for applications where the dead rise exceeds 5 degrees, but these transducers also require an installation location with more space. 3617 3618 NOTE: Cored fiberglass, wood, aluminum, and steel hulls are unacceptable for in-hull transducers. 3619 NOTE: In-hull transducers can only be installed in solid fiberglass hulls 3620 12.1.4 Transducer Location 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 Transducer mounting locations shall be selected in accordance with the following criteria. 12.1.4.1 Transom Mount Transducers Transom transducers shall be mounted in a location selected according to the number and type of engines. Figure 59 shows transom mount locations for single- and twinengine installations. 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 Figure 59: Transom Mount Transducer Locations Transducers should be located on the side of the propeller turning away from the transducer, unless restricted by other considerations, such as ensuring that the 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 132 of 313 2014 NMEA 3632 3633 3634 3635 transducer is not located in possible turbulence caused by a hull fitting ahead of it. As Figure 59 shows, in twin-engine installations, such considerations may mean the best compromise is between the engines. 12.1.4.2 In-hull Transducers 3636 3637 3638 Figure 60 illustrates acceptable in-hull mount locations. Within the illustrated bounds, transducer mounting location shall be selected in accordance with the following criteria: 3639 3640 3641 Hull Location – A clear area of the hull in the middle one-third of the hull area and below the waterline at all speeds shall be selected. The location shall provide access to the hull inside surface in order to mount the transducer. 3642 3643 Cable Length – Whenever possible, the transducer shall be installed in a location that will minimize the requirement to extend the transducer cable. 3644 3645 Proximity to Keel – Transducers shall be placed so that the transmitted beam will not intersect with or be affected by reflection from the keel. 3646 3647 Dead rise – When multiple locations are available, transducers shall be located in the area of the hull that provides the minimum amount of hull dead rise. 3648 3649 NOTE: If an area with less than 5 degrees of dead rise cannot be identified, a liquid-filled tank type transducer or a through-hull transducer shall be used. DISPLACEMENT WATERLINE CRUISE WATERLINE INSTALL TRANSDUCER IN THIS REGION OF THE HULL IN-HULL TRANSDUCER 3650 3651 Figure 60: In-hull Transducer Mounting 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 133 of 313 2014 NMEA 3652 12.1.4.3 Through-hull Transducers 3653 3654 3655 Figure 61 illustrates acceptable through-hull mount locations. Within the illustrated bounds, the transducer mounting location shall be selected in accordance with the following criteria: 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 Hull Location – A clear area of the hull in the middle one-third of the hull area and below the waterline at all speeds shall be selected. The location shall provide access on both the inside and outside of the hull and shall be free of other protruding through-hull fittings forward of the intended transducer location. The transducer shall be placed in a location that will not interfere with the normal engine water intakes or propeller slipstream. 3662 3663 3664 NOTE: Transducer location could adversely affect engine temperature by blocking water flow, or could cause propeller cavitation by creating turbulence in the propeller slipstream. 3665 3666 3667 NOTE: Transducers should not be mounted aft of hull projections, which are likely to cause turbulent flow past the transducer, particularly at high speed, and compromise the transducer performance. 3668 3669 3670 3671 Cable Length – Determination of the transducer cable routing from the transducer to the depth sounder device shall be made prior to installing transducer. Whenever possible, the transducer shall be installed in a location that will minimize the requirement to extend the transducer cable. 3672 3673 Proximity to the Keel – Transducers shall be placed so that the transmitted beam will not be affected by reflection from the keel. 3674 3675 3676 Access for Service – Through-hull transducers should be sited to allow replacement in the event of damage. Paddlewheel speed sensors shall be placed so that they can be accessed for removal and cleaning. 3677 3678 Hull Dead rise – When multiple locations are available, transducers shall be located in the area of the hull that provides the minimum amount of hull dead rise. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 134 of 313 2014 NMEA DISPLACEMENT WATERLINE CRUISE WATERLINE INSTALL TRANSDUCER IN THIS REGION OF THE HULL THROUGH-HULL TRANSDUCER HULL FAIRING BLOCK FAIRING BLOCK 3679 3680 3681 Figure 61: Through-hull Transducer Mounting 12.1.5 Dummy Plugs 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 If a dummy plug is provided for use with removable insert transducers, it shall be mounted within easy reach at the transducer location and secured so that it cannot come loose and cause a hazard. The method of attachment shall allow easy removal without tools so that the plug can be inserted into the transducer hole in an emergency situation. 12.1.6 Anti-Fouling Paint 3687 3688 3689 At the completion of installation and on an annual service, the faces of all transducers shall be cleaned with a fine-grit sandpaper (400 grit) and a light coat of water based anti-fouling transducer paint shall be applied. 3690 3691 3692 NOTE: Metallic based bottom paints shall not be applied to the face of bronze throughhull transducers, but are acceptable for plastic through-hull transducers and the outside hull where in-hull transducers transmit through. 3693 12.2 3694 3695 Installation Requirements Transducers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions and the following paragraphs. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 135 of 313 2014 NMEA 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 12.2.1 Mounting Transducers shall be mounted so that the transducer face is within 5 degrees of parallel to the water surface when the vessel is properly trimmed. In addition, mounting shall be in accordance with the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. 12.2.1.1 Transom Mount Stainless steel fasteners shall be used for mounting transom mount transducers and attaching non-metallic cable ties used to secure the transducer cable. Fastener holes shall be sized properly and countersunk to reduce chipping the gel coat. The holes in the transom and fastener threads shall be sealed with sealant appropriate for use below the waterline. Sufficient sealant shall be applied in the holes and on the threads of fasteners to result in a continuous band completely surrounding the fastener head. 12.2.1.2 In-hull Mount In-hull transducers shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using sealant or epoxy provided by the manufacturer. Fasteners, if required, shall be stainless steel with properly sized and countersunk mounting holes. 12.2.1.3 Through-hull Mounts 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 Low Profile & Tilted Element Style 12° and 20° models—from inside the hull, point the arrow on the top of the transducer (and the cable exit) toward the KEEL or centerline of the boat. This will align the angle of the element inside the transducer with the dead rise angle of the hull. 3719 Through-hull Mount Stem Style with Fairing 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 A fairing block shall be used whenever the dead rise angle exceeds 5 degrees, or whenever the inner and outer hull surfaces are out of parallel enough to cause a 1/32inch (1 mm) or greater gap between the transducer flange and hull surface. The attachment nut shall be tightened to a minimum 20 lb. ft.(3 kg meters) of torque. The transducer, fairing block if used, and the threads of the transducer to a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) inside the outer hull surface shall be coated with sealant to ensure a continuous seal. 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 12.2.1.4 Fairing Blocks Fairing blocks shall be installed as a mechanical transition for through-hull installations where the hull dead rise exceeds 5 degrees, as shown in Figure 62. The fairing block is installed between the transducer and the outside and inside of the hull and is cut to match the hull dead rise angle using a band saw or similar device so that the transducer face remains parallel to the water surface. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 136 of 313 2014 NMEA 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 Figure 62: Through-hull Transducer / Fairing Block Cross-section Pre-manufactured fairing blocks designed specifically for the transducer to be installed are recommended. Permitted materials for fairing blocks shall include high-impact polyurethane and high-density wood, such as mahogany or oak. If a wood fairing block is fabricated, it must provide sufficient strength to enable the transducer to be installed with a minimum of 20 ft. lbs.(3 kg meters) of torque on the attachment nut without splitting the inner or outer fairing block. 3741 3742 NOTE: StarBoard® material or other petroleum-based materials shall not be used in the fabrication of fairing blocks, as sealants will not adhere to such materials. 3743 3744 NOTE: Wood fairing blocks or backing blocks shall not be used with plastic or resin transducers as the swelling of the block could fracture the housing. 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 Surfaces that mate to the hull shall be sanded after cutting to ensure that all saw ridges are removed. At completion of cutting and sanding, the minimum outer fairing block thickness at its narrowest point shall be equal to or greater than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) for high-impact polyurethane or equal to or greater than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) for wood blocks. 12.2.1.5 Cored Hull Construction Where mounting locations involve cutting into hulls or decks with cored construction, the core material shall be protected by removing the core in the area surrounding the mounting location and replacing the core with a solid plug of fiberglass or epoxy that is larger than the required clearance hole. When the plug has cured, drill through the plug material to create the clearance hole.(See Figure 63). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 137 of 313 2014 NMEA 3756 3757 3758 Figure 63: Preparing a cored fiberglass hull 12.2.2 Cable Routing 3759 3760 3761 Transducer cables shall be routed away from other electrical harnesses and away from receivers such as AM/FM stereo, VHF radio, and SSB radios to reduce interference noise that would affect depth transducer operation or affect the receivers. 3762 3763 3764 Extending transducer cables should be avoided. If the specific installation requires the cable to be extended, an approved extension cable supplied by the manufacturer shall be used. 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 Transducer cables routed through the boat shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 12 inches (30 cm) in length. Support shall be provided by non-metallic support devices except in engine spaces, where support shall be provided by metallic clamps insulated with a material that is resistant to gasoline, fuel oil, motor oil, lubricating oil, and steering fluid. 3770 12.2.2.1 Transom Cables 3771 3772 Cables from transom mount transducers shall enter the vessel in one of the following methods: 3773 3774 3775 1. Over the top of the transom - The cable shall be protected in the exposed areas at the top and within 6 inches (15 cm) of the edge of the transom with spiral wrap protective sheathing or equivalent. 3776 3777 3778 2. Through a hole drilled through the transom above the waterline - The hole shall be sealed adequately to make a waterproof seal and limit water intrusion into the transom. 3779 3780 3781 3782 12.2.3 Fasteners and Sealing Fasteners used on the transom or in bilge areas for mounting transducers or cable supports shall be stainless steel and shall be installed in properly sized holes that have been countersunk to reduce gel coat chipping. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 138 of 313 2014 NMEA 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 Fasteners and all holes drilled through the transom or in bilge areas shall be sealed with a sealant appropriate for use below the waterline that meets or exceeds Federal specification TT-S-00230C(2), or Federal specification TT-S-227B(1). Sufficient sealant shall be applied in the holes and on the threads of fasteners to result in a continuous band completely surrounding the fastener head. 12.2.4 Electrical 3789 3790 Transducers shall meet the following electrical requirements. 12.2.4.1 Frequency 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 The frequency of the transducer shall exactly match the transmit/receive frequency of the depth sounder in use. When multi-frequency depth sounders are used, the transducer shall be capable of operating on both operating frequencies, either by use of independent internal elements or by a combination element that is capable of resonating at both operating frequencies. 12.2.4.2 Power 3797 3798 3799 Transducers shall provide a power handling capability that equals or exceeds the maximum average power output during the pulse of the depth sounder in use. 12.2.4.3 Grounding 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 On vessels with steel or aluminum hulls, where specific mechanical isolation is included as part of the transducer installation, isolation of the transducer housing from the hull shall be maintained. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions. 12.3 Installation Procedures Transducers shall be installed using the following procedures. 12.3.1 Dry Fitting Before Installation 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 The transducer assembly and securing nut shall be assembled dry without the use of adhesive to verify the mechanical fit of the transducer and any required fairing or backing blocks. This step shall be performed for every installation, as individual hull sections vary with fabrication and may present different mounting angles on the inner and outer surfaces of the hull. 3812 3813 3814 3815 After cutting the fairing block, if required, to the hull dead rise angle and sanding the blocks smooth, drill the clearance hole in the hull to mount the transducer. Be sure that the hole is oriented vertically with respect to the waterline, rather than perpendicular to the hull, as it may cause interference with the transducer and fairing block alignment. 3816 3817 3818 3819 Inspect the fit between the transducer and the fairing block, and the fairing block and the hull. The maximum permissible gap at the dry fit stage is 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm) at any point between the transducer, fairing block, and/or hull. If the gap exceeds the maximum value, the fairing block needs to be adjusted by additional cutting or sanding. 3820 3821 3822 3823 Also inspect the fit between flush-mount and low-profile transducers and the hull. If a gap greater than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) exists between the hull and transducer at any point, a tapered backing block may be required to ensure that the flange of the transducer face is parallel to the outer hull surface. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 139 of 313 2014 NMEA 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 When the transducer and any fairing or backing blocks fit without gaps, remove the transducer from the hull. 12.3.2 Surface Preparation Prepare the hull surfaces where the transducer or fairing blocks will contact the inside and outside hull area. All bottom paint shall be removed from the area of the transducer, with a minimum clearance of 1 inch (2.5 cm), of the outer dimension of the fairing block. All oil, water, and dust residue on the inside of the hull, in the vicinity of the inner faring block shall be removed and the inner hull surface cleaned to ensure a clean and dry mounting surface. All surfaces of the fairing block and transducer mounting surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and dirt prior to sealing and assembly. 12.3.3 Sealing 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 A generous amount of one part sealant and bedding compound shall be applied to the mating surfaces of the transducer, outer fairing block, and inner fairing block at the time of assembly. In addition, sealant shall be applied on the mounting threads of the transducer from the base of the transducer to a distance of at least 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) above the outer fairing block mounting surface to ensure a continuous seal of the threads. Sealants shall be manufacturer approved for below the waterline use. 3841 3842 3843 3844 NOTE: Certain adhesive sealants with permanent bonding characteristics are not recommended for transducer installation, as these type of adhesive sealants may preclude the ability to remove and replace a transducer if the transducer is defective or damaged. 3845 12.3.4 Final Assembly 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 The transducer, outer fairing block, and inner fairing block shall be assembled and the inner securing nut shall be tightened in accordance with manufacturer specifications. The transducer shall be provided adequate support to eliminate rotation during the tightening process. All excess sealant shall be cleaned at both the exterior and interior installation locations. 3851 3852 3853 A minimum cure time of 12 hours at 70 degrees Fahrenheit (21° C) is required before launching the vessel after transducer installation. At lower temperatures, the cure time will need to be increased. 3854 3855 3856 3857 If the transducer cable is not immediately routed to the display the transducer cable shall be adequately secured to ensure that the cable and connector remain above the level of any bilge water or oil that may be present until final transducer cable installation is performed. 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 12.3.5 Checking for Leaks 3863 3864 3865 12.3.6 Transducer Installation Testing At the time of launch, a visual inspection shall be performed to ensure the watertight integrity of the installation; appropriate action shall be taken if any leaks are observed. Also, the transducer locations shall be indicated to the owner at this time, and the method of cleaning removable transducers shall be demonstrated. For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 140 of 313 2014 NMEA 3866 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 141 of 313 2014 NMEA 3867 13 3868 3869 COMPASS INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of vessel heading sensors, which include the following: 3870 • Magnetic compasses (wet compass) 3871 • Electronic compasses (fluxgate compasses) 3872 • Satellite Compass 3873 • Gyro Compass 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 13.1 General Considerations Onboard electronics installed in accordance with these standards shall conform to the location criteria identified in the following paragraphs in order to minimize their interference on magnetic steering compasses. Equipment and other materials likely to present an unusually large magnetic field and produce an unacceptably large deviation when mounted in close proximity to steering compasses include: 3880 • Audio Speakers 3881 • VHF Radios 3882 • CRT Displays (radar displays, color fish finders) 3883 • Hailer Horns 3884 • DC Motors 3885 • Masses of Ferrous Materials (e.g., steel, iron) 3886 • Current Carrying Conductors 3887 • Electrical Distribution Panels 3888 • Air Conditioner Compressors 3889 3890 NOTE: All magnetic heading sensors, including electronic and fluxgate compasses, are subject to magnetic interference that will cause heading errors or deviation. 3891 13.1.1 Compass Safe Distance 3892 3893 The installation of electronic equipment in close proximity to a steering compass should be avoided whenever possible. 3894 3895 Equipment displays and junction boxes shall not be mounted closer than the specified compass safe distance identified in the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3896 13.1.2 Pre-Installation Testing 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 Prior to installation, any electronic equipment that may have an effect on the steering compass should be checked by temporarily locating the equipment in the desired position, providing power to it, and operating the equipment in each of its operational modes. If any operational mode causes a deviation on the steering compass, then an alternative location shall be considered. 3902 3903 At the completion of the installation, the installer shall again verify that the operation of any electronic equipment does not adversely affect the indicated magnetic heading 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 142 of 313 2014 NMEA 3904 3905 3906 3907 shown on the steering compass or autopilot compass display. It may be necessary to make these tests on four different headings equally distributed around 360 degrees, since the effects can vary with the heading. 13.1.3 Compass Compensation 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 In installations where compass interference is unavoidable, the vessel owner shall be advised of the potential for interference before continuing the installation. A qualified compass installer should be contacted to compensate the compass and/or prepare an appropriate deviation card (every 15 degrees) to identify the result of the electronics installation and the change in magnetic heading presented on the steering compass. 13.1.4 Compass Installation 3914 3915 3916 Compasses or other heading sensing and display electronics shall be installed in accordance with the following paragraphs. 13.2 3917 3918 3919 Magnetic Compass Magnetic compasses shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 13.2.1 Location 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 A compass shall be positioned on a horizontal or vertical surface where it is visible to the helmsman and can be aligned so that the compass card is level and the compass direction is parallel to the vessel’s keel. The orientation of the compass shall remain within the limits identified by the manufacturer when the vessel is stationary or underway. The mounting area shall be free from magnetic and electrical interference. 3925 3926 3927 NOTE: A fairing block may be required for horizontally mounted units if the surface is not level, or for vertically mounted units if the surface is not perpendicular to the keel. 3928 3929 NOTE: The criteria for testing and calibrating a magnetic compass shall be performed by a qualified compass adjustor. Refer to manufacturer recommendations 3930 3931 NOTE: The criteria for testing and calibrating a magnetic compass is not covered in this standard or by NMEA. 3932 3933 13.2.2 Electrical Connections 3934 3935 3936 3937 Any electrical connections that must be run near the compass (e.g., for illuminating the compass itself) shall be made using twisted-pair wiring. In addition, the connection wiring polarity specified by the compass manufacturer shall be observed. 13.3 Electronic Compass 3938 3939 Electronic Compasses (including Fluxgate Compasses) shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 3940 3941 3942 NOTE: Such compasses are usually installed in out-of-the-way locations not typically considered magnetically sensitive. The installed compass location shall be recorded and reported to the vessel owner, and shall be clearly labeled as follows: 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 143 of 313 2014 NMEA 3943 MAGNETIC COMPASS AREA! DO NOT INSTALL OR STORE ANY MAGNETIC MATERIAL WITHIN 3 FEET (1 METER) OF THIS AREA 3944 3945 3946 13.3.1 Location 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 A electronic compass shall be positioned as near as practical to the pitch and roll center of the vessel. This location is typically found on the vessel centerline between onethird and one-half of the vessel’s waterline length forward of the transom and approximately at waterline height. The electronic compass shall be installed in the orientation specified by the manufacturer and shall remain within the limits identified by the manufacturer when the vessel is stationary or underway. 3953 3954 3955 Additionally, the electronic compass shall be located a minimum of 21/2 feet (760 mm) from any other onboard steering compass to ensure that the two compasses don’t cause deviations in each other. 3956 3957 NOTE: To minimize the effect of roll and heel on measurement errors, mounting locations on the fly bridge or mast are not recommended for electronic compasses. 3958 13.3.2 Electrical Connections 3959 3960 3961 Electrical connections between the electronic compass and its display head shall be made using the manufacturer-provided cable. 13.3.3 Mounting 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 Mounting options will vary with manufacturer. Refer to manufacturer documentation before mounting. Magnetic compasses and electronic compasses shall be mounted using nonferrous mounting hardware suitable for the mounting surface. Most quality stainless steel and solid brass fasteners can be used. If you are unsure, test the fasteners with a magnet. 13.3.4 Calibration and Compensation 3968 3969 Following installation, magnetic and electronic compasses shall be calibrated or compensated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3970 3971 Electronic compasses should be re-calibrated when the vessel has been transported via truck, rail or yacht transport to a new location. 3972 3973 If the heading sensor is interfaced to an autopilot, turn off the autopilot before aligning the heading as the autopilot may turn the rudder suddenly. 3974 3975 13.3.5 Compass Testing 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 15 Testing 13.4 SATELLITE COMPASS (GNSS) INSTALLATION A Satellite Compass, also known as Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) tracks navigation satellite signals for determining true heading, positioning and velocities. The compass determines its ranges and azimuths to the satellite from the compass’s antennas that receive the satellite signals coming from the different satellite 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 144 of 313 2014 NMEA 3982 3983 constellations, and the receivers translate these signals using complex algorithms for giving accurate heading, positions and velocities. 3984 3985 3986 The antennas’ positions are computed from the measurements of the time delay between the emission time (satellite) and the reception time (receiver) for at least 4 signals coming from different satellites. 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 There are no mechanical parts such as rotating motors and gimbles and performance is not affected by geomagnetism or any magnetic materials. True heading and position is instantaneous and there is no need for velocity corrections as required with gyrocompasses. Satellite compasses are affected by multipath, multipath results when the direct path to your compass is blocked by objects on the vessel and the signals from the GNSS satellites are reflected by the objects. This will result in heading and position jumps. 3994 GNSS compasses may come in two main configurations; 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 1. A complete heading and position system in a single enclosure that requires only one power/data cable connection. This device is placed outside of the vessel in an unobstructed location with a clear view of the sky. 4000 4001 4002 4003 2. A main GNSS receiver with at least two or more external antennas, antenna cables, power/data cables. With this system the GNSS receiver is placed inside the vessel and the external GNSS antennas are placed outside in an unobstructed location with a clear view of the sky. 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 This section identifies recommended installation practices for determining the best location of GNSS compasses. An optimum location for GNSS compasses requires an unobstructed view of the sky (to minimize multipath problems), and an adequate distance from any devices that may cause noise or interference. Taking these precautions will help ensure your device meets the manufacturer’s heading and position specifications. 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 13.4.1 General Considerations With installation of either GNSS compass above; any onboard electronics installed in accordance with these standards should conform to the location criteria identified in the following paragraphs. In order to minimize interference with GNSS compasses, electronic equipment and other materials likely to present in-band noise interference (on the same frequency as GPS, GLONASS, COMPASS and Galileo signals) should not be mounted in close proximity of GNSS compasses. These products include: 4019 o VHF radios; 4020 o Marine radars; 4021 o Satellite phones; 4022 o Weather radars; 4023 o DC motors; 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 145 of 313 2014 NMEA 4024 o Fluorescent ballasts; 4025 o Energy Saving light bulbs (CFLs) 4026 13.4.2 Compass Safe Distance 4027 4028 The installation of electronic equipment in close proximity to a steering GNSS compass should be avoided whenever possible. 4029 4030 4031 GNSS compasses, displays and junction boxes should not be mounted closer than the specified compass safe distance identified in the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4032 13.4.3 Testing 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 Prior to installation, any electronic equipment and accessories that produce noise and in-band interference with the GNSS compass should be checked by temporarily locating the equipment in the desired position, providing power to it, and operating the equipment in each of its operational modes. If any operational mode causes a loss in signal-to-noise on the GNSS compass, then an alternate location should be considered.. 4038 4039 13.4.4 Compass Compensation 4040 4041 4042 In installations where compass interference is unavoidable, the vessel owner should be advised of the potential for interference before continuing the installation. A qualified compass installer should be contacted to help with finding a suitable location. 4043 4044 13.4.5 Installation 4045 4046 Compasses or other heading sensing and display electronics should be installed in accordance with the following paragraphs. 4047 4048 13.4.5.1 GNSS Compass 4049 4050 GNSS compasses should be installed by a qualified compass installer in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 4051 4052 13.4.5.2 Mounting Location 4053 4054 When considering where to mount the GNSS Compass, consider the following recommendations: 4055 4056 4057 4058 • Consider GNSS antenna reception, ensuring there is a clear view of the sky available and GNSS signals, along with differential correction signals such as beacon or Satellite Base Augmentation System (SBAS), are not masked by obstructions that may reduce GNSS compass performance; 4059 4060 4061 • To achieve optimum heading and position performance, mount the GNSS compass or GNSS antennas as high as possible (considering maintenance and accessibility). If possible, ensure that the antenna is higher than the highest object on the vessel. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 146 of 313 2014 NMEA 4062 4063 • If possible GNSS compasses should be installed above the vessel’s radar antenna and out of the radar’s beam. 4064 4065 4066 4067 • Since the GNSS compass computes a position based on a primary antenna, mount the compass where the reference position is required with respect to the primary antenna. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual, as different GNSS compasses operate and compute heading and position differently. 4068 4069 • Observe the horizontal separation between the GNSS antennas and the masts. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual. Figure 64 is a general guideline 4070 4071 Figure 64: GNSS Compass Horizontal Separation & Field of View 4072 4073 4074 4075 • Locate any transmitting (VHF radio or radar) antennas away from the compass by at least a few meters to ensure tracking performance is not compromised, giving the best performance possible; 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 147 of 313 2014 NMEA 4076 4077 • Make sure there is enough cable to route into the vessel to reach a breakout box or terminal strip, or NMEA 2000 trunk line connector. 4078 4079 • Do not locate the antenna or compass where environmental conditions exceed those specified in the manufacturer’s manual; 4080 4081 • When using beacon as a differential correction source, consider mounting locations away from ambient noise within the beacon band; 4082 4083 4084 • Ensure that the beacon antenna is as far away as possible from all other equipment that emits electromagnetic interference (EMI), including DC motors, alternators, solenoids, radios, power cables, display units, and other electronic devices. 4085 4086 4087 • Any electrical connections that must be run near the compass should be made using twisted-pair wiring. In addition, the connection wiring polarity specified by the compass manufacturer should be observed. 4088 4089 13.4.5.3 Mounting Orientation 4090 4091 GNSS compasses should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 Some GNSS compasses will output heading, pitch, and roll readings regardless of the orientation of the antennas. However, the relation of the antennas to the boat’s axis determines whether you will need to enter a heading, pitch, or roll bias. The primary antenna is used for positioning and the primary and secondary antennas work in conjunction to calculate heading, pitch, and roll values. 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 Parallel Orientation: The most common installation is to orient the GNSS compass parallel to, and along the centerline of, the axis of the vessel. This provides a true heading. In this orientation if you use a gyrocompass, you can enter a heading bias to calibrate the physical heading to the true heading of the vessel. You may need to adjust the pitch/roll output to calibrate the measurement if the compass is not installed in a horizontal plane. 4103 4104 4105 4106 Perpendicular Orientation: If the GNSS compass is oriented perpendicular to the centerline of the vessel’s axis, a heading bias of +90° if the primary antenna is on the starboard side of the vessel and -90° if the primary antenna is on the port side of the vessel. 4107 4108 13.4.5.4 Mounting Options 4109 4110 GNSS compasses should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 4111 4112 The GNSS compass allows for two different mounting options: flush mount and pole mount. 4113 4114 • Flush mount - The bottom of the compass contains screw holes for flush mounting the unit to a flat surface. Refer to the manufacturer’s guide. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 148 of 313 2014 NMEA 4115 4116 4117 • Pole mount - The bottom of the compass contains a mounting hole (1" thread) for easy pole mounting. Hand tighten until snug (do not over tighten). Refer to the manufacturer’s guide. 4118 4119 4120 4121 13.4.5.5 Electrical Connections GNSS compasses electrical connections should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following points. 4122 • Cable must reach an appropriate power source. 4123 4124 • Cable may connect to a data storage device, display, or other device that accepts GNSS data. 4125 • Avoid running the cable in areas of excessive heat. 4126 • Keep cable away from corrosive chemicals. 4127 • Do not run the cable through door or window jams. 4128 • Keep cable away from rotating machinery. 4129 • Do not crimp or excessively bend the cable. 4130 • Avoid placing tension on the cable. 4131 • Remove unwanted slack from the cable. 4132 • Secure along the cable route using plastic wraps. 4133 4134 • Electrical connections between the GNSS compass and its display head should be made using the manufacturer-provided cables. 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 13.4.6 Calibration and Compensation Following installation, GNSS compasses should be calibrated or compensated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 13.4.7 Detailed Test Requirements In addition, to verifying compass-operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the compass has been installed with minimum deviational error. 4143 13.4.7.1 Dockside Testing 4144 • 4145 13.4.7.2 Sea Trial Testing 4146 4147 4148 4149 Check that compass location is free from interference. It may be necessary during Sea Trial Testing to make these tests on four different headings, equally distributed around 360 degrees, since the effects can vary with the heading. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 149 of 313 2014 NMEA 4150 4151 • Display both heading (HDT) and course over ground (COG) from the GNSS compass; 4152 • Drive the vessel between 7-10 knots on a straight yaw free course, 4153 4154 4155 4156 • Observe both the HDT and COG values. They should match but they may not match because of the wind, tide and current.; the GNSS compass may have to be adjusted by the difference if there is a delta between unexplainable values;. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. 4157 • Repeat steps 1 through 3 until HDT and COG match. 4158 4159 • Check compass for accuracy against any other known references at different azimuths (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 13.5 Gyrocompass There are two main types of gyrocompasses used in the marine field. One has a sphere floating in a fluid. This fluid needs to be changed annually. The other uses a sensitive element mounted on gimbals. Gyrocompasses shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the following paragraphs. 4167 4168 NOTE: The criteria for testing and calibrating a gyrocompass shall be performed by a qualified compass adjustor. Refer to manufacturer recommendations. 4169 4170 4171 NOTE: The criteria for testing and calibrating a gyrocompass is not covered in this standard or by NMEA. 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 13.5.1 Mounting Location 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 The Gyro needs to be mounted on a rigid foundation which is flat, not susceptible to resonant vibration, and within one degree of level with the ship’s level plane. The best performance will be achieved when it is mounted as close to the center line and ship’s center of gravity as possible. Many gyros have slotted mounting holes to correct for minor misalignment of indicated heading. NOTE: Make sure there is plenty of room for service, as some gyros need to have their sphere or sensitive element installed and or serviced with the compass in place. Older gyros require the binnacle to be aligned with the ship’s centerline, but some current systems can be orientated in any horizontal direction while others need to be aligned in one of four quadrants, 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. Some high performance Gyros on the market have more stringent requirements. Refer to manufacturer documentation. 13.5.2 Data Outputs Gyrocompasses may have the following data outputs: • Stepper data • Synchro data 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 150 of 313 2014 NMEA 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 • • NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183-HS 13.5.3 Compass Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 151 of 313 2014 NMEA 4200 14 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 RADAR INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of marine radar. 14.1 General Considerations Radar systems shall be installed consistent with the radar manufacturer’s recommendations for location and radiation safety. Modern radars fall into two categories: 4207 • Traditional pulse style radar 4208 • Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave (FMCW) style radar. 4209 14.1.1 Radiation 4210 4211 4212 4213 Traditional pulse style radar antennas shall be located so that the radar beam is above the spaces occupied by vessel crew and passengers. A radar beam can be expected to project from the radiating element up to ± 15 degrees above and below horizontal, depending on the size and style of the array.(See Figure 65). 4214 Refer to radar manufacturer documentation for exact beam width specifications. 4215 4216 Figure 65: Radar Vertical Beam Widths 4217 4218 4219 4220 Traditional marine pulse radars transmit RF energy in the microwave region of the frequency spectrum. A pulse radar antenna shall not be mounted in such a manner that direct exposure to humans at eye level is possible while operating the vessel. . Refer to radar manufacturer documentation for mounting guidelines and safe distances. 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 FMCW radars transmit at much lower wattage levels in the microwave portion of the frequency spectrum than their traditional pulse radar counterparts. FMCW radars generally have limited mounting restrictions with regards to safe proximity and/or orientation to humans. Refer to radar manufacturer documentation for mounting guidelines and safe distances. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 152 of 313 2014 NMEA 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 14.1.2 Location Radar antennas shall be located in a site that is free from reflection from onboard sources. Any obstruction in the radiated beam may cause shadowing, which is the inability of the radar to locate targets beyond the obstruction at the same relative bearing. The extent to which shadowing will occur is a function of the array size, the cross section presented to the radar beam by the obstruction, and the distance the obstruction is from the radar antenna. Larger arrays, smaller obstructions, and longer distances to the obstruction all reduce shadowing. If available mounting options require the radar to be located near large obstructions, the radar should be mounted forward of the obstruction so that any shadowing is limited to bearings directly behind the vessel. NOTE: Mounting of the radar should be away from the top of exhaust stacks, since the scanner and cables can be damaged by excessive heat and corrosive effects of exhaust gases. 14.1.2.1 Spacing 4242 4243 Spacing between the radar antenna and other antenna types shall be maintained in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. 4244 4245 4246 NOTE: Marine radar transmits a focused energy beam of sufficient power to overload other receivers. Spacing requirements identified in Section 9, Antennas should be rigorously maintained. 4247 14.2 4248 4249 4250 Radar Installation Radar equipment shall be installed in accordance with the provisions identified in the following paragraphs. 14.2.1 Mounting 4251 Radar displays shall be located and installed in accordance with Section 10, Displays. 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 The radar antenna shall be mounted in a location that is sufficiently strong enough to support the radar antenna in all sea conditions that may be encountered. The mounting surface and supporting structure shall be capable of supporting a minimum of six times the weight of the antenna without causing damage to the mounting surface or supporting structure. Doubling or backing plates may be used to distribute the weight of the radar antenna directly to the supporting structure when the mounting surface itself is insufficient. 4259 4260 4261 4262 NOTE: Fiberglass radar arches and radar pedestal mounts are frequently constructed with a hollow or lightweight core without other reinforcements and may not have sufficient mechanical integrity to support the weight of a large open array radar antenna. 4263 4264 4265 The radar antenna shall be installed in a well-supported location in accordance with the following requirements: 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 153 of 313 2014 NMEA 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 1. The radar antenna shall have a clear line-of-sight view of as much horizon as practical. Choose a location where masts or other structures do not block the signal from the radar antenna, as shown in Figure 65. In the event that blockages are unavoidable, they should be to the aft of the radar antenna. 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 2. The radar antenna shall be located a minimum of 15 feet (4.5 m) away from other transmitting antennas (HF, VHF, and AIS) that may generate signals which may interfere with the radar antenna assembly. Although radio interference is not common, the farther away the radar antenna assembly is from these other antennas, the less likely the radar will experience radio interference. 4277 4278 4279 NOTE: If the Radar antenna is installed with a flat vertical metal surface behind it whose width is equal to or greater than the length of the antenna, A reflected image of the forward targets may be displayed in the aft sector of the radar display. 4280 4281 4282 4283 NOTE: FMCW radars output significantly less RF energy than the traditional pulse radars and will have less chance of interference with other antennas. Refer to radar manufacturer documentation for guidelines with antenna spacing FMCW radar and other antennas. 4284 4285 3. The radar antenna shall be located so that it is outside the vertical beam width of any radar array located within 15 feet (4.5 m). 4286 4287 4. The radar antenna shall be rigidly mounted to the boat. If necessary, reinforce the mounting area to assure that it does not flex due to boat motion or vibration. 4288 4289 4290 NOTE: Motion compensated antennas can be damaged by uncontrolled motion. The source of power for the radar antenna shall be selected to ensure that it is available and energized whenever the vessel is underway. 4291 14.2.2 Orientation 4292 4293 4294 4295 The orientation of the radar antenna (upward or downward mounting angle) shall be adjusted in accordance with the type of vessel on which it is being installed. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation for radar orientation recommendations 14.2.3 Processing Unit Installation 4296 4297 When the radar processor is separate from the display/control unit, it shall be mounted in accordance with Section 11, Black Box Installations. 4298 4299 When the radar processor in integrated within the display/control unit, it shall be mounted in accordance with Section 10, Display Installations. 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 14.2.4 Cables Wherever possible, a single length of manufacturer-provided cable suitable for the model radar and antenna being installed shall be used. 14.2.4.1 Cable Routing The radar cable shall be protected from the environment throughout the entire cable run, with the following exception: within 12 inches (30 cm) of the antenna waterproof gland, an exposed section of cable may be used, provided that the cable is protected 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 154 of 313 2014 NMEA 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 where it enters the cabin or support structure with a waterproof fitting to preclude chafing and water ingress along the cable. Radar cables shall be routed in order to observe manufacturer-specified minimum bend radius and shall not be routed through channels or tubes that are in bilge areas or that are in constant contact with bilge water. 14.2.4.2 Cable Extensions 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 Radar cables shall be extended using only cable supplied and/or cable approved for use by the radar manufacturer for the specific model radar. If manufacturer-supplied terminations are not available, junctions shall be made in accordance with Section 2, AC and DC Wiring. If the cables are Ethernet style, all terminations and junctions shall be made in accordance with Section 8.4, Ethernet Network Wiring Requirements. All junctions shall incorporate service loops to allow for future replacement and repair of junction hardware. 4319 4320 4321 Cable junctions shall be created only in protected locations or weatherproof enclosures and shall be clearly labeled so that their purpose can be identified without exposing the location to weather or opening the enclosure. 4322 14.2.5 Interference 4323 4324 Radar equipment shall be installed in a manner to minimize interference from or with other onboard electronic equipment using the following methods: 4325 1. Power cable extensions shall be made from shielded cables. 4326 4327 4328 2. Display units and metallic antennas shall be grounded to the RF Ground bus using #8 AWG conductor, in accordance with Section 3, Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection. 4329 4330 3. Data interface cables shall be installed in accordance with Section 8, Data Interfacing. 4331 14.2.6 Calculating Radar Range 4332 You can calculate radar range using following formula 4333 D (nautical miles) = 1.22(√h1 + √h2) or D (kilometers) = 2.23(√h1 + √h2) 4334 H1 = Antenna height (feet or meters) 4335 H2= Target height (feet or meters) 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 Example - If a scanner is 15 ft. (4.5 m) above sea surface and the target is 30 ft. (9.1 m) then you should be able to see the targets echo on the display when the target is 11.41 miles (XX km) from the radar. Figure 66 illustrates this. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 155 of 313 2014 NMEA 4343 4344 4345 Figure 66: Calculating Radar Range 4346 4347 4348 4349 14.2.7 Radar Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 156 of 313 2014 NMEA 4350 15 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 AUTOPILOTS This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of autopilot system components and their integration with onboard steering systems. General information regarding autopilots is provided to aid in selecting the proper autopilot for a particular installation. 15.1 General Considerations 4356 4357 Autopilots installed in accordance with these standards shall meet the requirements and testing specified in the following paragraphs. 4358 Autopilot Electronics consist of Four Components 4359 1. Control Head 4360 2. Course Computer 4361 3. Electronic Compass or other heading device 4362 4. Rudder Reference Unit 4363 Autopilot Drive Units come in many different types 4364 • Reversible Hydraulic Pump 4365 • Linier Drive, Hydraulic or Electric 4366 • Engine Driven Solenoids 4367 • Continuous Running Pump 4368 4369 Figure 67: Typical Autopilot block diagram 4370 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 157 of 313 2014 NMEA 4371 15.2 Autopilot Component Installation 4372 4373 4374 4375 15.2.1 Control Head Installation 4376 15.2.2 Course Computer Installation Autopilot control head installations shall be installed in accordance with Section 10, Display Installations. 4377 • Must be accessible for wiring 4378 • Processor in central location, connection options, cabling considerations 4379 • More components are being connected via NMEA 2000 4380 4381 • Rudder reference unit, compass, and control heads once required direct connections to the course computer. 4382 • Now all three are commonly connected through the NMEA 2000 bus. 4383 • Mounting of course computer shall be in a central location, dry and protected 4384 • Some manufacturers require vertical mounting due to sensors in the device 4385 • Most autopilot components terminate here so consider wire runs 4386 4387 15.2.3 Compass Installation 4388 4389 • The Electronic Compass or Satellite Compass interfaced to the Autopilot shall be installed and tested in accordance with Section 13. 4390 4391 4392 • All NMEA 0183 and / or NMEA 2000 compass interfaces to the Course Computer shall be installed per manufacturer instructions. 4393 15.2.4 Rudder Reference Unit Installation (RRU) 4394 • The RRU provides direct feedback to the Autopilot on the position of Rudder 4395 • Identify the type of rudder reference to be used 4396 • Rotary rudder reference- boats with rudder post. See Figure below 4397 o Geometry is critical (parallelogram) 4398 • Linear rudder reference-outboards / outdrives. See Figure below. 4399 • Unit must function with no binding 4400 • RRU are Delicate units- should be protected 4401 • Unit should be set to rudder zero when rudder is centered 4402 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 158 of 313 2014 NMEA 4403 4404 Figure 68: Typical Rotary Rudder Reference diagram 4405 4406 4407 Figure 69: Typical Linear Rudder Reference diagram 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 NOTE: Some manufacturers offer Virtual Rudder Reference (VRR) where the autopilot compensates with software. Advantages & disadvantages need to be considered as rudder angle indication is not provided by VRR. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation for guidelines and specifications 4414 15.3 Autopilot Drive Types & Installations 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 This section applies to a wide variety of autopilots with varying steering system interfaces. Autopilots operate using either a hydraulic or mechanical interface with the vessel steering system. A wide variety of connection methods, features, and requirements exist within each of these two basic operational areas. Autopilot Drive Unit types include the following: 4420 4421 Reversing Hydraulic Pump – Utilizes a hydraulic pump connected in parallel with the helm pump(s) to drive the steering ram(s) to either port or starboard. 4422 4423 Solenoid Controlled – Usually used only on larger vessels; utilizes a solenoid valve to drive the steering ram using the vessel’s steering system hydraulic pump. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 159 of 313 2014 NMEA 4424 4425 4426 4427 Power Assist – Typically used on stern-drive installations; uses a linear actuator to drive a slave or servo cylinder, which then drives the steering ram. In many steering systems of this type, there is a mechanical linkage from the helm to the servo cylinder, and the hydraulic ram is powered from a pump on the engine. 4428 4429 4430 Tiller Pilots – Mechanical autopilots that connect directly between the vessel tiller and a fixed mounting location, usually in the cockpit. A provision is usually made to remove and store the tiller pilot when not in use. 4431 4432 4433 Linear Drive – Connects directly to the rudder tiller arm alongside the main steering system. These autopilots may be electromechanical or have their own independent hydraulic pump and ram. 4434 4435 Digital Input/Output – Autopilot that outputs a digital signal to control the electronic steering system on a vessel. 4436 4437 4438 Rotary/Chain Drive- Connects to a driven gear on the rudder post via a chain being spun by a drive gear on the drive itself. These are also common if the boat has worm gear style steering. 4439 4440 4441 NOTE: A linear drive ram drives the rudder directly from the tiller arm. Before installing a linear drive unit, check that the vessel’s steering system can be back driven from the rudder. 4442 4443 Wheel – Connects directly to the helm and controls the rotation of the wheel in order to cause the necessary rudder commands. 4444 4445 4446 4447 These descriptions provide only a basic discussion of general autopilot characteristics. Steering and autopilot systems may combine the characteristics of more than one system to meet design objectives. Refer to manufacturer-specific autopilot and steering system documentation for a complete description of the system before installation. 4448 4449 4450 15.3.1 Installation Considerations Determine the type of steering system is on board before installation. 4451 • Hydraulic 4452 • Mechanical 4453 • Power (Solenoid) 4454 • Specialty- Verado, Jastrom, C-Drives 4455 Select a drive system that is compatible with the autopilot 4456 Design your drive system to the steering system 4457 Each of these steering system types have different drive system requirements 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 15.3.2 Hydraulic Drive Unit Installations Autopilots and the hardware necessary to interface the autopilot with hydraulic steering systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements specified in the following paragraphs. Pumps should be connected in accordance with the steering and 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 160 of 313 2014 NMEA 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 autopilot manufacturers’ instructions, giving proper care to the interconnection of reservoirs, suction ports, and check and isolation valves. NOTE: Absolute cleanliness is essential when working with hydraulic systems. Even the smallest dirt particle could prevent the steering system check valves from working properly. 15.3.2.1 Hoses 4469 4470 4471 4472 Flexible pipe or hoses shall be used to connect the steering pump or servo valves to the vessel’s hydraulic steering system. Hoses shall have a burst pressure rating at least four times the maximum hydraulic pressure and shall be fitted with a swivel at one end so that fittings can be tightened without twisting the hose. 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 Hoses should be of sufficient length that they do not chafe on objects when moving through their normal range of travel or come under tension at maximum movement. They shall be installed with sufficient bend radius that they do not kink or block fluid flow. Wherever possible, hoses should be installed to slope upward toward the reservoir. Synthetic hose materials shall be compatible with the hydraulic oil used in the steering system. 4479 4480 4481 4482 15.3.2.2 Fittings Hose fittings should be designed for use with the hose and rated for a burst pressure equal to or greater than that of the hose to be used. Autopilot pumps should be carefully checked to ensure compatibility with the fittings used in the steering system. 4483 4484 4485 4486 NOTE: Fittings used in different autopilot systems may have incompatible thread sizes. National Pipe Tapered (NPT) threaded fittings (American) shall not be connected with British Standard Pipe (BSP) threaded fittings (European) without use of an appropriate adapter. 4487 4488 4489 Tapered pipe threads shall be sealed with pipe sealant to prevent leaks. The first two to three threads shall be left free of sealant to prevent hydraulic oil contamination. 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 NOTE: Teflon (PTFE) tape shall not be used to seal threads. Pieces of tape can enter the steering system and lead to hydraulic system failures. 15.3.2.3 Isolation Valves Isolation valves shall be installed in the hydraulic lines connected to all ports entering the autopilot pump. In case of autopilot pump failure or removal for servicing, the hydraulic steering system will continue to be available for use by closing the isolation valves. 15.3.2.4 Check Valves 4498 4499 4500 4501 Check valves, or lock valves, are required in steering systems to isolate the helm pump from the autopilot pump. Without check valves, the autopilot pump will drive the helm pump (sometimes referred to as “motoring the wheel” or “back driving”) instead of moving the steering ram. 4502 4503 4504 Consult the steering gear manufacturer’s documentation to determine whether the helm pump is fitted with reversing check valves, or add external valves if required. The autopilot pump will usually be manufactured with check valves. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 161 of 313 2014 NMEA 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 NOTE: If the vessel has two steering positions, it will already have check valves installed so that the two wheels can operate independently. 15.3.2.5 Fluid Types Steering systems shall be filled or refilled as required with fluid that meets the steering or autopilot manufacturers’ recommendations for both oil type and viscosity. Consult with the manufacturers if a conflict exists between the steering and autopilot manufacturers’ recommendations for oil type and viscosity. NOTE: Incorrect steering system fluid can destroy hydraulic system seals. Brake fluid shall not be used. Oil leaks and spillage during filling must be cleaned up to prevent running to the bilge and being pumped overboard. 15.3.2.6 Independent Steering Systems In order to maintain main steering system reliability and safety on vessels with redundant hydraulic steering control systems, steering system independence shall be preserved through the appropriate choice and connection of the autopilot system. Connection of a single output type autopilot must not result in interconnection of the two steering systems. 15.3.2.7 Testing and Adjustments At installation completion, all autopilots employing new or modified hydraulic systems shall be tested and adjusted in accordance with the following paragraphs: 15.3.2.8 Bleeding Air It is essential that proper bleeding of air be completed prior to running the autopilot pump and before any operational tests are attempted. To confirm that all air has been bled from the system, the autopilot may be set to a power steering mode at the dock and the rudder commanded from full port to full starboard. If the rudder movement is jerky and slow, the air has not been completely bled out of the system. 15.3.2.9 System Integrity Test the integrity of connections and fittings by running the steering helm pumps hard to port and to starboard and applying a very heavy load to the steering wheel in both directions. If any oil leaks out of any fittings or if any fitting, hose, or piping should fail, these defects can be more easily and safely corrected at the dock than when underway. 15.3.2.10 Additional Notes 4537 4538 4539 4540 • Many power assisted steering gears do not provide a slowing down of rudder speed as the final position is approached, resulting in overshoot and hunting of the servo valve. To avoid this instability, these systems must have very slow servo cylinder speeds set by the autopilot pump. 4541 4542 4543 • For power assisted steering systems, the rudder feedback, when required, must be referenced to the servo cylinder and not the rudder in order to eliminate further overshoot and hunting. 4544 4545 • Due to the very high steering power that can be developed by solenoid valve controlled autopilots, rudder limit switches should be properly adjusted. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 162 of 313 2014 NMEA 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 15.3.3 Mechanical Drive Unit Installation Mechanical autopilots shall be installed in accordance with the following paragraphs. 15.3.3.1 Mounting Mechanical autopilots are capable of developing large forces and shall be securely mounted using through bolted fasteners with lock nuts or lock washers. Metal backing plates shall be provided for wooden or fiberglass mounting surfaces where the strength of the mount is unknown. NOTE: Lag screws into fiberglass or wooden structures shall not be used to mount mechanical autopilot drive units. Through bolting with metal backing plates is required. 15.3.3.2 Protective Covers Protective covers or shrouds shall be used to prevent damage or binding due to objects interfering with the normal drive movements, unless the mechanical drive is located in a closed area where loose objects are not stored. An exception is made for tiller pilots that are normally clear of obstructions in the cockpit when in use. 15.3.3.3 Accessibility In case of failure by jamming or failure to disengage, mechanical drives should be accessible so that they can be disconnected and manual steering regained. They should also be accessible for occasional inspection and maintenance, as required. 4565 4566 4567 NOTE: Mechanical drive units often move the wheel when steering the rudder. Installation and operation personnel should be advised to keep clear during testing and operation. 4568 4569 4570 15.3.4 Autopilot Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 163 of 313 2014 NMEA 4571 16 4572 4573 4574 4575 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE This section identifies common sources of electromagnetic interference and provides techniques for eliminating the effects of interference on electronics operation. Electromagnetic Interference is also known as RF interference. 16.1 General Considerations 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise compromises or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. EMI is of substantial concern onboard a vessel, because interference-generating equipment and equipment susceptible to interference are located in close proximity to each other in order to facilitate the vessel’s intended purpose. EMI can be transmitted from one item of equipment to another through either or both of the following means: 4583 4584 4585 4586 Radiated Emissions – Radiated noise may come directly from the interferencegenerating equipment or may come from cables connected to it that act as transmitting antennas. Radiated emissions can be detected using a radio receiver (search receiver) with a short antenna, passed in proximity to the interference-generating equipment. 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 Conducted Emissions – Conducted noise may be passed through electrical connections in common between the interference-generating equipment and the susceptible equipment. Conduction through power leads is the most common path of conducted emissions, but other paths, such as common data connections, can also be problematic. Conducted emissions may not be detectable using a search receiver, unless the conducted emissions are also being radiated from the cables the emissions are conducted on. 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 Crosstalk- Crosstalk is a form of EMI and is the undesired effect of a signal from one conductor getting coupled onto another conductor. Crosstalk is more prevalent if two conductors are run in parallel and increases as the distance of the parallel run increases. For this reason it is desirable to avoid long parallel runs of any cables containing transmitted signals and/or signals containing RF power and switching voltages. Transducer cables and Single Sideband transmitter cables are two of the biggest offenders. 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 The following equipment has been shown to be likely sources of EMI: • • • • • • • • • • • • Navigation Equipment Autopilots Engine Alternators Radar Depth Sounders Integrated Instruments linked by a Network Computer-Driven Equipment DC Motors Inverters Fluorescent Lamps and Light Dimmers Engine Ignition Engine Tachometers 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 164 of 313 2014 NMEA • • • • • • • 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 Battery Chargers Televisions and Antenna Amplifiers INMARSAT Stepper Motors in Satellite TV Antennas Fans Air Conditioners AC Generators Elimination of EMI is best accomplished by building in protection, rather than adding it on, through careful application of manufacturer and industry-specified installation methods. Observance of all EMI elimination methods is recommended when installing any of the following equipment, known to be susceptible to radiated and conducted electromagnetic emissions: • Radio Receivers: • VHF • SSB • Stereo • Hailer • Loran • Computer/Processor-Driven Equipment • Intercom • DGPS Beacon Receivers • Autopilot 16.2 Identification and Elimination of EMI Problems Even with careful installation, EMI problems may occur when installing equipment identified above as either an EMI source or as being susceptible to EMI. Early and efficient detection and elimination of problems depends on thorough testing at each stage of installation. It is easier to isolate and eliminate a source of interference right after it has been installed, rather than after all equipment in a commissioning is completed and the number of possible interference sources is large. 16.2.1 Identifying and Isolating the Interference Source 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 Identification of interference due to EMI may sometimes be difficult and can sometimes be masked by other symptoms. If EMI is suspected, the best method to determine if one device is affecting another is to turn off all other electrical and electronic equipment and operate the affected device to verify that the interference has disappeared. It may be necessary to shut down and then re-power the affected equipment in order to set it in a condition prior to the interference effects. 4651 4652 If the above test indicates that EMI is the problem, identification and isolation of the EMI source is accomplished by process of elimination. 4653 1. Turn off all equipment on the vessel, except for the affected device. 4654 4655 2. Turn on, one by one, the remaining equipment on the vessel, checking each time to see if the affected equipment exhibits interference symptoms. 4656 3. Repeat until the interference-generating equipment is found. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 165 of 313 2014 NMEA 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 When the interference has been isolated to a specific piece of equipment, further testing may be required to determine if the interference is being radiated or conducted to the susceptible equipment. 16.2.1.1 Tracking Radiated Emissions When the noise has been isolated to a specific piece of equipment, an AM radio receiver (search receiver) with a short antenna may be used to identify if the noise is being directly radiated from the equipment or the cables connected to it. As the antenna is moved in the area of the cables or equipment of the suspect device, the noise will tend to maximize nearest the source. Connecting a small coil of wire as a loop antenna to the portable search receiver and moving it closer to the noise source can obtain a more precise location. Interference may be broadband, such as alternator hash, or narrow band, such as harmonics or inter-modulation products from oscillators; therefore, different receivers must be swept through various frequencies to identify the noise source. 16.2.1.2 Tracking Conducted Emissions If a susceptible receiving device is no longer affected when its antenna is disconnected, the noise is being radiated and picked up by the antenna. If the noise continues to be present, it is entering through the power lead or other electrical connections and these leads will require filtering. It may be possible to disconnect electrical connections for optional devices or features in order to confirm whether the interference is being conducted through the power supply cables or through other interface cables in common with the interference-generating equipment. 16.2.2 Techniques for Eliminating Interference Effects The following techniques, alone or in combination, may be effective in reducing interference from interference-generating equipment. When the identity of the interference-generating equipment is known, the techniques should be applied first to the interference-generating equipment in order to reduce the overall level of emissions coming from the equipment. 16.2.2.1 Shielded Cables Installation of shielded cables in the equipment that is causing EMI interference may reduce or eliminate the transmission of EMI. Shields shall be connected to the RF Ground system as identified in Section 3, Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection. Shield connections shall be made at the end closest to the transmitted signal source, or as specified for data bus applications with multiple signal sources. The other end of the shield shall remain unconnected. 16.2.2.2 Grounding Grounding the equipment display cases and the cases of all the peripheral modules in the system may need to be performed. Case grounding shall be performed in accordance with Section 3.1.2, Electronic Equipment and Display Grounding. NOTE: Flat copper foil provides maximum RF grounding effectiveness, provided a suitable placement for copper foil can be found between the equipment and the RF Ground system. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 166 of 313 2014 NMEA 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 16.2.2.3 Filters Available filter types include alternator filters, noise filters, and capacitors. The filters may be installed at the noise source or on leads entering the affected device. 16.2.2.4 Ferrites Ferrite core toroids and split ferrites may be used to reduce conducted and radiated EMI from a noise generator. 16.2.2.5 Relocating Cable Runs In certain installations, it may be necessary to relocate the routing of cables to reduce the coupling of signals from the interfering source cables into the cable of another device. 16.2.2.6 Relocating Equipment Displays In certain installations, it may be necessary to relocate the equipment displays or mainframe to reduce the coupling of signals from the interfering source into the affected device. 16.2.2.7 Relocating Antennas In certain installations, it may be necessary to relocate the antenna of either the interfering source or affected equipment to reduce the coupling of signals from the interfering source into the affected device. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 167 of 313 2014 NMEA 4718 17 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 VHF & SSB RADIO INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of marine VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers and supporting equipment. 17.1 General Considerations VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers provide a vital link within the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). GMDSS encompasses a wide range of communication methods and represents a significant improvement in maritime communications over the systems of the past. The current GMDSS is designed to enhance both ship-to-ship and ship-to-shore communications and to provide rapid, automated distress alerting with vessel identification and position information. 17.1.1 Digital Selective Calling (DSC) 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 All new fixed mount VHF radio installations within the USA since March 25, 2011 (per FCC part 80.225) must include full DSC functionality. DSC capability automates the manual voice hailing process previously conducted on MF frequency 2182 kHz and VHF channel 16 by digitally encoding information formerly transmitted by voice into a DSC call sequence for transmission on frequencies now reserved specifically for DSC. 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 DSC provides the ability for an operator to hail a specific vessel or shore station, to provide information regarding the nature of the call, and to supply a follow-on voice communication frequency – all within a short burst of digital data on the assigned DSC frequency. This reduces the congestion on the assigned hailing frequency and ensures that the frequency is not misused. 4739 4740 4741 The advantage to the operator is that initiating communications is more like placing and receiving a text message and does not require a listening radio watch on Channel 16 or 2182.0 kHz. 4742 A DSC call sequence includes the following information: 4743 • Nature of call (Distress, Urgency, Safety, Routine) 4744 4745 • Identity of transmitting vessel (per Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number) 4746 4747 • Identity of receiving vessel or shore station (receiving identification can include vessel groups, vessels within a specific geographic area, or all vessels) 4748 4749 • Additional information as required, including geographic location of transmitting vessel (position information per GNSS processor). 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 The preceding information set supports specific features of DSC calling sequences that provide innovative capabilities, including the automated distress call, complete with vessel identification and present position. These new capabilities are dependent on a global identification number that provides a unique ID for each vessel with equipment incorporating DSC capabilities 4755 4756 4757 4758 17.1.2 Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) Number The International Telecommunications Union (ITU) oversees assignment of MMSI numbers and delegate’s responsibility for assignment within sub-ranges to member countries. Each ITU member country is responsible for regulating assignments within 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 168 of 313 2014 NMEA 4759 4760 their assigned ranges. Refer MMSI requests to the appropriate local regulatory agency based on your specific country / region. 4761 More information can be obtained at http://www.itu.int/en/pages/default.aspx 4762 There are four kinds of maritime mobile service identities: 4763 • Ship station identities 4764 • Group ship station identities 4765 • Coast station identities 4766 • Group coast station identities 4767 4768 The U.S. Coast Guard group ship station call identity is 036699999; the group coast station call identity is 003669999. 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 NOTE: MMSI numbers are assigned by local authorities in each specific country/region NOTE: In the United States, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) normally assigns non-federal MMSIs as part of the ship station license application (Form 506). The application can be made online at: http://wireless.fcc.gov/uls/index.htm?job=home NOTE: Voluntarily equipped non-commercial and recreational boaters that remain within U.S. waters and don’t require ship station licenses can obtain an MMSI through the following sources: 4780 4781 4782 BOAT US (http://www.boatus.com/mmsi/) Sea Tow (http://www.seatow.com/boating_safety/mmsi.asp) U.S. Power Squadrons (http://www.usps.org/php/mmsi). 4783 4784 Further information about MMSI numbers and DSC can be found on the US Coast Guard Website: 4785 http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/?pageName=AboutDSC 4786 17.1.3 DSC Interfacing to GPS via NMEA 0183 4787 4788 GPS and VHF / SSB interfacing for DSC operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 8, Data interfacing. 4789 4790 Please refer to NMEA 0400 Appendix I for manufacturer specific wiring information and color codes when interfacing DSC VHF radios to on- board GPS equipment 4791 4792 Both the NMEA and U.S. Coast Guard websites provide additional information regarding DSC and VHF requirements. 4793 Please refer to the following websites for updated information. 4794 http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/?pageName=mtDsc 4795 http://www.nmea.org/content/technicalnot/technicalnot.asp 4796 http://www.nmea.org/content/vessel_inspect/vessel_inspect.asp 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 169 of 313 2014 NMEA 4797 4798 17.1.4 DSC Interfacing to GPS via NMEA 2000 4799 4800 GPS and VHF / SSB interfacing for DSC operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 8, Data interfacing. 4801 4802 Both the NMEA and U.S. Coast Guard websites provide additional information regarding DSC and VHF requirements. 4803 Please refer to the following websites for updated information. 4804 http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/?pageName=mtDsc 4805 http://www.nmea.org/content/technicalnot/technicalnot.asp 4806 4807 http://www.nmea.org/content/vessel_inspect/vessel_inspect.asp 4808 4809 17.2 Prerequisite Equipment 4810 4811 VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers installed in accordance with this standard shall only be installed when in conformance with the following provisions: 4812 4813 4814 • SSB Radio Transceivers shall be installed only when either a VHF Radio Transceiver is already installed, or when a VHF Radio Transceiver is installed concurrent with the SSB Radio Transceiver. 4815 4816 4817 4818 4819 • VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers shall be connected to a position-reporting navigational instrument such as a GPS, whenever such a navigational instrument is either already installed or installed concurrent with the VHF or SSB Radio Transceiver. Data connection shall use either NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® as appropriate. 4820 4821 • SSBs and VHFs that have a built-in watch receiver will require 2 antennas. One for operations and one for the watch receiver. 4822 4823 4824 • VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers shall be programmed with the vessel’s MMSI. If the vessel has not been assigned an MMSI, one shall be applied for in accordance with the owners intended vessel use. 4825 4826 4827 • After the MMSI has been stored, it shall not be possible to change the identity number using any combination of operator controls. The radio’s MMSI shall be accessible to the user. 4828 4829 4830 • Facilities shall be included in the radio to permit a manufacturer, dealer or service agent to delete the MMSI stored in the radio, so that a new MMSI can be entered in the radio. 4831 4832 • The equipment shall be capable of permanently storing one or more Group MMSI numbers, the user shall be able to store and erase these numbers as required. 4833 4834 4835 17.3 VHF Radio Transceiver Installation Requirements VHF Radio Transceivers shall be installed in accordance with the provisions identified in the following paragraphs. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 170 of 313 2014 NMEA 4836 Power Source 4837 4838 4839 4840 VHF equipment shall be connected to a power source suitable for emergency use in accordance with Section 4.1.2, Emergency Communications Battery. Most VHF’s (except GMDSS) are 12vdc and draw about 6 amps in transmit. Power cable should be sized accordingly. 4841 4842 17.3.1 Equipment Location 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 A VHF Radio Transceiver having integral display or controls shall be located and installed in accordance with Section 10, Displays, provided the following additional requirements are met. VHF Radio Transceivers with separate control heads, or with control heads integral to the microphone, may be mounted in any convenient location provided the following requirements are met. 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 The VHF Radio Transceiver shall be located no closer than 3 feet (0.9 m) from any antenna. Further information on RF exposure and safety along with evaluating compliance with these limits can be found in the following documents: 4853 4854 4855 • FCC’s website, specifically FCC's OST/OET Bulletin Number 65, “Evaluating Compliance with FCC-Specified Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Radiation.” 4856 • IEEE/ANSI C95,1-1992; USCG 47 CFR 1.1310; 47 CFR 80.227 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 • The VHF Radio Transceiver, external speaker, if any, and microphone clip shall be located no closer to a magnetic and/or gyro compass than the greater of 3 feet (0.9 m) or the compass-safe distance identified by the compass manufacturer to avoid unintended operation by strong Radio Frequency or magnetic field, thus causing compass interference. 4862 4863 4864 4865 17.3.2 VHF Transmission Line Requirements Coaxial cables used to connect VHF Radio Transceivers to antennas shall be installed in accordance with Section 7, Coaxial Cables. 17.3.3 VHF Antenna Requirements 4866 4867 VHF antennas shall be installed in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. The antenna shall be selected based both on the vessel type and the owners intended use. 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 Because electromagnetic energy at VHF frequencies does not readily bounce off the earth or ionosphere, marine VHF communication is limited to line-of-sight transmissions. For this reason, more than anything else, antenna height affects effective range. The second most important consideration is the radiation pattern of the antenna, which is a factor of its construction. 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 As an antenna increases in length, its radiation pattern becomes more horizontally focused, meaning that more energy is directed perpendicular to the antenna, and less energy is directed above and below horizontal. Shorter antennas radiate energy uniformly above and below horizontal, resulting in less energy radiated perpendicular to the antenna. Antennas are rated by dB gain to reflect the relative increase in energy 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 171 of 313 2014 NMEA 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 realized from a more focused radiation pattern. A VHF 3-foot antenna may only be rated as a 3dB antenna, while a 9 dB antenna may be 19 feet (5.8 m) or more in length. 4885 4886 Figure 70 depicts exaggerated illustrations (a&b) to demonstrate how the difference in radiation pattern due to antenna length affects antenna performance. In a stable vessel condition, the higher gain antenna effectively puts more of the transmitter’s power where the receivers are – on the water. In cases of larger vessels that don’t typically roll and pitch to a large degree, the higher gain antenna works well. High gain antennas on sailboats can be a communication range disadvantage. 4887 4888 (a) High-gain Antenna 4889 4890 4891 (b) Low-gain Antenna 4892 4893 Figure 70: Effect of Antenna Radiation Pattern on Range When Heeling 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 The top diagram (a) illustrates a high-gain antenna on a vessel with a 20-degree heel angle. The narrowly focused pattern causes the signal to be focused over the top of the neighboring vessel, resulting in lower signal strength. The bottom diagram (b) illustrates how the broader radiation pattern of a lower gain antenna actually delivers a stronger signal to the neighboring vessels when the transmitting vessel is heeled. There is also a reciprocal function on receive, so if both vessels are heeling, the effect is more dramatic. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 172 of 313 2014 NMEA 4901 4902 4903 NOTE: At long distances, the ability to receive a signal is more dependent on the line-ofsight between transmitter and receiver, and the relatively lower gain of the shorter antenna is not a factor. 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 Sailboats and small vessels have relatively large variations in angle with respect to the horizon, due to heeling and/or trim angle while underway. Therefore, shorter antennas with a broader radiation pattern should be selected to maximize the effective signal when pitched or heeled. Larger vessels are more stable; they pitch and roll less in a given sea state and can take better advantage of the focused radiation pattern because they are less likely to overshoot their intended receiver. In either case, put the antenna as high as practical and avoid any conductive obstruction on the horizontal plane within 2 meters. 4914 4915 4916 4917 17.4 MF/HF SSB Transceiver Installation Requirements SSB Radio Transceivers shall be installed in accordance with the provisions identified in the following paragraphs. 17.4.1 General Requirements 4918 4919 The installation of a SSB Radio Transceiver onboard a vessel will require locating, mounting, and interconnecting the following components: 4920 4921 Transmitter/Receiver – This is the heart of the SSB installation. It transmits a high power RF signal and receives and demodulates incoming RF signals. 4922 4923 4924 Antenna Coupler – A device used to match the impedance of the transmitter/receiver to the antenna in order to provide maximum power transfer at the specific frequency in use. 4925 4926 Antenna – The antenna collects and radiates electromagnetic waves by converting RF electrical energy into electromagnetic energy, and vice versa. 4927 4928 4929 4930 Ground System – The counterpoise to the antenna that provides the sink, or ground path, for the RF current impressed on the antenna. The ground system including the connecting wire from the coupler is one half of the antenna system and should be considered carefully. 4931 4932 4933 Other Components – Optional components as provided by a specific manufacturer or required by the vessel owner, such as a remote control heads, speakers, a weather fax printer, or a modem. 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 Basic component interconnections and relationships are shown in Figure 71, which identifies each component and the required connections between them and other vessel resources. As the figure indicates, some variation on interconnection is expected, depending on the manufacturer, such as providing power for the antenna coupler via a control cable run between the transceiver and coupler. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 173 of 313 2014 NMEA 4939 4940 Figure 71: Basic SSB Components 4941 4942 17.4.2 Equipment Locations 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 The number and complexity of components involved in an SSB installation, as well as the power levels involved, means that every installation may involve compromises to get the most efficient transmitting capability within the constraints of the vessel on which it is installed. Ideally, the identified components should be installed with interconnections that are as short as possible to avoid excessive signal losses. 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 An SSB Radio Transceiver having integral display or controls shall be located and installed in accordance with Section 10, Displays. If a separate control head is provided, then the control head shall be installed in accordance with Section 10, Displays, and the transceiver may be mounted in a more ideal location adjacent to a power source and the antenna coupler, in accordance with manufacturer requirements. 4953 4954 A 12vdc SSB can draw as much as 25 Amps in transmit so the power cable should be sized accordingly. 4955 4956 4957 The antenna coupler shall be installed at the base of the antenna and connected directly to the antenna and counterpoise. In fact, the antenna starts at the output of the antenna coupler, and the lead-in wire is actually part of the antenna itself. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 174 of 313 2014 NMEA 4958 4959 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 17.4.3 SSB Transmission Line Requirements The RF transmission line connecting the SSB Radio Transceiver to the antenna coupler shall be installed in accordance with Section 7, Coaxial Cables. 17.4.4 SSB Antenna Requirements Ideally, an HF antenna is equal in length to 1/4 the wavelength of the signal being transmitted. The HF band ranges from 2 MHz to 22MHz, corresponding to an antenna about 11 feet (3.3 m) long at 22MHz and 120 feet (36.5 m) long at 2MHz. Clearly, any antenna chosen will be a compromise at some operational conditions. The antenna tuner matches the impedance of the antenna at the antenna end to the 50 ohm impedance at the transmitter end. Frequency in use to the impedance of the transmitter and transmission line. Each manufacturer has a specification for the antenna length that its coupler will work with. As a rule of thumb, the longer the antenna, the more efficient the lower frequency radiation will be (less power lost inside the coupler). 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 17.4.4.1 Lead-in Wire The lead-in wire is actually part of the antenna itself, and it must be installed so that signals radiated from the lead-in wire are not blocked or shunted to ground. The leadin wire connecting the antenna coupler to the antenna shall be of type GTO-15 or equivalent marine grade high Voltage cable, and shall be kept to the minimum length necessary to route the wire from antenna coupler to antenna without excess coils or looping of the wire back on itself. A minimum separation of 3 inches (8 cm) shall be maintained between the lead-in wire and any metallic objects that may be grounded. Figure 72 shows a typical standoff arrangement made from PVC electrical conduit and black tie-straps. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 175 of 313 2014 NMEA 4982 4983 Figure 72: Typical Standoff Construction 4984 NOTE: 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 Be sure to use UV resistant materials for standoffs. PVC water pipe and untreated tie-straps do not hold up under constant UV exposure to the elements, and will fail more frequently. 17.4.4.2 Whip Antennas Where a long wire antenna is impractical due to the size of the vessel or other aesthetic considerations, a whip antenna may be used. Whip antennas shall be installed in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. For long wire installations, refer to manufacturer-specific documentation. 17.4.4.3 Backstay and Other Rigging Antennas 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 The most effective antenna that may be found onboard vessels is the long wire antenna, frequently configured as a backstay or other rigging member of a vessel’s superstructure. Choose a rigging member that is outside the envelope formed by masts or other rigging. Backstay or rigging antennas shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements: 4998 4999 1. Rigging used as an antenna shall be insulated at both ends from other metallic objects, such as masts, booms, or other rigging. 5000 5001 5002 5003 2. Exposed rigging used as an antenna shall be protected from contact by the vessel crew either by installing the lower insulator at least 7 feet (2.1 m) from the deck or by shrouding the rigging where the lower insulator is less than 7 feet (2.1 m) from the deck. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 176 of 313 2014 NMEA 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 The following figures illustrate some of the alternatives that may be encountered when installing a backstay or rigging antenna. Figure 73 shows a typical installation on a ketch or large powerboat. The rigging used as an antenna is insulated 3 feet (0.9 m) from each mast, and the GTO-15 lead-in wire is allowed to form a drip loop before being attached to 3-inch (7.6 cm) or larger standoffs on the mast. Remember, the GTO15 is also part of the antenna and contributes to the overall length. Figure 73: Typical Ketch or Powerboat Antenna 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 A typical backstay installation is shown in Figure 74 with one insulator 3 feet (0.9 m) from the mast and one insulator positioned so it is at least 7 feet (2.1 m) from the deck. If the chain-plate is not grounded to the vessel’s ground system, an insulator is not required at the lower location, provided that the backstay is shrouded using an insulating material up to 7 feet (2.1 m) high. In this case, the GTO-15 lead-in wire may also run directly against the backstay without standoffs. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 177 of 313 2014 NMEA 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 Figure 74: Typical Backstay Installation For a split-backstay configuration, either the insulator should be installed above the split, or an additional insulator should be installed on one leg of the split, as shown in Figure 75.. The additional insulator is installed just below the split on the leg not being used as an antenna. The unused leg should be insulated even when the chain-plates are not grounded to avoid creating an inefficient antenna configuration. Figure 75: Typical Split Backstay 5028 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 178 of 313 2014 NMEA 5029 17.4.5 SSB Counterpoise (Ground) System 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 The SSB Ground system connects the SSB antenna to its counterpoise. It is critical to SSB performance and is the most complex ground system with regard to measurement and being able to describe an optimal installation aboard the many varied sizes and types of vessels. The primary purpose of the counterpoise is to provide the SSB system the means to radiate the maximum amount of RF energy from the antenna at the maximum efficiency. SSB performance is directly related to the layout, materials, equipment, and installation techniques used. 5037 5038 Two major considerations will affect the installation of the MF/HF SSB Ground system: 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 Whether or not the vessel hull is metal – Metal hull vessels work reasonably well in either salt or fresh water because the metal structure generally provides an adequate counterpoise and has a large contact area with the water. Usually a short ground strap from the coupler to the metal structure is all that is needed. Non-metallic hulls require construction of a good counterpoise, especially for freshwater operation. 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 Whether the vessel will be used primarily in salt or fresh water – Salt water provides better conductivity than fresh water. Vessels operated primarily in fresh water or vessels that traverse between fresh and salt water may require additional water contact or additional counterpoise material to reduce the impedance of the SSB Ground system and improve system efficiency. 5049 5050 5051 5052 A good counterpoise in a vessel operating in salt water can improve the performance from fair to excellent if properly planned and installed. If the SSB Ground system will incorporate or be part of the Lightning Ground system, then the SSB Ground system will also need to meet Lightning Ground system requirements. 5053 NOTE: 5054 5055 Multi-strand copper cable, as specified for general-purpose vessel wiring in ABYC E-11, will reduce SSB transceiver and antenna efficiency and should not be used in an SSB Ground system. See conductor requirements below. 5056 17.4.5.1 Installation in Metal Hull Vessels 5057 5058 5059 On metal hull vessels, the vessel hull provides the counterpoise and shall be considered the SSB Ground system. The SSB transceiver and antenna shall be connected to the vessel hull in accordance with the following provisions: 5060 5061 5062 5063 • The SSB antenna coupler shall be connected to the vessel using copper strap with a minimum width of 2 inches (5 cm) and minimum thickness of 3 millimeters or with an equivalent conductor (#4 AWG or larger copper wire with no more than seven strands, or 3/8 inch (10 mm) or larger copper tubing). 5064 5065 • The antenna coupler should be placed on the outside of the metal structure in a sheltered area, if available. 5066 5067 • The antenna coupler and control head may require ground isolation if the vessel’s DC power system is floating (DC Negative is not connected to ship’s ground). 5068 5069 5070 If a metal tower is present as part of the vessel construction, and the antenna and antenna coupler are mounted on the tower, the tower shall be used as the ground plane and shall have at least two suitable ground conductors run to the ship’s ground system. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 179 of 313 2014 NMEA 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 NOTE: Copper strap or copper wire shall not be directly connected to aluminum hulls or to other aluminum structures in order to prevent galvanic corrosion from occurring where the dissimilar metals come in contact. Connections shall be made using isolating connectors made specifically for that purpose. 17.4.5.2 Non-metal Hull Vessels 5076 5077 On non-metal hull vessels, the SSB Ground system shall consist of the following minimum features, illustrated in Figures 76 and 77 below. 5078 5079 5080 5081 • 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 The SSB counterpoise shall be created by either a ground plate external to the hull in contact with the water or a hull ground plane typically consisting of wire mesh molded into the hull below the waterline in accordance with either of the following guidelines: Ground Plate – A ground plate counterpoise shall have a minimum surface area in contact with the water of 2 square feet (0.2 m2). Hull Ground Plane – A mesh ground plane counterpoise shall be molded into the hull below the waterline and shall be located so that the hull in which it is molded will remain below the waterline at all anticipated angles of pitch and heel. The area of the ground plane should be as large as possible, but shall not be less than 100 square feet (10m2). 5090 5091 5092 5093 • Where the SSB tuner is displaced more than 10 feet (3 m) from a ground plate counterpoise, copper mesh shall be installed in the cabin overhead to serve as the counterpoise. A counterpoise installed in a cabin top shall have a minimum area of 100 square feet (10m2). 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 • The ground plate or hull ground plane, upper ground plane (if required), and the SSB antenna tuner shall be connected using copper strap with a minimum width of 2 inches (50 mm) and minimum thickness of 3 millimeters, or an equivalent conductor (#4 AWG or larger copper wire with no more than seven strands, or 3/8 inch (10 mm) or larger copper tubing). 5099 5100 • In some cases, it may be necessary to connect the mesh counterpoise to the hull ground plate to reduce capacitive effects between the counterpoise and sea surface. 5101 5102 5103 5104 • Due to boat construction, or electronics re-fits, a less efficient alternative is a network of copper strap, copper wire, or copper mesh connecting the SSB Ground system to the engine block(s), as well as connecting it to as many available bronze through-hull fittings as practical to increase the effective counterpoise. 5105 5106 5107 5108 • Leads from other ground systems shall be connected from the open end back to its basic ground bus to reduce spurious radiation, decrease the SSB Ground system impedance, and reduce RF interference. A well designed and properly installed system should not produce spurious noise. 5109 5110 5111 • If the vessel has mechanical clutch and throttle controls and the steering is mechanical or hydraulic with copper tubing, all helm station controls shall be grounded to the SSB Ground system. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 180 of 313 2014 NMEA 5112 5113 Figure 76: SSB Ground System Example 1 5114 5115 Figure 77: SSB Ground System Example 2 5116 NOTE: 5117 The effectiveness of the SSB counterpoise is dependent on both the size of the counterpoise and the distance between the counterpoise and the antenna tuner. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 181 of 313 2014 NMEA 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 The smaller the counterpoise, or farther the counterpoise is from the antenna tuner, the less effective the antenna will be, especially at lower frequencies. 17.4.6 VHF & SSB Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 182 of 313 2014 NMEA 5123 18 5124 5125 5126 COMPUTER SYSTEM INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installation of computers used for navigation and other applications onboard vessels. 18.1 General Considerations 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 Computer capabilities and environmental toughness must be matched to the operational tasks to be performed and/or location where the computer will be used. This section focuses on computers that are permanently installed on vessels to perform navigational and other tasks. These tasks fall into one of the following categories and are supported by specific application programs installed on the computer. 5132 5133 5134 Primary Navigation/Display – an application providing navigation or other data critical to the safe operation of the vessel, and for which there is no readily available second source. 5135 5136 Secondary Navigation/Display – an application providing navigation or other data, which duplicates data also provided on at least one other dedicated navigation device. 5137 5138 5139 Auxiliary Operations – an application providing other services used for vessel operation that are not critical to safe operation, such as power management, area surveillance, or heating/air-conditioning/lighting control. 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 Administrative Management – an application related to administrative activities, such as vessel manifest, accounting, or other vessel management activities. Administrative applications include office applications such as word processing, spreadsheets, electronic communications such as e-mail, Web browsing, and file downloading, and/or other functions necessary to support administrative tasking. 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 18.1.1 Computer Types To readily identify computers that should be used for different task categories and in particular environments, these Installation Standards define a range of computer types and lists characteristics usually exhibited within those computer type definitions. The defined computer types in the following subsections do not specify marine computer requirements, but rather identify minimum environmental toughness thresholds exhibited by computers of the same type. Specific computer requirements are identified by software application manufacturers and include processor type and speed, memory, and any display or other port requirement. 18.1.1.1 Rugged Marine Computer Device A Rugged Marine Computer is any computer, display, or component thereof that has been built for the marine environment and designed to meet or exceed requirements identified in Table 37.. Devices meeting these requirements may include dedicated purpose electronics sold for a specific marine function or use, such as multi-function displays or instruments. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 183 of 313 2014 NMEA 5161 Table 377: Minimum Environmental Protection Requirement Ambient Temperature (non-operational) Humidity (operational) Vibration Protected -15º to 55ºC Exposed -25º to 55ºC 93 % @ 40ºC IEC 60068-2-6 (2-13.2Hz @ 1mm., 13.2-100Hz @ 7m/s) N/A IEC 60529 (IPX6) Rain and Spray Corrosion Note: Requirements identified are an applicable subset of IEC 60945 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 18.1.1.2 Portable Computer Devices A Portable Computer is a computer not specifically intended for marine use but because it is intended for frequent transportation, is nonetheless built to withstand frequent and extended motion and vibration. These devices are not designed to prevent water, dust, or other harmful ingress and should not be used except in protected environments. 18.1.1.3 General Purpose Computer Devices General Purpose Computers include all other computers, displays, or components thereof that do not meet the requirements of either Rugged Marine Computers or Portable Computers. These devices should be used only in protected environments and/or only for administrative applications. 18.1.2 Selection and Application 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 Selection and application of onboard computers involves consideration of both the type of application to be supported and the relative exposure of the intended operating location to the marine environment. Exposed locations are those where the computer or its peripherals are open to the marine environment, and also those normally sheltered locations where regular opening of a door or hatch during normal operations could result in spray or other environmental infiltration into the compartment. Sheltered locations are those that are fully enclosed and isolated from the elements under all operational conditions. A fully enclosed equipment cabinet located in an otherwise exposed location can be considered a sheltered location, provided it remains sealed under all operational conditions. 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 Table 38. provides a matrix that shows what computer types are appropriate for which application areas, depending on whether the computer will be installed in an exposed location. The most critical applications and most rugged computer types occupy the upper left-hand corner, progressing to less critical applications going right across the columns, and less rugged equipment going down the rows. To use the table, consider the most critical application planned to be hosted on the computer, and read off the applicability code corresponding to the planned computer type and environment. The applicability code is identified as Satisfactory, Removable Only, or Unsatisfactory. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 184 of 313 2014 NMEA 5192 Table 388: Computer Application Matrix Computer Type Rugged Portable General Purpose Primary Secondary Auxiliary Administrative Navigation Navigation Operations Management Exposed Sheltered Exposed Sheltered Exposed Sheltered Exposed Sheltered S S S S S S S S U S R S R S S S U U U U U S U S S = Satisfactory R = Satisfactory when a removable mounting is provided and when the connections remaining when the computer is removed are watertight U = Unsatisfactory 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 18.2 Installation Requirements Permanently installed computers and peripherals shall be installed in accordance with Section 10, Displays, and the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. 18.2.1 Uninterruptible Power 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 Computers installed in accordance with this section shall be provided power from a distribution system that includes a minimum of two power sources with manual or automatic means to switch between the primary and secondary sources. A maximum transfer time of 10 milliseconds or less is required to ensure that the computer remains functional without rebooting. Examples of multiple power sources include, but are not limited to: 5204 5205 5206 5207 1. For computers that operate from DC power, the two sources may include an alternator and a battery. Since there is no need to actively switch to battery power when the alternator is no longer producing power, the maximum transfer time is met. 5208 5209 5210 5211 2. For computers that operate from AC power, the two sources may include a generator and an inverter. An active switch, usually within the inverter, typically requires more than 10 milliseconds to transfer power when the generator stops. 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219 5220 5221 In the event that transfer between primary or secondary is performed manually, or that automatic transfers take place in more than 10 milliseconds, an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) suited to marine applications shall be connected immediately upstream of the computer and its peripherals. A UPS shall be sized to maintain 125% of the power required by the computer and all its peripherals for the time required to execute a transfer, or five minutes, whichever is greater. 18.2.2 Interfaces Interfaces employed to connect to peripherals and other systems shall be connected in accordance with this paragraph. Table 39 identifies common computer interfaces and operational limitations of each. 5222 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 185 of 313 2014 NMEA 5223 Table 39: Common Computer Interfaces Interface Type Recommended Maximum Cable Length Maximum Devices per Connection Speed Ethernet Bus See Section 8.4 NMEA 0183 PtoMP See Section 8.2 NMEA 2000® Bus See Section 8.3 Parallel (IEEE-1284) Bus 7.5 meters Up to 2 MBps PS/2 PtoP 30 meters N/A Serial (EIA/TIA RS-232-C) PtoP 15 meters 1 19.2 kbps USB 1.1 Bus 3 meters 127 12 Mbps USB 2.0 Bus 5 meters 127 480 Mbps USB 3.0 (current version) Bus 3 meters 127 5Gbps (625MB/sec) VGA/SVGA PtoP 30 meters 1 N/A Bus = Bi-directional communication between multiple devices, may use bus master. PtoMP = Point-to-multipoint – unidirectional communication between a single talker and multiple listeners. PtoP = Point-to-point connection between two, and only two, devices. 5224 5225 NOTE: 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 When extending computer interfaces to the recommended maximum length, a single high-quality cable should be used rather than connecting multiple shorter cables together to create a longer length. 18.2.2.1 USB Universal Serial Bus Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices are connected in a hierarchical tree with the bus controller at the root of the tree, hubs forming the branches, and peripherals at the ends of each branch. A maximum of five hubs may lie between the root controller and any peripheral, thus the maximum distance between a root controller and a peripheral is 30 meters, as illustrated in Figure 78 and Table 40.. Note that if the peripheral only supports USB 1.1, the link to the peripheral is limited to 3 meters, limiting the total distance to 28 meters. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 186 of 313 2014 NMEA 5236 5237 5238 5239 Figure 788: USB System Diagram 5240 Table 40: USB Length Considerations by Version 5241 5242 5243 NOTE: 5244 *The USB 3.0 specification does not detail a maximum cable length, but 3.0 meters or 9.8 feet has been recommended 5245 5246 18.2.2.2 USB Hubs 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 USB Hubs may be self-powered or may be bus-powered, drawing their power from the hub located between them and the root. A self-powered USB hub generally uses an external power supply and can provide up to 500 mA to devices connected to each port. However, a bus-powered hub is limited to providing only 100 mA to devices connected to each of its ports. This imposes two practical limitations on USB bus layout. 5252 5253 • A bus-powered hub will have a maximum of four ports, as it will draw 100 mA for each of its four ports plus 100 mA to power its own electronics. 5254 5255 • A bus-powered hub may not be connected to another bus-powered hub with other ports, as insufficient power will be available for any downstream devices. 5256 5257 5258 • A total of six cables can be strung together using five hubs to achieve the maximum total length. In practice, the cable to the USB device counts as one of the six cables, reducing the maximum total length. 5259 5260 As Figure 79. shows, these limitations have an impact on extended chains, as some of the hubs farther from the root hub will need to be self-powered as well. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 187 of 313 2014 NMEA 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 Figure 79: USB Layout Considerations Power, Input/Output, and other electrical connections shall be secured using captive fasteners, such as retaining clips or screws, whenever possible. Other methods of retention, such as cover plates, Velcro straps, or nylon tie-straps, should be used for all connectors that do not incorporate captive fasteners in their construction. 18.2.3 Purpose-built Equipment Configuration All computers intended for use in primary navigation applications shall be purposebuilt and optimized for the intended applications. Means shall be provided to control access to hardware and software used to install/modify software, to change configurations, or to read and write data in accordance with the provisions contained in the following paragraphs. 18.2.3.1 Physical Access Control Removable storage devices, such as CD-ROM, DVD, Zip, or other drives, and all interface connections shall be protected from casual use or connection. Protection may be provided by installing secured doors or removable panels that require the use of tools or keys to gain access to the drive or interface. 18.2.3.2 Passwords Where general access is provided through user accounts, a password-protected Administrator account shall be created. The Administrator account shall have access privileges to all operating system resources for the purpose of installing and modifying software, changing configurations, and reading or writing data to/from sources other than built-in or permanently attached storage. A separate operational account shall be created for default operation. The operational account shall have the minimum access privileges necessary to correctly operate all intended applications. The operational 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 188 of 313 2014 NMEA 5287 5288 5289 account also may have a blank password and/or be configured to auto-login on powerup. 18.2.3.3 Software Installation and Configuration 5290 5291 5292 5293 5294 5295 5296 Computer hardware shall meet or exceed all system requirements and recommendations specified for each installed software application. Computers should have installed only the software necessary to perform the intended functions. Where a supplier has previously installed software prior to final configuration by the dealer, including but not limited to an operating system, trial software, and/or system utilities, unnecessary software should be removed and unnecessary services should be disabled prior to installing navigational software and data. 5297 5298 5299 5300 Software installation should follow a logical prescribed order known to be free of conflicts between software applications and the operating system, or between software applications. As each software module is installed, available software patches should be applied in accordance with known version compatibility for installed software. 5301 5302 5303 5304 Other configuration settings, such as user preferences, start-up scripts, and network and interface settings, should also follow a prescribed order to ensure that no configuration item is overlooked, and to verify the operation of each configuration change as it is made. 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 Whenever possible, computers should be installed as part of a closed, dedicated navigation system and should only be interconnected with other computers and devices similarly configured. The requirements of this section serve to lock down the configuration to prevent installation of software and/or access by other systems except under controlled circumstances. When connections are required to devices outside the closed navigation system, additional measures to firewall the system and provide virus and spyware scanning on the external interface are required. These measures are not addressed in these Installation Standards. 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 18.2.3.4 Data Backup Computers with installed applications that save user-entered data, such as preferences, waypoints, or other operational data, shall be provided with a secondary means of storing such data that is automatically updated periodically. Backup data may be made available for off-vessel storage at the discretion of the installing dealer. 18.2.4 Documentation and Restoration The following documentation shall be provided to the vessel owner for each installed computer and, when possible and appropriate, shall be kept on file by the installing dealer for future reference: • Operating system and installed software distribution disks. 5322 5323 5324 • Installation and upgrade list identifying versions, authorization codes, and installation order for all installed software, drivers, and upgrades. 5325 5326 • Password list for all administrative and operational accounts, and any service provider accounts accessible from the installed computer. 5327 • Connection diagram showing all interfaces and connected peripherals. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 189 of 313 2014 NMEA 5328 5329 5330 • Baseline configuration information as required, including start-up scripts, network and interface settings, or any other user interface settings that are altered from their installed defaults. 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 • Ghost or other image of the computer hard disk for restoring the computer to its asdelivered state. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 190 of 313 2014 NMEA 5336 19 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS (AIS) INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installing Automatic Identification Systems (AIS) and the necessary interfaces to receive required information. 19.1 General Considerations Automatic Identification Systems are used to exchange navigation information between participating vessels and between participating vessels and shore-based vessel traffic control systems in order to improve vessel traffic safety while reducing vessel-to-vessel and vessel-to-shore voice radio traffic. Navigation information is exchanged automatically, in near-real time, by AIS transceivers operating in the VHF band. Each AIS periodically broadcasts information about the vessel it is installed on, including the vessel name, call sign, position, course, speed, heading, navigation status, dimensions, type, and other important parameters. The information is received by all AIS-equipped stations in the vicinity and is made available for review by vessel operators. 5350 5351 5352 5353 NOTE: AIS data can be invaluable; however, as with any source of navigation information and owing in part to improperly installed AIS equipment on other vessels, it should not be solely relied upon in making navigational and collisionavoidance decisions. 5354 19.1.1 AIS Classes 5355 5356 Two different classes of AIS are defined, differing in both the data parameters exchanged and the frequency of that exchange. The two classes are: 5357 5358 5359 5360 Class A – Broadcasts navigation data at 2- to 10-second intervals when underway depending on the vessel’s speed, or every 3 minutes while at anchor. Supplemental data is transmitted at 6-minute intervals when underway and while at anchor. Class A transmit power is capable of up to 12 Watts. 5361 5362 5363 5364 Class B – Same as Class A, except that the navigation data is broadcast every 30 seconds when underway, or every 3 minutes when moving less than 2 knots, and some parameters are not required. Supplemental data is transmitted at 6-minute intervals at all times. Class B transmit power is 2 Watts. 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 Table 41 identifies the data parameters transmitted or received by Class A and Class B devices. In addition to the AIS Classes, which are designated to satisfy specific carriage requirements, vessels not required to carry AIS may be equipped with AIS receivers that only receive navigation data from other vessels and do not broadcast their own vessel information. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation for further information on what information is received and available to the vessel operator. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 191 of 313 2014 NMEA 5372 5373 Table 41: Vessel Navigation Parameters for AIS Class A and Class B Parameter Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) Number COLREGS Navigation Status Rate of Turn Speed Over Ground Position (Longitude and Latitude) Position Accuracy (indication of differential GPS or other correction applied) Course Over Ground True Heading Time Stamp (UTC time when parameters generated) Supplemental Parameters (6 Minutes) International Maritime Organization (IMO) Number Radio Call Sign Vessel Name Vessel Type Vessel Dimensions Position Reference (Location of GPS or other on vessel) Position Type (GPS or other) Vessel Draft Vessel Destination Viewing Vessel on the internet Estimated Time of Arrival Class A Y Y Y Y Y Y Class B Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 In addition, Class A AIS devices have a built-in or dedicated GPS receiver and also have the ability to transmit and receive text safety messages and binary messages. Class B AIS devices also have a built-in or dedicated GPS receiver, and are required only to receive text safety messages, but some models may support sending pre-formatted text safety messages. 5379 5380 5381 5382 Class B AIS devices must include a built-in GPS receiver and may not accept GPS data from another source. If an external GPS antenna is required, you must use the manufacturer specified GPS antenna. You cannot connect a Class B AIS to an existing GPS receiver or share an existing GPS antenna. 5383 19.1.2 AIS Installation Documentation 5384 5385 5386 The following documentation shall be provided to the vessel owner for each AIS installed in accordance with this standard and is required for classification approval of the installation. 5387 5388 5389 1. Antenna Layout and Arrangement – showing the location of the GPS and VHF antenna, as well as the distance to other vessel antennas, in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. 5390 5391 5392 2. Battery Calculation – listing all equipment, including the AIS, connected to the emergency communications battery, in accordance with Section 4.1.2.1, Emergency Communications Battery Capacity. 5393 5394 3. Block Diagram – showing all connected interfaces and the location of connected equipment. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 192 of 313 2014 NMEA 5395 4. Type Approval Certificate – from the AIS manufacturer’s documentation. 5396 5. Confirmation of proper MMSI programming- 5397 a. Vessel type 5398 b. Nav receiver interfaced 5399 c. GPS antenna(s) position relative to the bow/stern & port/starboard sides. 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 19.2 Installation Requirements AIS equipment and antennas installed in accordance with this standard shall be located and interfaced in accordance with the following paragraphs. 19.2.1 Antenna Location 5405 5406 5407 5408 The AIS VHF antenna shall be selected in accordance with Section 17.2.3, VHF Antenna Requirements, and shall be installed in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. Digital transmissions as used by the VHF data link are more susceptible to interference created by reflections from masts and booms than normal analog/voice transmissions. 5409 The following additional guidelines are provided to minimize such interference: 5410 1. The proper AIS / VHF antennas should be in the 3 - 4.5dB range 5411 5412 2. The AIS VHF antenna should be located a minimum of 6 feet (1.8 m) horizontally from any construction made of conductive materials. 5413 5414 5415 3. The AIS VHF antenna should be located directly above or below the vessel’s main VHF antenna, with no horizontal separation and a minimum of 6 feet (1.8 m) vertical separation. 5416 5417 5418 4. The AIS data transmit frequencies are on the high end of the VHF-FM band @ 162 MHz This differs from the VHF voice transmit frequencies centered at 156.800 MHz. 5419 5. Class A AIS systems require a dedicated AIS / VHF antennas 5420 5421 6. It is recommended that Class B AIS systems use the Manufacturer’s recommended antennas for proper VHF and GPS operation 5422 5423 5424 7. Class B and Receive only AIS systems can be fitted with a VHF antenna splitter but some reduction of VHF reception will occur unless the splitter has a preamplifier to negate the 3dB attenuation of feeding two units from one antenna. 5425 5426 8. Class B AIS should only be fitted with a splitter designed for Transceiver use that can switch both the VHF and AIS feeds. 5427 9. Class A must be connected directly to the antenna and not through a splitter. 5428 5429 10. The U.S. Coast Guard recommends that all AIS systems must remain transmitting at all times when the vessel is underway. 5430 5431 11. When so equipped, the AIS transceiver’s GPS antenna shall be installed in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. 5432 5433 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 193 of 313 2014 NMEA 5434 5435 5436 Figure 80: AIS Antenna mounting and spacing considerations 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 19.2.2 Power Source AIS equipment shall be connected to a power source suitable for emergency use in accordance with Section 4.1.2, Emergency Communications Battery. Some Class A AIS’s are 24vdc only. Power consumption can be as much as 7-8 amps on 12 volt units. Wires should be sized accordingly. 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 19.2.3 Equipment Location AIS equipment shall be installed in a manner that permits normal operation of the minimum keyboard and display, if supplied, without the user having to leave the helm or other normal watch keeping position. Operation may be provided from the AIS built-in keyboard and display if supplied, or by the equivalent functionality of another display system. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 194 of 313 2014 NMEA 5451 5452 5453 5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460 19.2.3.1 Pilot Plug Class A AIS installations shall provide a pilot input/output port near the pilot’s normal watch keeping position to facilitate the connection of a Personal Pilot Unit (PPU), which communicates using an NMEA 0183-HS interface. The input/output port shall be an AMP/Receptacle (Square Flanged or Free-Hanging), Shell size 11, 9-pin, Std. Sex 206486-1/2 or equivalent, terminated as shown in Table 42 below. Table 42: AIS Pilot Plug Input/output Port Pin Out Pin 1 4 5 6 9 5461 5462 5463 5464 5465 5466 5467 5468 5469 5470 Signal Transmit A Transmit B Receive A Receive B Shield 19.2.4 Data Interface AIS equipment communicates with other equipment over either NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® interfaces for the purposes of displaying received data from other vessels and acquiring own-ship data from equipment to send to other vessels. These two interfaces are depicted in Figure 81, which also shows in (a) that when NMEA 0183 interfaces are used, several interfaces are required to facilitate connecting multiple inputs. Due to the bus-oriented nature of NMEA 2000® shown in (b), only a single interface is required and the necessary sensors and displays all attach to the NMEA 2000® backbone. A single NMEA 0183 interface may be provided to support the Pilot input/output port, or other legacy displays. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 195 of 313 2014 NMEA 5471 5472 Figure 81: AIS Interfacing Options 5473 5474 5475 5476 5477 5478 In general for a Class A installation, equipment installed onboard that provides the information identified by the parameters in Table 43 should be connected to the AIS. The equipment and inputs selected should be the same as selected and displayed for vessel navigation. Table 43 identifies the preferred navigational data formats used by the interface. The installer should ensure that equipment connected to the AIS supports the data formats identified, and if necessary has been configured to use those formats. 5479 5480 5481 For a Class B installation, no external sensors are required. However, some Class B devices with built-in displays may make use of a vessel heading sensor, if available. Check the manual for the Class B AIS device to verify. 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 NOTE: The Geodetic Datum for navigation position data should be WGS 84. In addition to confirming that a datum message is available on the interface, the installer should confirm that WGS 84 is selected. This does not apply to Class B devices, since they cannot accept GPS data from an external GPS receiver. Their built-in GPS always uses WGS84. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 196 of 313 2014 NMEA 5488 5489 Table 43: AIS Navigation Data Formats Data Reference Datum Positioning system: Time of position Latitude / Longitude Position accuracy Speed Over Ground (SOG) 5490 5496 5497 5498 VBW VTG, OSD, RMC Course Over Ground (COG) RMC VTG, OSD Heading HDT OSD RAIM indicator Rate of Turn (ROT) GBS ROT NMEA 2000® Parameter Group 129044 Datum 129029 GNSS Position Data 128259 Speed 129028 COG & SOG, Rapid Update 130577 Direction Data 129028 COG & SOG, Rapid Update 130577 Direction Data 127237 Heading/Track Control 127250 Vessel Heading 130577 Direction Data 129029 GNSS Position Data 127251 Rate of Turn 19.2.5 Long-Range Option 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 NMEA 0183 Sentence Format Preferred Optional DTM GNS GGA, RMC GLL A long-range interface is available on Class A AIS units. The interface is intended to be connected to compatible long-range communications systems, such as Inmarsat-C or MF/HF Radio Transceivers. If available, connect the AIS to the long-range communications system in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 19.3 Configuration AIS installed in accordance with this standard shall be configured with vessel and operational information in accordance with the following paragraphs. 19.3.1 Vessel Data 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 AIS depends on accurate information about the vessel and its operational status to fulfill its safety critical role. The following information shall be entered both into the AIS and on the vessel commissioning checklist. Electronic entry is accomplished with the AIS manual keyboard or other configuration tool using the appropriate data format. Configuration information should be password protected to prevent inadvertent alteration. 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) Number (Class B devices only allow the MMSI number to be entered once. Enter it carefully. If it is necessary to change the MMSI, you must contact the manufacturer for assistance) IMO Vessel Number (Does not apply to Class B) Radio Call Sign Vessel Name Vessel Type, in accordance with Table 44. GPS or other electronic position fixing antenna location/reference position, in accordance with Section 19.3.2 5514 5515 Two-digit Vessel Type identifiers are constructed by selecting the appropriate first and second digits from Table 44. For example, a cargo ship not carrying dangerous goods, 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 197 of 313 2014 NMEA 5516 5517 5518 harmful substances, or marine pollutants would use identifier 70. Pleasure craft would use identifier 37. Table 44: Vessel Type Identifiers First Digit Meaning 1 – Reserved 2 - WIG 4 - HSC 6 - Passenger Vessels 7 - Cargo Vessels 8 - Tankers 9 - Other Vessel Types 3 – General 5 - Special Craft Second Digit Meaning 0 - Vessels of this type not carrying dangerous goods, harmful substances, or marine pollutants 1 - Carrying dangerous goods, harmful substances, or marine pollutants; IMO hazard or pollutant category A 2 - Carrying dangerous goods, harmful substances, or marine pollutants; IMO hazard or pollutant category B 3 - Carrying dangerous goods, harmful substances, or marine pollutants; IMO hazard or pollutant category C 4 - Carrying dangerous goods, harmful substances, or marine pollutants; IMO hazard or pollutant category D 5 - Reserved 6 - Reserved 7 - Reserved 8 - Reserved 9 - No additional information 0 - Fishing 1 - Towing 2 - Towing and length of the tow exceeds 200 m or breadth exceeds 25 m 3 - Engaged in dredging or underwater operations 4 - Engaged in diving operations 5 - Engaged in military operations 6 - Sailing 7 - Pleasure Craft 8 - Reserved 9 - Reserved 0 - Pilot vessel 1 - Search and rescue vessels 2 - Tugs 3 - Port tenders 4 - Vessels with antipollution facilities or equipment 5 - Law enforcement vessels 6 - Spare, for assignments to local vessels 7 - Spare, for assignments to local vessels 8 - Medical transports (as defined in the 1949 Geneva Convention and Additional Protocols) 9 - Ships according to IMO Resolution No 18 (Mob-83) 5519 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 198 of 313 2014 NMEA 5520 19.3.2 Reference Point 5521 5522 5523 Vessel dimensions and the location of the electronic position fixing antenna in meters are determined using four values entered into the AIS. Figure 82 shows how to determine the four values in accordance with the following definitions: 5524 5525 A The distance between the reference electronic position fixing antenna and the bow of the vessel (up to 511 meters) 5526 5527 B The distance between the reference electronic position fixing antenna and the stern of the vessel (up to 511 meters) 5528 A+B The vessel’s length 5529 5530 C The distance between the reference electronic position fixing antenna and the port side of the vessel (up to 63 meters) 5531 5532 D The distance between the reference electronic position fixing antenna and the starboard side of the vessel (up to 63 meters) 5533 5534 5535 5536 C+D The vessel’s beam Use the maximum value of 511 or 63 meters for length and beam dimensions, respectively, when the actual values exceed those maximums. 5537 A B A C GPS/Reference Location D B a) b) C 5538 D Distance (m) 0 – 511 m 511 m = 511 m or Greater 0 – 511 m 511 m = 511 m or Greater 0 – 63 m 63 m = 63 m or Greater 0 – 63 m 63 m = 63 m or Greater When reference location and vessel dimensions are unavailable use A = B = C = D = 0. When reference location is unavailable but vessel dimensions are available use A = C = 0, B ≠ 0, D ≠ 0. Figure 82: Determining Reference Electronic Position Fixing Antenna Location 5539 5540 5541 5542 19.3.3 AIS Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 199 of 313 2014 NMEA 5543 20 5544 5545 5546 SATELLITE TV & COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM INSTALLATION This section identifies recommended standards and practices for installing satellite communications and entertainment systems. 20.1 General Considerations 5547 5548 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 Satellite communications systems are used for a wide variety of marine communications needs – voice, video, data, fax, e-mail and, Internet. The increasing number of applications leads to a wide variety of equipment and options available, resulting in a range of installation requirements. While some low-bandwidth applications are possible with fixed antenna arrays, a number of satellite applications require the use of a motion compensated antenna, where the antenna position is controlled to compensate for the vessel’s motion while underway. The antenna arrays are usually enclosed in a Satellite Dome for protection. 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 A typical block diagram that illustrates the variations in configuration likely to be encountered is shown in Figure 83. The block diagram shows the Satellite Dome housing the satellite antenna array, which is connected to a controller located below deck in a protected space. The controller serves as the configuration interface with the Satellite Dome and may provide power to the Satellite Dome. It is connected to the Satellite Dome by a multi-conductor cable supplied by the manufacturer, or by using a length of coaxial cable, which combines both power and signal in one cable. 5562 5563 Figure 83: Typical Satellite System Block Diagram 5564 5565 5566 5567 An operator interface is provided for configuration and control. It may be integral to the controller or may be provided in a separate display (not shown) that can then be located where it is more convenient for the operator. Figure 76 also shows a number of 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 200 of 313 2014 NMEA 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 other possible connections to equipment that may be required depending on the specific satellite system installed. Other equipment, only some of which is depicted in the figure, includes receivers and televisions, signal splitters, selection/matrix switches, laptops, phone systems, and/or vessel motion sensors, such as a compass or gyro controller. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation to determine what additional equipment is recommended or required, and how to attach that equipment to the controller or the Satellite Dome. 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 Manufacturer documentation may refer to “above deck” units or equipment (ADU or ADE) and “below deck” units or equipment (BDU or BDE). When used, these terms generally refer to all the equipment provided by the manufacturer for installation either “above deck” in an exposed location, or “below deck” in a sheltered location. It is important to ensure that any equipment designated as BDU or BDE by the manufacturer is installed in an appropriately sheltered location. 5581 NOTE: 5582 5583 5584 TVRO, VSAT, GPS, and Satellite Radio systems are examples of special purpose satellite communications systems where the control unit and end user interface are sometimes integrated into a single enclosure. Satellite Dome/antenna mounting for these units follows the same restrictions and guidance given below. 5585 20.1.1 Satellite Dome Basics 5586 5587 5588 5589 Satellite communications systems depend on line-of-sight radio transmissions to and from satellites that orbit the earth in well-defined patterns and schedules. Depending on the service in use, the required satellites may be geostationary, Low Earth Orbit (LEO) or Medium Earth Orbit (MEO). 5590 5591 5592 5593 5594 Geostationary satellites orbit at an altitude of 22,753.2 Statute Miles positioned directly above the equator. Their orbital velocity matches the Earth’s rotational speed and therefore, each satellite always appears in the same relative position in the sky. In order to maintain view of a satellite, the vessel antenna continuously repositions as the vessel position changes. 5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 5601 5602 5603 5604 LEO and MEO satellites generally cross from one horizon to the other while in use. In some applications, LEO and MEO satellites are distributed so that there are at least two satellites above the horizon at any time. Regardless of satellite orbit type, continued system function is dependent on an unobstructed line-of-sight to the selected satellite at all times. Figure 84 shows the typical sweep range and impact of nearby obstructions to the line-of-sight between the Satellite Dome and satellites in orbit. In the situation shown, line-of-sight to a satellite near the horizon has been obstructed by a mast or cabin that projects into the required signal path, even though the height of the mast or cabin is not higher than the Satellite Dome height. The system will not be able to communicate with the blocked satellite under this condition. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 201 of 313 2014 NMEA 5605 5606 5607 Figure 84: Line-of-Sight Interference 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 Potential obstructions may not be readily apparent when the system is being installed, due to the fact that the relative position of the required satellites will be different when the vessel is underway than the relative position when in port. Communication with geostationary satellites is sometimes found to be obstructed only when the vessel maintains a certain heading. When such a heading occurs in a heavily used route, the equipment is essentially inoperative during that entire leg of the voyage. 5614 5615 5616 5617 Potential obstructions are not always located on the vessel, but may be located near the vessel when in port. The installer should inquire about regularly used routes and ports, and check the relative bearings from the planned Satellite Dome location to ensure that no unanticipated obstructions will be discovered. 5618 5619 There are several applications that are now available for Smartphones and Tablets that can help troubleshoot signal issues. 5620 20.1.2 Satellite System Installation Documentation 5621 5622 The following documentation shall be provided to the vessel owner for each satellite communications system installed in accordance with this standard. 5623 5624 5625 1. Antenna Layout and Arrangement – showing the location of the GPS and VHF antennas, as well as the distance to other vessel antennas, in accordance with Section 9, Antennas. 5626 5627 2. Block Diagram – showing all connected interfaces and the location of connected equipment. 5628 5629 3. Configuration Parameters – listing all configured satellite identifiers and access codes. 5630 5631 5632 4. Photographs- pictures of antenna locations from multiple angles for future reference. This can assist in troubleshooting if a vessel is at sea or away from the local port. See Figure 85. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 202 of 313 2014 NMEA 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 Figure 85: Satellite System Installation Photograph 20.2 Installation Requirements Satellite communications equipment installed in accordance with this standard shall be located and interfaced in accordance with the following paragraphs. 20.2.1 Satellite Dome Location and Mounting 5640 5641 The Satellite Dome shall be installed in a well-supported location in accordance with the following requirements: 5642 5643 5644 1. The Satellite Dome shall have a clear line-of-sight view of as much of the sky as is practical. Choose a location where masts or other structures do not block the satellite signal from the antenna, as shown in Figure 84.. 5645 5646 2. Avoid placing in locations where people could potentially be radiated. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation and recommendations. 5647 5648 5649 5650 5651 3. The Satellite Dome should be located a minimum of 6 feet (1.8 m) away from other transmitting antennas (HF, VHF, and AIS) that may generate signals which may interfere with the Satellite Dome Assembly. Although radio interference is not common, the farther away the Satellite Dome Assembly is from these other antennas, the less impact their operation could have on it. 5652 5653 4. The Satellite Dome shall be located so that it is outside the vertical beam width of any radar array located within 6 feet (1.8 m), as shown in Figure 86.. 5654 5655 5656 5. The Satellite Dome shall be rigidly mounted to the boat. If necessary, reinforce the mounting area to assure that it does not flex due to boat motion or vibration. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 203 of 313 2014 NMEA 5657 5658 5659 Figure 86: Radar Vertical Beam width 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 NOTE: Motion compensated antennas can be damaged by uncontrolled motion. The source of power for the Satellite Dome shall be selected to ensure that it is available and energized whenever the vessel is underway. If power cannot be applied while underway the antenna mechanism should be restrained in accordance with the manufactures guidelines. 5666 5667 5668 5669 NOTE: If the antenna must be placed within the vertical beam width of the radar antenna a no transmit zone should be programmed into the radar to avoid damage to the satellite dome antenna. 5670 20.2.2 Control Unit Installation 5671 5672 5673 The control unit is not usually used by the vessel operator while piloting the vessel. It may be installed in any convenient location that meets all manufacturer requirements for protection from the environment and grounding. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 204 of 313 2014 NMEA 5674 20.2.3 Satellite Communications System Grounding 5675 5676 5677 The satellite communications system should be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s ground connection guidelines. All manufacturer-identified ground connections shall be connected to the vessel RF ground system. 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683 The Satellite Dome assembly shall be grounded by making a connection using a suitably sized ring terminal to one of the Satellite Dome mounting bolts or, if the Satellite Dome housing where the bolts connect is non-conductive, to a suitable connection to the Satellite Dome internal assembly. Serrated washers will ensure a good connection and should be sealed after assembly to prevent the connection from corroding. 5684 5685 5686 5687 NOTE: Television Receive Only (TVRO) satellite Domes are usually not grounded in order to prevent creating a ground loop by interconnecting the RF ground system with the AC grounding system via the television receiver. Refer to manufacturerspecific documentation.. 5688 20.2.4 Connections 5689 5690 5691 • Connections from the Satellite Dome to the control unit and/or other transceivers are made using either coaxial cable or multi-conductor cable provided by the manufacturer. 5692 5693 5694 5695 • Coaxial cables shall be installed in accordance with Section 7, Coaxial Cables. Where multi-conductor cables must be cut and reconnected to facilitate fishing cables through towers, arches, and behind cabin walls, splicing shall be provided using crimp-type ring-lugs and suitably sized terminal strips. 5696 5697 5698 • The location of such terminal strips shall be either within a protected area of the vessel or contained within a waterproof enclosure, and shall be noted in the system documentation 5699 5700 • All outdoor connections shall be sealed with dielectric grease, self-vulcanizing tape or rubber boots to prevent water ingress and corrosion. 5701 • Maintain all bend radii and be sure to include service loops on all cables. 5702 • Strain relief and label all cables 5703 5704 • Note all system documentation. 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 20.2.5 Satellite System Installation Testing For testing, troubleshooting and commissioning, refer to Section 22 and Appendix B 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 205 of 313 2014 NMEA 5710 21 SECURITY, TRACKING, AND VIDEO / CAMERA INSTALLATION 5711 21.1 Purpose and Scope 5712 5713 5714 5715 5716 5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726 5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 Given the inherent nature of security equipment onboard, it tends to be more of a personalized job between the installer and owner/crew. The panels, sensors, cameras, and antenna locations should be thoroughly reviewed with the owner or responsible crew ahead of time. The installer may find themselves in a position where adjustments need to be made to normal installation locations, as they do not want security equipment to be easily compromised. That being said, it is imperative that installation safety and basic accessibility is not sacrificed to meet location security. Security devices are usually installed completely independent of any other Marine Electronics onboard. When the install is tested out and complete, customer tutorial of how to use and maintain the equipment is imperative. As with all Marine Electronics, The installer should thoroughly read the complete Installation and User guide for the system for all equipment specifics. 21.2 Terminology Panel- This is the device on board that interprets sensor inputs and can control relay outputs, while initiating alerts and events to responsible parties. It will harness hardwired or wireless entities and provide a user interface for boarding/ de-boarding control. Sensors- This defines any hardwired or wireless “Zones” onboard. It includes but is not limited to door contacts, hatch contacts, motion detectors, beam sensors, deck sensors, high water switches, DC battery low voltage detectors, AC power loss detectors, and smoke detectors; to name a few of the most common examples. Outputs- This defines a switch that can control a variety of functions of panel events such as alarms and other events. Output control is used for lights, strobes, sirens, horns, and a variety of other options that draw attention to the boat when an alarm happens. Cameras- Analog or IP cameras often have multiple functions on a boat. They assist in providing situational awareness for the crew when running the boat or when at the dock via on board monitors. Additionally, many systems provide offsite view ability of the cameras to a secure website login. Communicator- This is the device that communicates specific alarm panel events off the vessel. The three most common examples of this device are a GSM communicator, Satellite Phone, or VSat. Depending on the level of boat you are installing on these communication methods may be all used in unison. Tracking Antenna – This is the device that transmits / receives GPS tracking coordinates and data. For most legitimately sized boats being used offshore, this antenna communicates via satellite. When the boat is operating inside GSM coverage most of the time, they can communicate off via this method as well. But know that antenna locations suggested in this guide are specified for satellite tracking. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 206 of 313 2014 NMEA 5755 5756 5757 Users- This is someone who is authorized to access the security system. One who has an access code and/or Key Fob remote to arm/disarm. 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769 21.3 5770 21.3.1 Battery Backup In most instances DC power 10-32VDC should be powering the Panel, Sensors, Outputs, Cameras, Communicator, and Tracking Antenna. When the vessel is virtually always receiving AC power via Shore or Generator, some manufacturers suggest powering the Panel off AC. This is to alert recipients if the boat loses AC Power. The panel is powered by DC when the boat is usually left without shore power, the boat lives on an anchor, or the boat is consistently run without AC power. It will likely be necessary to run a hot Positive wire off the battery bank to the Security equipment. Assure that this wire is of the proper rated gauge and breaker/ fuse protected to ABYC/ NMEA Standards. This is going to cause a constant current load on the battery bank; therefore proper charging from a trickle charger, shore chord, or rated solar charger needs to sustain the battery bank when the boat is not in use. 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 Power A proper security system should have a full battery backup installed that supports the system in the event that the AC/DC power supply is denied and/or cut. It should be done in such a way that the battery backup instantly takes over in the event of a power loss. 21.4 5776 5777 5778 Equipment Installation Considerations This section reviews the most common examples. Keep the items below in mind before choosing a final location. Also assure that the location meets the expectations of the owner/crew. 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 21.4.1 Panel 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 21.5 • Interior of boat, away from any direct moisture • Common areas such as the salon, interior helm, or similar primary entry areas of the vessel. • Easy accessibility for someone boarding the boat to disarm with code. • On larger vessels greater than 100ft (Approx. 30 meters) try to keep the head unit towards amidships to limit wire runs and maximize wireless range • Accommodate for wire run accessibility from rear of panel to power source and GSM/Satellite phone*. Sensors Determine if the system you are installing is a wireless or hardwired system. If it is a hardwired system two or four conductor wires will need to be run to each individual sensor. This often requires running these wires to detect Normally Open (N.O.) sensors, Normally Closed (N.C.) sensors, and/or power wires. Assure all wiring 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 207 of 313 2014 NMEA 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 adheres to NMEA and ABYC Standards. If it is a wireless system, the sensors will only need batteries to transmit the sensor conditions. Normally Closed (N.C) – The state of a sensor input that continually keeps a circuit complete (closed) until forced by an event to open that circuit. Normally Open (N.O) – The state of a sensor input that continually keeps a circuit incomplete (open) until forced by an event to close that circuit. 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 21.5.1 Sensors - Security Zones- Exterior 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 21.5.2 Sensors - Security Zones- Interior These are zones around the boat that protect the boat from theft intrusion in both the exterior and interior areas. Typical exterior applications include but are not limited to motion sensors, cockpit beam sensors, electronics cabinets, Lazzerette hatches, and Rod Storage lockers. • Assure that these zones are IP rated and resist water spray • Do not install hatch and door contacts where they are constantly rubbed against and/or used as a handle by unknowing guests and/or crew. • Do not install a zone where water runoff from assorted gutters of the boat constantly flows over it or collects. • Whenever possible, use wide gap extension sensors that allow for a bit of magnetic contact tolerance as many doors and hatches have gasket seals that cause wider areas to cover between sensor and magnet. • Do not place sensors where they are easily visible to potential thief or a yacht owner who does not want to see it. • Do not place motion sensors in places where they focus on dock traffic. If protecting a cockpit with a motion detector, keep it lower rather than higher. • Exterior sensors may be defined as “instant” zones. This definition means that in the event the system is armed and this zone is breached, the alarm will go off immediately. • Entry way sensors should have a programmable delay so that the crew and/or vessel owner can disarm or arm the security system when entering or exiting the vessel. These are zones on the interior of the boat that protect entry doors/ hatches, interior motions, safes, private cabinets, and staterooms. This is a broad definition as installers can be asked to protect many private areas of the modern yacht. • Review all location and operation with the owner/crew and test operation before drilling any holes on Metal doors or fine teak. Thus, a great tool is removable double sided tape. It allows you to demonstrate and test placement prior to final 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 208 of 313 2014 NMEA 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 5855 5856 5857 5858 5859 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 installation. 21.6 • Assure that door sliding functionality is not inhibited by the magnet or switch. • Keep it Hidden out of site if possible as most owners/crew do not want to see it and more importantly a thief should not see it. • Interior perimeter “primary entry” door sensors are usually defined as a “delay” zone. This definition means that in the event the system is armed and this zone is breached, a delay timer will allow a defined period of time prior alarm will go off immediately. This allows the user to disarm at the panel. • Interior perimeter “not primary entry” door sensors are usually defined as “instant” zones. This definition means that in the event the system is armed and this zone is breached, the alarm will go off immediately. • Interior motions are usually defined as “follow” zones. This definition means that if an entry delay zone is engaged first it will follow that timer; else it will go off instantly. Outputs Also referred to as PGMs, Outputs are used to bring attention to a boat in distress. These devices can be hardwired to the Panel or with some systems; they communicate the switching condition wirelessly. They trigger a switch closed in most instances. This switch will drive a variety of devices such as sirens, strobes, or deck lights. In most instances the Output will be completing the circuit and the switched device should be between “COM” and “Normally Open (N.O)”. The “COM” is the feed (Positive or Negative) and the “N.O” is connected to the device to be triggered. • Assure that the output you are using is properly current rated for the device you are driving. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation. • Make sure the power feed to the device is constant even if the battery switches are turned off. Also assure proper breaker or fuse protection 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 209 of 313 2014 NMEA 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 21.6.1 Outputs-Programming 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 21.7 Follow Bell- This event allows the Output to activate following the Bell cut-off delay. The event scares away would be thieves while shutting off after a period of time as to not annoy your fellow dock mates. The unit stays in alarm and will re-initialize if a zone is breached again. It is most commonly used on Sirens. Alarm activation- This event allows the Output to activate upon alarm in a variety of ways. These methods include follow entire duration while in alarm, pulsing while in alarm, or for a specific timed duration. This is often used with strobes and Deck Lights. Follow arm- The Output will activate whenever the system is armed. Common examples of triggered devices may be visible red LEDs on the exterior of the vessel to alert users of armed status. Communicator Fixed cellular modules, Satellite phones, and VSATs can be used in conjunction with the onboard security systems. Determine ahead of the installation if the vessel already has these devices or if the need to be purchased. Keep these points in mind when determining the method by which you want to transmit data. • If using the module for just a voice line “Ring + Tip”, this will call recipients via RJ-11 connection to the security system. This will be with Cellular and Satellite phones only. • Keep the communication equipment hidden from direct view, but accessible for service when necessary. • When using a cellular carrier, whenever possible have the communicator active upon installing as one needs to test it • When using a satellite phone, it is usually necessary to enter a “#” at the end of the programmed dial out number • If streaming video off, the fixed cellular device will need to have data enabled. Most cellular providers call this a “Internet Data” plan Tracking Antenna Tracking Antennas are gaining much popularity for the modern boat. The antennas take in a GPS feed and transmit the coordinates through a cellular connection, Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellite, or geostationary satellite networks. The installation tolerances tend to loosen up a bit with cellular based tracking, but of course GPS position data will not transmit when out of cellular coverage. Keep the following considerations in mind prior to mounting the antenna. • • • • Think Security. The location of the antenna is critical and should be thoroughly scrutinized. Most antennas are able to penetrate up to ½ inch (12.7 mm) of solid fiberglass, making way for covert installs. Locate the antenna a minimum of two feet (0.6 m) away from metallic obstructions such as hand rails, rod holders and cleats. Choose a location that is not directly under or near radar arrays to prevent possible interferences. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 210 of 313 2014 NMEA 5925 5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 • • • • • • • • • • Make sure that the underside of the antenna is accessible to connect the antenna cable. Keep to a constant and breaker/fused locked and fused DC supply Mount on a flat horizontal surface. If the antenna communicates its data to the Geostationary based satellite network. As a general rule, a clear line of site towards the equator is needed. Center Consoles - It is suggested that the antenna not be installed on T-Tops as they are more vulnerable for tampering. Popular locations include forward/aft stringers underneath the gunwale. Keep away from amidships gunwale mounting as the T-Top could potentially block the signal from getting out. Larger vessels - Often require exposed hardtop or arch mounting. A ¾ inch (19 mm) hole can be drilled and sealed under the antenna with silicon. Whenever possible, dry run the installation procedure and test the location beforehand. Have the owner/ crew pre-activate prior to installation whenever possible to do active tests during and after the install is complete to assure proper functionality Independent battery backups are suggested if the manufacturer does not provide one. False SAT domes (for vessel congruency) on larger vessels are a good place to hide tracking antennas 5948 5949 5950 Figure 87: Tracking Antenna mounting locations 5951 5952 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 211 of 313 2014 NMEA 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 21.8 Users 5968 21.9 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 21.9.1 General Considerations A user is defined as a person with access to the security system via a pass code and/or key fob remote. The Master user code is the only one that can add or delete users. Most security systems default Master code is “1234”. Common examples of the Master, User 2, and User 3 are the owner, crew member, and boat washer respectively. Every user can have only one key fob. For every user code programmed to the security system, there can be a key fob. However for every key fob programmed, there must be a user code associated to it. That being said, the installer often needs to setup key fobs for operation with the system. Given the nature of user security access, it is suggested that you default the users to the codes “1234”, “2222”, “3333”, etc. for master, user 2, user 3, respectively. The owner/operator of the boat should be made aware of these default codes and taught how to change them to their own numbers after the install is done. This protects the installer from the liability of having an access code to the boat. Maritime Camera Systems Maritime Camera Systems installed in accordance with these standards should meet the requirements identified in the following paragraphs. Maritime Cameras include “Fixed” or “Static” and “Pan & Tilt” systems. The use of cameras on the modern yacht is beneficial for situational awareness both when Underway, at the dock, and away from the vessel. Though IP cameras are a popular growing technology, the most common cameras are Analog Cameras. Most every chart plotter onboard has multiple Analog Video Inputs to assist in docking. Larger yachts will often tie these analog cameras into splitters that feed all the images to TVs throughout the boat. Some security providers have equipment that will feed this video feed off to a secure website or smart phone. In these instances a GSM or VSAT communicator will be necessary to bring an internet connection to the vessel. • • • • • • • Most Analog Cameras operate on DC voltage (usually 12VDC) or 24V AC and will need both power wires and 75 Ohm coax cable run to them. Make sure the camera is fuse protected and run on the proper gauge wire according to the manufacturer standards. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation. Thoroughly review the owner/crew requirements as to the positions and amount of cameras needed. Common examples of cameras are Engine Rooms, Stern looking aft, in the cockpit, and also the salon. If one camera is a stern camera for assistance in docking, it is usually a reverse image camera Mount the cameras in high areas of the boat where they are more difficult to tamper with. Assure that the camera is not in the direct path of water runoff or collection points If the Analog camera has nighttime IR illumination LEDs, Assure the sensor eye is aligned at the 6 O’clock position. Test this function by cupping your hands over the sensor and assuring the LED’s illuminate. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 212 of 313 2014 NMEA 5999 6000 • Mind that when feeding video off a boat, data is used. This can add up quickly when if video is left streaming offsite all day. 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 21.9.2 Installation Considerations 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 21.9.3 Camera Types 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 21.9.4 Installation Location 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 21.9.5 Cable Routing 6040 6041 6042 6043 21.9.6 Camera Connection Diagrams Prior to the installation of any camera system it is highly recommended to read and understand the manufacturer’s installation and operation manuals. Today’s cameras are expected to do more than just provide an image to the user. You will find most modern Pan & Tilt cameras can be integrated with third party components for optional control and features such as radar slew to cue. Bench testing a camera prior to physical installation is good practice. Normal operation and video quality should be determined in a controlled environment. Most of today’s camera systems are either “Static” or “Pan & Tilt” configurations. Static cameras are fixed, the user has no control over the direction the camera is pointing. Pan & Tilt camera systems are controlled via remote which allows a user to point the camera around a vessel. The “Payload” or “Sensor” refers to the type of imager housed. The sensor or payload type will not affect how the housing is installed but rather dictates the application. Smaller vessels will require sensors with a wide field of view to compensate for greater movement and larger vessels allow for a narrow field of view. The field of view of a camera determines how far a user can see. Consideration should be taken when locating a camera for installation. Ideally a camera is mounted centerline of the vessel with 360 degrees of visibility. Static cameras may require shimming to compensate for the planning angle of the vessel when underway. The video image of a static camera should identify a portion of the bow in the lower 10% of the screen. This method will allow a user to estimate the position of an object in relation to their vessel. Overall the image should display 70% water 30% sky. The installation location for any camera system should be as rigid as possible. Vibrations from the vessels engines and auxiliary equipment can cause an unstable image which will greatly reduce performance. Always refer to manufacturer-specific documentation for suitable conductor size and type. When routing cables through the vessel, care should be taken to preserve the integrity of the cable. Video cables should always be of high quality, it is recommended to use shielded 75ohm coax such as RG-59 or RG-6. Static camera systems will most likely require power and video only. Pan & Tilt camera systems are controlled via a remote joystick and require extra cabling for communications. The length of run or total cable distance should be taken in to consideration. Some camera systems use a serial connection and others use Ethernet between the joystick control and the camera. Both methods have limitations regarding the distance a single cable can span and should be identified prior to installation. The diagrams below are examples of the two most common configurations of Serial and Ethernet based control. Serial connections are daisy chained for multiple control stations. Ethernet based systems are connected through a single network hub or switch. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 213 of 313 2014 NMEA 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 Video connections should be routed through a powered distribution amplifier when splitting the signal to multiple displays. An isolated DC/DC converter should be installed to ensure clean power is supplied to the camera. Figure 88: Typical Serial camera Control connection diagram 6050 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 214 of 313 2014 NMEA 6051 6052 Figure 89: Typical Ethernet camera Control connection diagram 6053 6054 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 215 of 313 2014 NMEA 6055 22 6056 6057 6058 6059 TEST CRITERIA This section identifies recommended tests and procedures to be performed following installation of electronic equipment. The procedures provided are intended to verify proper operation of both existing and newly-installed equipment. 22.1 General Considerations 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 Electronic equipment installed in accordance with these standards, and existing equipment at the time of installation, shall be tested in accordance with the applicable procedures in this section. Applicable tests should be performed as each new item of equipment is installed in order to identify and rectify any problems early on. Overall objectives include: 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 • • 6073 • • Verification of proper and fully-functional equipment operation. Verification that newly-installed equipment has not adversely affected existing equipment performance. Verification that the vessel power distribution system is adequately sized to handle the higher load imposed by existing and newly-installed equipment. Verification that the vessel owner has received all information required to use and maintain the installed equipment. 22.1.1 Commissioning Check-off 6074 6075 6076 6077 Prior to formal delivery of the completed electronics installation to the vessel owner, the installer shall review the installation with the owner to ensure that the owner has received all documentation and instructions applicable to the newly-installed equipment. The review shall include: 6078 6079 1. Documentation prepared in accordance with the requirements specified in the applicable installation section of these standards. 6080 2. Owner familiarization with all equipment locations. 6081 3. Safety critical operations demonstrated to the owner. 6082 6083 4. Certification that applicable tests have been satisfactorily completed in accordance with this Section 22. 6084 6085 6086 All test results shall be documented using the applicable portions of Appendix B, Commissioning Checklist. One copy of the completed checklist should be kept on file, and one copy should be provided to the vessel owner. 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 22.1.2 Test Procedure Overview The tests in this section shall be conducted for each new item of equipment installed, and on existing equipment that may be affected by newly-installed equipment to ensure that existing equipment performance has not been compromised. NOTE: Table 45 identifies the tests defined in this section and indicates when each test should also be performed on existing equipment. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 216 of 313 2014 NMEA 6094 Table 45: Equipment Tests and Requirements Test Title Autopilot Cellular Telephone Compass DC Load Tests Depth Sounders/ Video Sounders Electronic Chart plotters GPS Receivers MSAT (Mini-M) Satellite Telephone NMEA Interfacing Radar Satellite Television Systems Sea Temperature Speed/Knot meters SSB Radio VHF Radio Wind Instruments 6095 6096 6097 6098 Performance Requirement After modifications to the steering system, addition of navigation equipment that provides autopilot data, or modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the autopilot is connected to. After installation of any RF transmitter. After installation of any display or other equipment in the vicinity. After any equipment is installed. After modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the depth sounder is connected to. After modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the chart plotter is connected to. After installation of any RF transmitter or modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the GPS is connected to. After installation of any RF transmitter After modification or addition of equipment to any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus. After installation of any RF transmitter or modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the Radar is connected to. After installation of any RF transmitter After modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the sea temperature transducer is connected to. After modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the speed transducer is connected to. After installation of any RF transmitter. After installation of any RF transmitter or modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the VHF radio is connected to. After modification of any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® data bus the wind instrument is connected to. NOTE: Some equipment may be sold as a bundled kit for convenience. For example, an Autopilot may come with its own Electronic compass. In this situation, the Autopilot shall be tested in accordance with Section 15.2, and the Electronic compass shall be tested in accordance with Section 15.4. 6099 6100 6101 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 217 of 313 2014 NMEA 6102 6103 22.2 6104 22.2.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 DC Load Tests AC/DC Multimeter 22.2.2 Detailed Test Requirements The following tests ensure that sufficient capacity is available to provide power to onboard electronics while maintaining minimum voltage levels. 22.2.2.1 Operation from Batteries 6110 1. Turn all electronic equipment off. 6111 6112 2. Turn off any charging devices connected to any batteries used as an electronics power source. 6113 6114 3. Turn on the main electronic battery switch so that electronics will be operating on the electronics or General use battery only. 6115 4. Turn on the main breaker and all electronics breakers. 6116 6117 5. Operate a load of 10 amps or greater for a minimum of 10 seconds to create a momentary load on the battery. 6118 6119 6. Measure the DC voltage at the electronics breaker panel or fuse block nearest the equipment to be tested. The no-load voltage shall be a minimum of 12.5 volts DC 6120 7. Turn on all electronic equipment. 6121 8. Set all radars to transmit. 6122 9. Set the autopilot to the manual mode and activate the rudder commands. 6123 6124 10. For SSB installations, set the SSB to a usable frequency (4125 MHz). Tune up the antenna tuner. Transmit with modulation for not less than 30 seconds. 6125 11. Verify that all equipment continues to function for not less than 60 minutes. 6126 6127 12. Verify that the DC voltage at the electronics breaker panel or fuse block is maintained above 11.5 volts during and at the completion of the 1 hour test time. 6128 13. Verify that no breakers are tripped. 6129 22.2.2.2 Charging and Underway Operation 6130 1. Verify that the main engines are out of gear. 6131 6132 2. Start the main engines and verify that all electronics remain on and are unaffected by the engine starting surge. 6133 6134 6135 6136 3. Monitor the DC voltage at the electronics breaker panel or fuse block and verify that the main engines are charging the electronics battery. If necessary, increase the RPM of the main engines to 1,200 RPM to activate the alternators for increased charge rate. The voltage should increase from the value measured in Step 12 above. 6137 6138 4. Shut the main engines down and measure the DC voltage at the electronics breaker panel or fuse block. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 218 of 313 2014 NMEA 6139 6140 6141 6142 5. Turn on the dockside shore power to the battery charger connected to the electronics battery. Measure the DC voltage at the at the electronics breaker panel or fuse block and verify that the DC battery voltage is increased from the voltage in Step 12 above and continues to increase as the charger is operated. 6143 6. Shut all electronics off and open appropriate breakers. 6144 6145 7. Restore the charger, battery switches, and shore power breakers to the condition prior to testing. 6146 6147 22.3 6148 22.3.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 6158 NMEA Interfacing Testing • • • • Laptop computer with diagnostic software Voltmeter Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) (optional) NMEA 2000® net meter (optional) 22.3.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying operational features of equipment connected using NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000® in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that interfaced data is properly transmitted between required equipment. 22.3.3 NMEA 0183 Setup and Testing 6159 6160 6161 6162 At installation completion, all interfaced equipment shall be operated and the intended data communications shall be verified. Testing shall follow manufacturerrecommended functional test procedures and shall include the following actions when supported/displayed by the installed equipment: 6163 6164 1. Connect a Personal Computer with HyperTerminal or manufacturer-provided test equipment to observe data flow. 6165 6166 2. Activate a waypoint or route, and observe waypoint or route data change on displays and monitored NMEA 0183 sentences. 6167 6168 3. Initiate a course change, and observe course data change on displays and monitored datagrams. 6169 6170 4. Start the engines or generator, and observe applicable engine or generator data change on displays and monitored datagrams. 6171 5. Review an interface diagram for interface circuit specifics and connection locations. 6172 6. Verify correct continuity polarity and termination of wiring and connectors. 6173 7. Confirm proper programming of units being interfaced. 6174 8. Check for appropriate data in/out display on units interfaced. 6175 9. Confirm proper data sentences on laptop/software. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 219 of 313 2014 NMEA 6176 22.3.4 NMEA 2000® 6177 1. Verify bus power voltage within 9-to-16-volt range. 6178 2. Verify shield potential at ground. 6179 3. Verify low bus error rate. 6180 4. Verify nominal bus traffic level. 6181 5. Verify that all devices have successfully claimed an address. 6182 22.3.4.1 NMEA 2000 Testing and Analysis: 6183 6184 With the introduction of many new types of NMEA2000 certified products it has become necessary for a detailed NMEA2000 network analysis and configuration. 6185 6186 NMEA2000 device manufactures have introduced software programs and devices to help properly diagnose and configure an NMEA2000 bus. 6187 Sample screen shots of some free applications are shown below. 6188 6189 Figure 90: NMEA 2000 Application software & USB Interfaces 6190 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 220 of 313 2014 NMEA 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 Figure 91: Examples of NMEA 2000 USB Interfaces Manufacturers in most cases offer a free download but do require the proper equipment to connect a PC to the NMEA2000 BUS as seen in Figure XX. 22.3.4.2 NMEA 2000 Network Design and Documentation Tools : 6196 6197 6198 Due to the complexity of many existing NMEA2000 networks, hardware manufacturers offer utility programs that allow implementers to properly design or update NMEA2000 networks. 6199 6200 6201 6202 Such programs offer the integrator detailed analysis of a potential network. Upon completion of the network design and installation a customer can be supplied with documentation regarding the installed network helping to support long term upgrades and maintenance. 6203 6204 Figure 92: Example of NMEA 2000 Application / Design Software 6205 6206 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 221 of 313 2014 NMEA 6207 22.3.5 Ethernet Testing 6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 After all network segment cables have been installed and all connectors attached, each network segment shall be tested to verify the integrity of the cable and connector assemblies. 22.4 • All network cables shall be tested with an inexpensive network cable tester. A simple Continuity/Isolation test takes seconds and yet can save hours of fault finding on field assembled connectors/cables. • Testing shall verify that the pin-out meets the requirements of Section 8.4.3.1 and that there are no opens, shorts, crossed pairs (tip and ring reversed at one end) or split pairs (pair using one pin in each of two different pairs). • Once all network segment cables are tested, connect the computers and any hubs, routers, or other equipment to the network. Power up all devices, and verify that all devices operate in accordance with manufacturer instructions. • When testing, the network should be run at as close to full load as possible i.e. maximum network traffic would be tested by running high bandwidth tasks such as streaming, downloads/uploads, VoIP, etc. Antenna Installation Testing 6230 6231 6232 To ensure that antenna and electronic equipment is installed in a manner that does not interfere with other equipment as a result of antenna spacing, all electronic equipment shall be turned on and tested in accordance with the following paragraphs. 6233 6234 Performance evaluation shall be performed to verify that the newly-installed equipment does not interfere with the satisfactory operation of other equipment in the installation. 6235 6236 6237 6238 All transmitting equipment shall be operated at rated transmit output as part of the test. In addition, the following additional tests shall be performed for the specified equipment if installed. See Section 17.2.4 and Section 17.3.6 for test methods specific to VHF and SSB. 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 22.4.1 GPS Receivers 22.4.1.1 Recommended Test Equipment Handheld GPS (optional) 22.4.1.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying GPS operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the GPS and optional equipment are operating correctly and are not subject to interference from other onboard systems. 22.4.1.3 Main GPS Unit Dockside Testing 6247 1. Verify that satellite reception and signal strength meet manufacturer specifications. 6248 2. Verify that the computed latitude/longitude position is accurate for your location. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 222 of 313 2014 NMEA 6249 6250 3. Verify that the satellite reception is not compromised while each of the following electronic systems is in their full operating modes: 6251 a. Radar in transmit 6252 b. VHF radio in transmit 6253 c. SAT phones in transmit 6254 d. SSB radio in transmit 6255 6256 e. Television antenna amplifier energized (connected to DC or AC power as appropriate) 6257 22.4.1.4 Optional Differential Beacon Receiver Dockside Testing 6258 If this unit is equipped with this option, perform the following tests: 6259 6260 1. Verify that the local differential beacon signal (if available in your area) is being received and that the beacon signal strength meets manufacturer specifications. 6261 6262 2. Verify that the beacon signal strength is not compromised while each of the following electronic systems is in their full operating modes: 6263 a. Radar in transmit 6264 b. VHF radio in transmit 6265 c. SAT phones in transmit 6266 d. SSB radio in transmit 6267 22.4.1.5 Optional Differential Beacon Receiver Sea Trial Testing 6268 If this unit is equipped with this option, perform the following test: 6269 6270 6271 1. Verify that the beacon signal strength is not compromised with engines running and shafts turning. Since the faster the shaft spins the more interference is generated, this test should be performed underway at high speeds. 6272 6273 22.4.1.6 Optional GNSS Augmentation Receiver (i.e.WAAS, EGNOS etc.) Dockside Testing 6274 If this unit is equipped with this option, perform the following tests: 6275 1. Verify that the satellite is being received. 6276 6277 2. Verify that the satellite signal strength is not compromised with each of the following electronic systems in their full operating modes: 6278 a. Radar in transmit 6279 b. VHF radio in transmit 6280 c. SAT phones in transmit 6281 6282 d. SSB radio in transmit 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 223 of 313 2014 NMEA 6283 22.4.2 Wind Instrument Antennas 6284 22.4.2.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6285 6286 None 22.4.2.2 Detailed Test Requirements 6287 6288 6289 6290 In addition to verifying wind instrument and display operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following test ensures that the wind speed and direction transducer is calibrated within manufacturer tolerances. 22.4.2.3 Dockside Testing 6291 6292 6293 1. Verify that the wind angle relative to the bow of the vessel is accurate within manufacturer specifications. If it is not, calibrate and/or offset per manufacturer instructions 6294 22.5 6295 22.5.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 Display Testing None. 22.5.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying display operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the display is operating correctly and is communicating correctly with other onboard electronics. 22.5.2.1 Dockside Testing 6302 1. Verify that all cable connections at the back of the display are securely connected. 6303 2. Verify that all cables have service loops for easy removal if service is needed 6304 3. Verify that all display features are functional, including all buttons. 6305 4. Verify that the vessel’s current position is accurately displayed. 6306 5. Verify that the chart plotter and chart details meet manufacturer specifications. 6307 6. Verify that the local charts are installed and displaying properly at all zoom levels. 6308 6309 7. Verify that the autopilot, if installed, responds correctly to navigation data as shown on the display 6310 6311 8. Verify radar data(if connected) is displaying and operating per manufacturer specifications. 6312 6313 9. Verify fish finder data (if connected) is displaying and operating per manufacturer specifications. 6314 10. Verify that all video inputs (if connected) are displaying correctly 6315 6316 11. Verify that all NMEA 0183 and/or NMEA 2000 interfaces(if connected) are displaying data from each specific device. 6317 12. Verify that display software is up to date with manufacturer specifications. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 224 of 313 2014 NMEA 6318 22.6 6319 22.6.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6320 6321 None. 22.6.2 Detailed Test Requirements 6322 6323 6324 6325 Black Box Testing In addition to verifying black box operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the black box is operating correctly and is communicating correctly with other onboard electronics. 22.6.2.1 Dockside Testing 6326 1. Verify that all cable connections at the box are securely connected. 6327 2. Verify that all cables have service loops for easy removal if service is needed 6328 6329 3. Verify that the status light on the box is clearly visible and is indicating a proper working mode per manufacturer specifications. 6330 4. Verify that software is up to date with manufacturer specifications. 6331 6332 22.7 6333 22.7.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 Transducer Testing • • Paper charts Weighted Depth line or lead core line with distance markings 22.7.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying depth sounder and display operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the depth sounder is operating correctly and is not adversely affected by water flow when underway. 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 22.7.2.1 Testing for Leaks 6345 22.7.2.2 Dockside Testing At the time of launch, a visual inspection shall be performed to ensure the watertight integrity of the installation; appropriate action shall be taken if any leaks are observed. Also, the transducer locations shall be indicated to the owner at this time, and the method of cleaning removable transducers shall be demonstrated. 6346 1. Verify that the transducer is not leaking and that it is properly sealed and secured. 6347 6348 2. Verify that the depth reading is accurate and stable over a period of several minutes at the dock. 6349 22.7.2.3 Sea Trial Testing 6350 6351 1. Choose a known range where the vessel can be maneuvered to confirm soundings when underway. 6352 2. Verify that the depth reading is accurate and stable underway at slow speeds. 6353 3. Verify that the depth reading remains accurate as speed is increased. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 225 of 313 2014 NMEA 6354 6355 6356 6357 4. Verify that if a transom-mounted style transducer is fitted, it does not kick up (fold up) at higher speeds. 22.7.3 Sea Temperature Transducers 22.7.3.1 Recommended Test Equipment • 6358 6359 22.7.3.2 Detailed Test Requirements 6360 6361 6362 6363 Digital thermometer In addition to verifying temperature transducer and display operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the temperature transducer is calibrated within manufacturer tolerances. 22.7.3.3 Dockside Testing 6364 1. Verify that the transducer is not leaking. 6365 6366 2. Verify that the sea temperature reading is accurate within manufacturer specifications. If it is not, then calibrate per manufacturer specifications. 6367 6368 22.7.4 Speed Transducers 22.7.4.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6369 6370 None 22.7.4.2 Detailed Test Requirements 6371 6372 6373 6374 In addition to verifying speed/knot meter operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the speed transducer is calibrated within manufacturer tolerances. 22.7.4.3 Dockside Testing 6375 6376 1. Verify that the transducer is not leaking. 22.7.4.4 Sea Trial Testing 6377 6378 6379 1. Verify that the speed is accurate within manufacturer specifications. If it is not, then calibrate per manufacturer specifications, using a minimum of three passes on a known distance range. 6380 6381 22.8 6382 22.8.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 Compass Installation Testing • • • Sun compass (optional) Handheld compass (optional) Protractor (optional) 22.8.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying compass-operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the compass has been installed with minimum deviational error. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 226 of 313 2014 NMEA 6390 6391 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 22.8.2.1 Dockside Testing 1. Check that compass location is free from interference. NOTE: After installation and calibration is complete, if the vessel is to be transported via truck, rail or yacht transport to a new location, re-calibration of the compass system, and an additional Sea Trial Testing is required. This is due to the metal structures present around the vessel while in transport, which can cause calibration errors. 22.8.2.2 Sea Trial Testing 6398 1. Set up compass per manufacturer specifications. 6399 6400 2. If the compass is electronic, spin the compass through 360-degree course change in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 6401 6402 3. If the heading sensor is interfaced to an autopilot, turn off the autopilot before aligning the heading.as the autopilot may turn the rudder suddenly. 6403 6404 4. If the compass is magnetic, compensate the compass in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 6405 6406 5. If the compass is gyro, index the compass in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 6407 6408 6. Check compass for accuracy against other known references (e.g., GPS) at every 15 degrees of heading change. 6409 6410 7. GPS COG can be either true or magnetic bearing depending on how the system is set up 6411 6412 8. Installers must know the magnetic variation in their location - on the paper chart for proper calibration. 6413 6414 9. Provide compass deviation card prepared by qualified compass adjuster for every 15 degrees of heading change if any heading shows a non-zero error. 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 10. At the completion of the installation, the installer should again verify that the operation of any electronic equipment with its accessories does not adversely affect the indicated magnetic heading shown on the GNSS compass display or autopilot compass display. It may be necessary during Sea Trial Testing to make these tests on four different headings, equally distributed around 360 degrees, since the effects can vary with the heading 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 227 of 313 2014 NMEA 6422 6423 22.9 6424 22.9.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 Radar Installation Testing None 22.9.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying radar operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the radar is operating correctly and is aligned correctly with the vessel’s bow. 22.9.2.1 Dockside Testing 6431 6432 6433 1. Test the radar in transmit mode. All ranges should be viewed to verify that expected ranges of targets for your immediate location are being received on the vessel’s radar. 6434 2. Verify automatic tuning feature if available, and manually adjust receiver gain. 6435 6436 3. Verify automatic sea clutter or Sensitivity Time Control (STC) automatic feature if available, and manually adjust. 6437 6438 4. Verify automatic rain clutter Fast Time Constant (FTC) automatic feature if available, and manually adjust. 6439 5. Verify vessel’s heading input if available. 6440 6. Verify other interfacing inputs if available. 6441 6442 22.9.2.2 Sea Trial Testing 6443 6444 1. Verify that the vessel’s radar heading alignment is correct. Target should appear directly ahead in the head-up mode, with the heading line bisecting the target. 6445 2. Perform the manufacturer’s heading alignment procedure as necessary. 6446 6447 3. Verify that the timing of the radar is correct on the radar. Perform the manufacturer’s timing procedure as necessary. 6448 4. Adjust the radar’s tuning, gain, to optimize performance of the system. 6449 6450 5. Verify automatic sea clutter or Sensitivity Time Control (STC) automatic feature if available, and manually adjust. 6451 6452 6453 6. Verify automatic rain clutter Fast Time Constant (FTC) automatic feature if available, and manually adjust. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 228 of 313 2014 NMEA 6454 6455 6456 22.10 Autopilot Testing 6457 22.10.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6458 AC/DC Multimeter 6459 22.10.1.1 Detailed Test Requirements 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 In addition to verifying autopilot operational features in accordance with manufacturerspecific documentation, the following tests ensure that connections to the vessel steering system and other electronics via data interfaces are operating correctly. Understand the differences in operation of different manufacturer’s autopilot models when conducting the following tests. For example some autopilots track between two waypoints, and some will track from the current position. NOTE: Before running the pump in hydraulic autopilots for the first time or performing the following tests, make sure the system contains sufficient hydraulic fluid and has been completely bled of air. Running the pump dry may damage it. See Section 15.3.2 6471 6472 • While the vessel is standing alongside the dock, enter course changes of approximately 5 degrees and monitor the steering system response 6473 • Confirm that the rudder moves in the correct direction(approximately 5 degrees). 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 22.10.1.2 Rudder Limit Settings Check that the drive has enough throw so it does not bottom out prior to approaching the mechanical stops. Rudder limit switches, if installed, should be tested to ensure that the autopilot drive does not force the steering gear against its mechanical stops. Normal practice is to set the limit switches to act at about 2 degrees before the mechanical stops are reached. Software generated rudder limit settings should be tested to ensure that the autopilot drive does not force the steering gear against the mechanical stops. Refer to manufacturer-specific documentation for further details. NOTE: After installation and calibration is complete, if the vessel is to be transported via truck, rail or yacht transport to a new location, re-calibration of the autopilot system, and an additional Sea Trial Testing is required. This is due to the metal structures present around the vessel while in transport, which can cause calibration errors. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 229 of 313 2014 NMEA 6493 6494 22.10.1.3 Dockside Tests- Autopilot 6495 6496 1. Manufacturers have different procedures for Dockside Testing and Sea Trial Testing setups. 6497 2. Follow the specific procedure with great ATTENTION TO DETAIL 6498 3. Verify Boat Type, Drive System, Rudder type, feedback type, compass type 6499 4. Verify heading and GPS information are present 6500 5. Zero the RRU during dockside setup 6501 6. Check steering system for air. 6502 7. Check steering system for leaks. 6503 6504 8. Check steering system for lost motion to confirm that autopilot drive has not restricted rudder motion. 6505 9. Check for binding or mechanical interference at helm positions and rudder. 6506 10. Check for nonlinear actuation. 6507 11. Check for proper voltage to solenoids or hydraulic motor drive. 6508 6509 12. Check for proper rudder direction (that rudder is moving in correct direction in both autopilot and helm steering). 6510 6511 13. Check rudder speed hard over to hard over time. Time should be in the range of 12 to 20 seconds. 6512 6513 14. Check for proper pressure in Pounds-per-Square-Inch (PSI) (kg per m2 or Pascals) on pressurized hydraulic systems. 6514 15. Check data presence on input and output interfaces. 6515 16. Check that proper data sentence or Parameter Group Number (PGN) is being used. 6516 22.10.1.4 Sea Trial Testing- Autopilot 6517 6518 1. Verify that the electronic compass has been calibrated per manufacturer instructions and details in section 22.9 6519 2. Perform specific manufacturer setup and test procedures. 6520 3. Check or adjust rudder zero alignment while maintaining a straight course. 6521 6522 4. Enter a destination in the navigation device, such as a waypoint at a distance of 3 nautical miles or greater, and verify autopilot response. 6523 5. Verify autopilot operation in all steering modes per manufacturer instructions 6524 6. Prove steering in auto mode. 6525 7. Prove steering in navigation mode. 6526 8. Prove dodge mode. 6527 9. Prove wind mode (if available). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 230 of 313 2014 NMEA 6528 6529 10. Verify proper operation when operating onboard transmitters, such as VHF, SSB, Radar, etc. 6530 6531 22.11 SSB Radio Testing 6532 22.11.1 General Considerations 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 Each fixed-mounted SSB Radio Transceiver shall be subjected to the following tests in accordance with the described procedures. The tests’ objectives are to ensure that all connections are solid, power distribution is adequately sized for the intended load, and the SSB ground system is a substantial counterpoise. 22.11.2 Recommended Test Equipment • • • • • • • • • • • Wattmeter with appropriate element AC/DC Multimeter Dummy load Frequency counter RF ammeter (MFJ-854 or equivalent) DC ammeter (0-50Amps) AM modulation meter Oscilloscope Signal generator Communications test set Field strength meter 22.11.3 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying SSB operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the antenna connection, tuner, grounding, and optional equipment are operating correctly. 22.11.3.1 RF Power, Modulation and Power Consumption 6554 6555 The SSB Radio Transceiver (Device Under Test or DUT) shall be connected to the following test equipment in accordance with the diagram in Figure 93.. 6556 6557 6558 A Wattmeter with the appropriate element capable of measuring forward and reflected power in the frequency range of 2 MHz to 30 MHz, shall be inserted in-line between the DUT output connector and the transmission line coaxial cable. 6559 6560 6561 A multimeter shall be connected across the positive and negative power leads to the DUT. An existing panel meter is sufficient, provided it meets the requirements of Section 2.3.2, Voltmeters. 6562 6563 A multimeter or Ammeter capable of measuring and displaying 150% of the rated DUT transmit current shall be connected in series with the positive power lead. 6564 6565 The other end of the transmission line coaxial cable shall be connected to an appropriate RF load at the rated power of the transmitter. 6566 An appropriate means of measuring modulation (e.g. communications monitor). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 231 of 313 2014 NMEA 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 Figure 93: SSB Power test Setup Transmit on the SSB with a continuous tone on a clear and authorized channel while the unit is set to transmit at its highest output power. While transmitting, measure the characteristics identified in Table 46 below using the appropriate instrumentation, and verify that the characteristics are within the required tolerance. Table 46: Typical SSB Transmission Test Measurements 6575 Test 1 Measurement RF forward power 2 3 Modulation level Voltage at the DUT input connector Current at the DUT input connector 4 Nominal Value Rated Transmit Power 100% 12 Volts Tolerance ≥ 80% Rated Transmit Power 100% ≥ 11.7 Volts Rated Transmit Current ≤ 125% Rated Transmit Current 6576 6577 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 232 of 313 2014 NMEA 6578 22.11.3.2 RF Balance/Impedance/Ground Current 6579 6580 The SSB Radio Transceiver (Device Under Test or DUT) shall be connected to the following test equipment in accordance with the diagram in Figure 94.. 6581 6582 6583 A Wattmeter with the appropriate element capable of measuring forward and reflected power in the frequency range of 2 MHz to 30 MHz, shall be inserted in-line between the DUT output connector and the transmission line coaxial cable. 6584 6585 The other end of the transmission line coaxial cable shall be connected to the antenna coupler, which in turn is connected to the antenna lead-in line. 6586 6587 Connect an RF ammeter, capable of measuring RF current from 0 to 3 Amps, to the lead-in wire at the antenna coupler. 6588 The multimeter, Voltmeter, or ammeter may be left connected from the previous test. 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 Figure 94: SSB Antenna Power test Setup Per the manufacturer’s instructions, in each band, wait for the antenna coupler to finish tuning, then measure and record the characteristics identified in Table 47., using the attached instrumentation. Transmit on the SSB with a continuous tone on a clear and authorized channel in each band while the unit is set to transmit at its highest output power. Verify that the RF forward power and RF reflected power are within the tolerance given in Section 17.3.6.1 at each band. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 233 of 313 2014 NMEA 6598 Table 47: SSB Transmission Measurements Band Frequency Selected RF Forward Power RF Reflected Power RF Current 2000 kHz 4000 kHz 6000 kHz 8000 kHz 12000 kHz 16000 kHz 18000 kHz 22000 kHz 25000 kHz 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 The RF ammeter provides an indication of how good the ground is in the current installation. Since the current in the antenna wire produces the radiation that is transmitted, no RF current means that there is no transmission. Plot the RF current versus RF forward power to determine if there are any frequencies where the RF current is out of line with the values recorded for other frequencies. One problem that can be discovered in this way is that of a lead within the ground system that is resonating at the selected frequency. When this occurs, the ground system is receiving all the RF energy rather than the antenna. 22.11.3.3 Voice Radio Check Verify satisfactory operation of the radio and antenna system by obtaining positive confirmation of clear, static-free audio reception by another human transmitting and receiving on another SSB at a distance of at least 2 miles. Operate the DUT by initiating transmission on a convenient idle working frequency. Ask the receiver to confirm that the initial transmission is clear and static-free. Then verify that the return transmission is also clear and static-free. 6615 6616 NOTE: 2182 kHz is designated as the international distress and calling frequency and shall not be used for routine radio testing. 6617 NOTE: The U.S. Coast Guard is no longer monitoring 2182 kHz 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 6626 6627 6628 22.11.3.4 DSC Radio Check Verify satisfactory operation of a DSC calling sequence by obtaining positive confirmation of the MMSI received and, if applicable, the position report received by another DSC-equipped SSB Transceiver at a distance of at least 2 miles. Refer to the manufacturers’ manual to determine how to enter and call the MMSI of a known SSB station, and how to enable position reporting. When the SSB Radio Transceiver switches to a working channel for follow-up voice communications, verify that the reported position, if applicable, was transmitted correctly to the receiving unit. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 234 of 313 2014 NMEA 6629 6630 22.11.4 Dockside Testing 6631 1. Check ground system on antenna tuner and transceiver. 6632 2. Check proper lead in into coupler from antenna (GTO-15 or equivalent). 6633 6634 6635 3. Check transmit power into dummy load. For 150-Watt transmitter, reflected power should be less than 5 Watts on all bands. This represents a Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) of 1.5:1 or less. 6636 4. Check VSWR with antenna connected. 6637 5. Check receiver sensitivity. Tune receiver to WWV and CHU for time check. 6638 6639 6. Measure DC Voltage and current at power connector while transmitting. DC power should drop less than 3%, and current should remain constant across all bands. 6640 6641 7. Measure and plot Radio Frequency (RF) current between the antenna coupler and the antenna across all bands. 6642 8. Perform radio check. 6643 9. Verify operation of the following optional equipment, if installed: 6644 a. External speakers 6645 b. Interfacing 6646 c. SITOR 6647 d. E-mail 6648 e. Remotes 6649 6650 6651 6652 10. On units equipped with Digital Selective Calling (DSC), ensure that the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number has been entered properly and that the vessel’s position is displayed correctly. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 235 of 313 2014 NMEA 6653 6654 22.12 VHF Radio Testing 6655 22.12.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6656 6657 • Wattmeter designed for use on transmitter frequency of 156 MHz and appropriate power level. Full range not to exceed 50 Watts. 6658 6659 6660 • Communications Service Monitor or equivalent discrete test equipment. • AC/DC Multimeter • 50 ohm resistive Dummy Load 6661 6662 6663 6664 22.12.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying VHF radio operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the antenna connection and optional equipment are operating correctly. 6665 6666 NOTE: VHF Radios can be off frequency by as much as 1000 Hz. Simply checking power and VSWR is not enough in some cases 6667 22.12.3 Dockside Testing 6668 6669 1. Measure DC Voltage at power connector while transmitting on full power. Voltage should be no less than 11.5 Volts 6670 2.Check each radio with a service monitor for correct frequency and modulation. 6671 a. Transmit frequency tolerance is +- 1560hZ 6672 b. Modulation +- 5kHz 6673 c. Check the receiver sensitivity: For .35 uv or less for 12db sinad sensitivity 6674 3. Check transmit power (20W minimum) into a dummy load 6675 6676 6677 4. Test forward and reflected power by connecting the fixed-mounted antenna. For a 25-Watt radio, reflected power should be no more than 2.5W. This represents an VSWR of 2:1 or less. 6678 6679 6680 5. Perform a radio check using the automated radio service available in your local area instead of channel 16( if available). Check www.seatow.com for VHF test channels in your area. 6681 6. Perform testing of DSC functionality 6682 7. Verify operation of the following optional equipment, if installed: 6683 d. External speakers 6684 e. Interfacing 6685 f. Scrambler 6686 g. Remotes 6687 6688 6689 8. On DSC equipped units, ensure that the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number has been entered properly, and that the vessel position is displayed correctly. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 236 of 313 2014 NMEA 6690 6691 6692 6693 6694 6695 22.12.4 VHF Antenna Testing Each fixed-mounted VHF Radio Transceiver connected to a fixed-mounted antenna shall be subjected to the following three tests in accordance with the described procedures. The tests’ objectives are to ensure that all connections are solid and power distribution is adequately sized for the intended load. 22.12.4.1 RF Power and Power Consumption 6696 6697 The VHF Radio Transceiver ( Device Under Test or DUT) shall be connected to the following test equipment in accordance with the diagram in Figure 95.. 6698 6699 6700 A Wattmeter with the appropriate element capable of measuring forward and reflected power in the frequency range of 156 MHz to 163MHz, shall be inserted in-line between the DUT output connector and the antenna coaxial cable. 6701 6702 6703 A multimeter or Voltmeter shall be connected across the positive and negative power leads to the DUT. An existing panel meter is sufficient, provided it meets the requirements of Section 2.3.2, Voltmeters. 6704 6705 A multimeter or ammeter capable of measuring and displaying 150% of the rated DUT transmit current shall be connected in series with the positive power lead. 6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 6713 Figure 95: VHF Radio Test Setup Operate the DUT by initiating a transmission on a convenient idle channel while the unit is set to transmit at its highest output power, monitoring is required during the test. While transmitting, measure the characteristics identified in Table 48 using the attached instrumentation, and verify that the characteristics are within the required tolerances. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 237 of 313 2014 NMEA 6714 Table 48: VHF Test Measurements 6715 Test Measurement 1 2 3 RF forward power RF reflected power at the DUT output connector Voltage at the DUT input connector 4 Current at the DUT input connector Nominal Value 25 Watts 0 Watts Tolerance ≥ 20 Watts ≤ 3 Watts 13.2 Volts ≥ 11.7 Volts Rated Transmit Current ≤ 125% Rated Transmit Current 6716 DUT= Device Under Test 6717 6718 6719 6720 NOTE: For accurate power readings, the Wattmeter should connect directly to the radio’s RF output using a barrel connector or appropriate RF adapter. Where a direct connection is impractical, an electrical half-wavelength test coaxial cable should be fabricated and used to connect the radio's RF output to the Wattmeter 6721 6722 6723 6724 6725 6726 6727 6728 6729 6730 6731 6732 6733 6734 22.12.4.2 Voice Radio Check Verify satisfactory operation of the radio and antenna system by obtaining positive confirmation of loud and clear, static-free audio reception by another human transmitting and receiving on another VHF at a distance of at least 2 miles. Operate the DUT by initiating transmission on a convenient idle channel, while hailing another known operator. Ask the receiver to confirm that the initial transmission is clear and static-free. Then verify that the return transmission is also clear and static-free. NOTE: Channel 16 is designated as the international distress and calling channel but can be used very briefly to establish contact and switch to another channel. Channel 16 should not be used for routine radio testing. NOTE: There are regional dedicated automated VHF radio check channels that should be used. See http://www.seatow.com/map/arcs/ 22.12.4.3 DSC Radio Check and Test Call 6735 6736 On DSC equipped units, ensure that the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number has been entered properly, and that the vessel position is displayed correctly. 6737 6738 6739 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 Verify satisfactory operation of a DSC calling sequence by obtaining positive confirmation of the MMSI received and, if applicable, the position report received by another DSC-equipped VHF Transceiver at a distance of at least 2 miles. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual to determine how to enter and call the MMSI of a known VHF station, and how to enable position reporting. When the VHF Radio Transceiver switches to a working channel for follow-up voice communications, verify that the reported position, if applicable, was transmitted correctly to the receiving unit. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 238 of 313 2014 NMEA 6746 22.13 AIS Testing 6747 22.13.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6748 • Wattmeter 6749 • Voltmeter 6750 • Laptop Computer 6751 • AIS Test Box 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 22.13.2 Detailed AIS Test Requirements In addition to verifying AIS operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the antenna connections, receiver, display, and optional equipment are operating correctly. 22.13.2.1 Dockside Testing 6757 1. Test input Voltage Drop 6758 2. Test output power and reflected power per manufacturer instructions 6759 3. Confirm AIS receives data from other vessels 6760 4. Confirm that the correct data is transmitted by checking with another vessel 6761 5. Or check www.marinetraffic.com/ais 6762 6. Test pilot plug operation 6763 6764 22.14 Satellite TV & Communications System Setup and Testing 6765 22.14.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 Laptop computer with diagnostic software AC/DC Multimeter 22.14.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying satellite television operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that satellite acquisition and tracking are properly adjusted. 22.14.2.1 Dockside Testing 6773 1. Verify system voltage at power connector during normal operation. 6774 2. Verify that system setup is properly configured for basic operation. 6775 3. Verify correct registration and programming with service provider. 6776 4. Check received signal strength processed by receiver on video display. 6777 5. Confirm proper operational configuration with laptop/software. 6778 6779 6780 6. Following setup and operational verification in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines, perform a voltage test at the power connection to the control unit by observing and recording the measurements identified in Table 50. The 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 239 of 313 2014 NMEA 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 manufacturer documentation should be consulted to determine the mode requiring maximum power, which may require receiving a call or executing a turn during Sea Trial Testing. When the manufacturer does not explicitly specify a minimum operational voltage in addition to the minimum supply voltage, the specified minimum supply voltage shall be used for both tests. Table 49: Satellite System Voltage Test Measurement Supply Voltage (System Power Off) Supply Voltage (System Operating at Maximum Power) Value Minimum Supply Voltage Specified by the Manufacturer Minimum Operational Voltage Specified by the Manufacturer 6788 6789 22.14.2.2 Sea Trial Testing 6790 1. Calibrate electronic heading sensor. 6791 2. Confirm proper antenna acquisition and tracking during course changes. 6792 6793 6794 3. Monitor proper operational parameters while underway with laptop/software. 6795 22.15 Satellite Telephone Installation Testing 6796 22.15.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 AC/DC Multimeter 22.15.2 Detailed Test Requirements In addition to verifying satellite phone operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that satellite acquisition and tracking are properly adjusted. 22.15.2.1 Dockside Testing 6803 1. Verify system voltage at power connector during normal operation. 6804 2. Verify that system setup is properly configured for basic operation. 6805 3. Confirm service provider registration and required programming. 6806 4. Check correct area/ocean region selected. 6807 5. Check signal strength on handset. 6808 6. Verify voice RX and TX test calls from handset. 6809 7. Verify operation of the following optional equipment, if installed: 6810 a. Auxiliary phone programming and perform RX & TX test calls 6811 b. FAX programming and perform RX & TX test calls 6812 c. Data programming and perform RX & TX test calls 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 240 of 313 2014 NMEA 6813 22.15.2.2 Sea Trial Testing 6814 1. Calibrate electronic heading sensor (if provided). 6815 2. Confirm proper antenna acquisition and tracking during course changes. 6816 3. Make and receive test calls on handset while vessel underway. 6817 22.16 Cellular Telephone Installation Testing 6818 22.16.1 Recommended Test Equipment 6819 6820 AC/DC Multimeter Wattmeter with appropriate element 6821 22.16.2 Detailed Test Requirements 6822 6823 6824 6825 In addition to verifying cellular phone operational features in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the following tests ensure that the antenna connection and optional equipment are operating correctly. 22.16.2.1 Dockside Testing 6826 1. Verify system voltage at power connector during normal operation. 6827 2. Confirm service provider registration and programming. 6828 3. Check receive signal strength indicator. 6829 6830 6831 4. Test forward and reflected power to confirm appropriate Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) measurement. (For 3W phone, reflected power should not exceed 1/3 watt. VSWR of 2:1 or less.) 6832 5. Verify voice RX & TX test calls from handset. 6833 6. Verify operation of the following optional equipment, if installed: 6834 a. Auxiliary phone programming and perform RX & TX test calls, 6835 b. FAX programming and perform RX & TX test calls, 6836 c. Data programming and perform RX & TX test calls, 6837 d. Auxiliary alert feature. 6838 6839 End of NMEA 0400 Installation Standard 6840 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 241 of 313 2014 NMEA 6841 APPENDIX A. GLOSSARY 6842 Term/Acronym ABYC ADU or ADE AC AC Grounded Conductor AC Grounding Conductor AC Ungrounded Conductor Attenuation AGM AIS Aperture AWG Azimuth Backbone Power Leg Battery Definition American Boat and Yacht Council, Edgewater, Maryland, USA “Above Deck” Units or Equipment, generally considered exposed to the weather. Alternating Current Current carrying conductor intentionally maintained at ground potential. A normally non-current carrying conductor used to connect metallic, non-current carrying parts of AC devices to ground. (Refer to Section 3, Grounding, Bonding and Lightning Protection for specific details on ground requirements.) The hot, or live current carrying conductor in an AC distribution system. Reduction in signal strength measured in dB. Attenuation generally does not affect the impedance of a device but rather reduces signal level exclusively. Absorbed Glass Mat. A type of battery that contains the electrolyte in a fiberglass mat that is compressed between plates. Automatic Identification System. VHF based system for exchanging navigation information between vessels within lineof-sight of each other. Antenna aperture or effective area is a measure of how effective an antenna is at receiving the power of radio waves. American Wire Gauge. A wire diameter specification. The smaller the AWG number, the larger the wire diameter. The horizontal direction of a celestial point from a terrestrial point, expressed as the angular distance from a reference direction, usually measured from 000o at the reference direction clockwise through 359o. A length of an NMEA 2000® backbone that has its own power (NET-S) and ground (NET-C) connections and is isolated from the power and ground connections of any other backbone power leg. A DC electrical storage device typically with a nominal output voltage of 12v, 24v, or 32v DC. For these standards, a battery may refer to a single battery or to a bank of batteries connected in parallel or series in order to provide a specific voltage and capacity. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 242 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym Battery Charger Battery Isolator Battery Reserve Capacity BDU or BDE Bend Radius BITT BMEA Definition A device designed primarily to charge and maintain a battery that supplies power to DC loads. Diode-based device used to allow the charging of more than a single battery from a single charging source while simultaneously isolating the battery outputs. The number of minutes a new fully charged battery at 26.7ºC (80ºF) can be discharged at 25 amperes and maintain a voltage of 1.75 volts or higher per cell (e.g., 10.5 volts for a 12-volt battery). “Below deck” units or equipment generally considered sheltered from the weather. Minimum radius that a transmission line can be bent before deterioration or degradation in signal quality occurs. AIS Built In Integrity Test British Marine Electronics Association Device that joins two network segments using the same network protocol and address space. Data rate and physical media may differ on the two sides of a bridge. British Standard Pipe thread. Common thread type used in BSP Europe. A transducer that is capable of operating at a multitude of Broadband Transducer frequencies as specified by the transducer manufacturer A twisted pair cable for carrying signals. This type of cable is CAT-5E used in structured cabling for computer networks such as Ethernet. A standardized cable for Gigabit Ethernet and other network CAT-6E CAT 7 physical layers that is backward compatible with the CAT-5E. Inner conductor of a coaxial cable. It may be solid or stranded, Center Conductor depending on the cable design. Code of Federal Regulations. CFR Characteristic Impedance The ratio of applied voltage to resulting current at any point along a transmission line on which there are no standing waves. When connected across the cable’s output terminals, the characteristic impedance makes a transmission cable seem infinitely long. For a majority of marine applications, the characteristic impedance will be either a nominal 50 ohms or a nominal 75 ohms. Compressed High Intensity Radar Pulse (aka Broadband CHIRP Transducer Transducer) Bridge 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 243 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym Coaxial Cable COG Collision Domain Colour Combination Transducer or Triducer CW Data Datagram Data Interfacing Data Sentence DC DC Grounded Conductor DC Grounding Conductor DC Negative DC Positive Definition A transmission line with a cross-section constructed of a center conductor, a solid insulating dielectric, and an outer shield. It is primarily designed to transmit radio frequency signals. It exhibits characteristic impedance that is a result of the diameter of the center conductor, the diameter of the outer conductor, and the dielectric constant of the insulating dielectric. Course Over Ground A collection or set of Ethernet nodes that are connected to a network segment in a manner such that their data transmissions may interfere with each other. International English spelling of the U.S. word “color” A transducer that contains a depth transducer with a speed and temperature sensor in a single mechanical housing. The speed/temp sensor may be permanently mounted in the transducer housing or may be contained in a removable insert that plugs into the housing that is secured to the hull. Combination transducers are available in transom mount and through-hull transducers. Continuous Wave. Radio transmission method where the carrier wave is maintained at a constant amplitude and frequency. Information including a variety of specific values, including but not limited to vessel position, speed, course, heading, depth, and waypoint specifics. A complete, independent and self-contained data entity sent over a network. The connection of marine equipment to enable the transfer of data between devices. A compilation of specific data in a format that is consistent for the purpose of transmitting specifics. Direct Current A current carrying conductor connected to the terminal of the power source that is intentionally maintained at boat ground potential. A normally non-current carrying conductor used to connect metallic, non-current carrying parts of DC devices to ground. (Refer to Section 3, Grounding, Bonding and Lightning Protection for specific details on ground requirements.) The negative terminal of a DC power source. The positive terminal of a DC power source. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 244 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym Decibel (dB) Depth Transducer DGPS DHCP Dielectric Distribution Panel DNS Diplexer Double Insulation System DSC DUT EIA EMI Engine Negative Terminal EPIRB Ethernet Definition A unit that expresses the logarithmic ratio between the input and output signal of any given component, circuit, or system and may be expressed in terms of voltage, current, or power. The following formulas apply: dB = 10Log (Power A / Power B) dB = 20Log (Voltage A / Voltage B) A device that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy or sound. It is intended to operate as part of an echo sounder system and is generally a piezoelectric crystal that resonates at a specific frequency, expressed in Kilohertz. The transducer is a two-way device – it converts electrical energy at its characteristic frequency into mechanical energy (during transmission) and turns received mechanical energy (during reception) into electrical signals. The transducer is connected to the depth sounder by a wire connection. Differential GPS. Radio beacon based GPS correction system. Dynamic Host Control Protocol A material that presents insulating characteristics to electrical current flow. Assembly of devices for the purpose of controlling and/or distributing power on a boat. It includes devices such as circuit breakers, fuses, switches, instruments, and indicators. Domain Name System. A circuit inside a dual frequency transducer that combines the low and high frequency signals so that they can travel in an orderly fashion along the same pair of wires. An insulation system composed of basic insulation and supplementary insulation, with the two insulations physically separated and so arranged that they are not simultaneously subjected to the same deteriorating influences (e.g., temperature, contaminants, and the like) to the same degree. Digital Selective Calling. Device Under Test. Electronic Industries Alliance, Arlington, VA Electromagnetic Interference. The electrical termination point (if provided) on the engine at which the negative battery cable is connected. Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons A frame-based computer network standard that defines physical, media access control and data link layers of the OSI networking model. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 245 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym Fairing Block FCC FCMW Ferrites Flag State Forward Power Geostationary Orbit Gbps GMDSS GNSS Ground Ground, Performance Ground Plate Ground Plane Ground, Reference Ground, Safety GTO-15 HF Hub Definition Wood or plastic block designed as a mechanical transition wedge to match the flat mounting surface of a transducer to the angled surface on the hull. The size and shape will vary based on the transducer size, shape, and the hull dead rise angle and boat speed capability. Fairing blocks may also be used to control the water flow over the face of the transducer. Federal Communications Commission, Washington, DC. Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave (FMCW) style radar Components placed on the end of data cables to reduce interference The flag state of a commercial vessel is the state under whose laws the vessel is registered or licensed. RF power transmitted out from the radio to the antenna Satellite orbit directly above the Earth's equator (0° latitude) at an altitude of 35,786 km. and with a period equal to the Earth's rotational period; Geostationary satellites appear motionless in the sky, A gigabit per second is a unit of data transfer rate equal to:1,000 megabits per second or 1,000,000 kilobits per second or 1,000,000,000 bits per second or 125,000,000 bytes per second. Global Maritime Distress and Safety System. Global Navigation Satellite System Ground applies to the potential of the earth’s surface. The boat’s ground is established by a conducting connection, intentional or accidental, with the earth, including any conductive part of the wetted surface of a hull. Used to reduce noise in electronic equipment and improve signal transmission and reception by providing a dedicated path to ground for RF energy that bypasses reference ground conductors. Used to establish a specific potential with respect to power or signals in order to induce current flow in a desired direction. Generally non-current carrying conductor intended to short dangerous potentials away from personnel, equipment, and the vessel in order to prevent injury or damage. A high voltage wire used in an SSB installation. High Frequency. An RF band in the range 3 to 30 MHz See Repeater. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 246 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym Ignition Protection Definition The design and construction of a device such that, under design operating conditions: 1. It will not ignite a flammable hydrocarbon mixture surrounding the device when an ignition source causes an internal explosion; or 2. It is incapable of releasing sufficient electrical or thermal energy to ignite a hydrocarbon mixture; or Impedance IMO Impedance Mismatch In-Hull Transducer INMARSAT Input Interference IP 3. Its source of ignition is hermetically sealed. Resistance to current flow by an individual reactive element such as an inductor or capacitor or a combination circuit containing inductors and capacitors. Impedance is expressed in ohms and may contain inductive and capacitive reactive elements. International Maritime Organization The result of differences in source and load impedance. As the value of impedance mismatch between source and load is increased, the resulting power transfer is reduced. The ratio of mismatch is expressed as a ratio that takes into account all reactive and resistive components. A 1.0:1.0 is a perfect match between source and load. A depth-only transducer that is glued inside the hull to allow depth sounder operation without the requirement of drilling a hole in the hull or mounting a transducer on the transom. This style of transducer requires a solid fiberglass hull material to function. NOTE: Cored fiberglass, wood, aluminum, and steel hulls are unacceptable for this style transducer. An international telecommunications company that provides telephony and data services to user’s world-wide. Inmarsat also provides global maritime distress and safety services (GMDSS) to ships and aircraft at no charge. A signal or power that is applied to a piece of electronic equipment or transmission cable. Disturbances of an electromagnetic or electrical nature that introduce undesirable responses from other electrical or electronic equipment or impede the performance of other electrical or electronic equipment. Internet Protocol. A protocol for routing data packets between connected devices and between connected networks, and a common element of the public Internet. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 247 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym IPX IP67 Kbps LAN Listener LEN LEO LF mA MEIPA Mbps MBS MEO Metre MF MMSI Multi-Frequency Transducer NetBEUI NetBIOS NMEA Definition Internetwork Packet Exchange. A declining protocol for routing data packets between connected devices and between connected networks, originally used for Novell. An IP Code, Ingress Protection Rating, classifies and rates the degree of protection a piece of equipment has against the intrusion of solid objects and water. A kilobit per second is a unit of data transfer rate equal to: 1,000 bits per second or 125 bytes per second. Local Area Network Device that receives data from other equipment. Load Equivalency Number. Low Earth Orbit. An orbit within the range extending from the Earth’s surface up to an altitude of 2,000 km. Low Frequency. An RF band in the range 30 to 300 kHz. Mill amperes. Marine Electronics Industry Promotion Association(S. Korea) Megabit per second is a unit of data transfer rate equal to: 1,000,000 bits per second or 1,000 kilobits per second or 125,000 bytes per second or 125 kilobytes per second Main Bang Suppression Medium Earth Orbit. An orbit within the range extending from above Low Earth Orbit to below geostationary orbit. International English spelling of the U.S. word “meter” Medium Frequency. An RF band in the range 300 kHz to 3 MHz Maritime Mobile Service Identity number. International identifier assigned to uniquely designate a vessel for telecommunications. A transducer that is capable of operating on more than one operating frequency (e.g., 50KHz and 200KHz.). This is accomplished either by using a single crystal element that resonates at both frequencies or by including two separate elements in a single housing. NetBIOS Extended User Interface. Un-routed protocol for exchanging NetBIOS frames within a single network segment. Network Basic I/O System. Low-level network communication protocol developed by IBM for personal computers. National Marine Electronics Association, Severna Park, MD. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 248 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym NMEA 0183 Interface Standard NMEA 2000® Interface Standard NPT NMMA Node OFCOM OSI Over-current Protection Device PEP PGN PoE Polarized System Power Insertion Point PSI Receive Data PtoMP Reflected Power Repeater RF RJ-45 Definition Developed by the National Marine Electronics Association as a standard to specify the data, format, and hardware requirements for a single talker, multi-listener data interface exchange. Developed by the National Marine Electronics Association as a standard to specify the data, format, and hardware requirements for a multi-talker, multi-listener network data interface exchange. National Pipe Tapered thread. Common thread type used in United States. National Marine Manufacturers Association The attachment of a transmitter/receiver to the signaling channel at the physical implementation layer. Office of Communications. The UK office that issues MMSI numbers and controls the use of radio spectrum. Open Systems Interconnection. Reference model that describes required network functions as a layered set of services. A device, such as a fuse or circuit breaker, designed to interrupt the circuit when the current flow exceeds a predetermined value for a specified period of time. Peak envelope power, a measure of radio transmitter signal strength Parameter Group Number. Identifier used to designate the content and format of an NMEA 2000® datagram. Power Over Ethernet. Method of utilizing the spare pairs in an Ethernet cable to distribute power to connected hubs or other devices in remote locations. A system in which the grounded (negative) and ungrounded (positive) conductors are connected in the same relation to terminals or leads on devices in the circuit. A physical connection to the power (NET-S) and ground (NETC) pair used to connect an NMEA 2000® backbone power leg to a power source. Pounds-per-Square-Inch. Information received by a listener. Point to Multi-Point Power reflected back from the antenna to the radio. Device that joins two or more networks with the same network protocol and address space. Radio Frequency. A type of modular connector for computer network cables 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 249 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym RS-232 RS-422 Router RRU RTCM SBAS Self-Limiting Sheath Shield Shunt Single Talker SNR SOG Solenoid Speed/Temp Sensor SSB Switch Definition A standard for serial binary data signals commonly used in computer serial ports. NMEA 0183 versions prior to 2.0 were based off RS-232. A standard for serial binary data signals commonly used in computer serial ports. NMEA 0183 Versions after 2.0 are based off RS-422. Device that joins two networks with the same network protocol. On each side of a router, the address space, data rate, and physical media may differ. Rudder Reference Unit Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services Satellite Base Augmentation System (SBAS), Device in which the output remains at a value that will not damage the device after application of a short circuit at the DC output terminals for a period of 15 days. A material used as a continuous protective covering, such as overlapping electrical tape, woven sleeve, molded rubber, molded plastic, shrink tubing, loom, spiral wrap or flexible tubing, around one or more insulated conductors. A sheet, screen, or braid of metal, usually copper, aluminum, or other conducting material, placed around or between electric circuits, cables, or their components to contain unwanted radiation or to keep out unwanted interference. A conductor of known resistance placed in series with a circuit to indicate current flow by measurement of the voltage drop across this conductor. Only one device may transmit data on the data lines. Signal-to-noise ratio. Speed Over Ground A type of marine power steering A device that contains two independent sensing devices. The first is designed to generate electrical pulses at a rate proportional to the speed of the boat through the water. The second is electrically related to the temperature of the water. Single Side Band. A device that incorporates several bridges, allowing the creation of complex networks of multiple independent segments. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 250 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym SWR Talker TCP/IP TDR Terminal Block Through-Hull Transducer TIA Transmission Loss Transmit Data Transom Mount Transducer Trip-Free Circuit Breaker USCG USB UPS VHF VLF Definition Standing Wave Ratio. Also known as Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR). A ratio of the maximum amplitude to the minimum amplitude of a standing wave along a transmission line as a result of reflected energy. The reflected energy is a result of an impedance mismatch of the load with reference to the transmission line characteristic impedance. A device that transmits data for use by other equipment. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) provides end-to-end connectivity specifying how data should be formatted, addressed, transmitted, routed and received at the destination Time Domain Reflectometer. An electronic instrument used to characterize and locate faults in metallic cables (e.g., twisted pair, coax). A device intended as a fixed mounted termination to establish a secure mechanical and electrical connection of the terminal lugs attached to the end of two lengths of wire. A transducer designed to be mounted through the bottom of the hull of the boat. A hole must be drilled through the hull, and a fairing block may be required to level the face of the transducer to be parallel with respect to the water’s surface. Telecommunications Industry Association, Arlington, VA Attenuation of radio frequency signals due to signal losses in transmission cable. Information sentences transmitted from a talker device. A transducer that is designed to be mounted to the exterior of the transom of the boat. A resettable over-current protection device, designed so that the means of resetting cannot override the current interrupting mechanism. United States Coast Guard. Universal Serial Bus. Uninterruptible Power Supply. Equipment that maintains a continuous electric power supply to protected equipment by supplying power from a separate source, such as a battery, when the primary source is unavailable. Very High Frequency. An RF band in the range 30 to 300 MHz Very Low Frequency. An RF band in the range 3 to 30 kHz. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 251 of 313 2014 NMEA Term/Acronym VSWR WAAS WAN Watertight Weatherproof WEP Wi-Fi WPA 10BaseT 100BaseTX 1000BaseT Definition Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. Also known as Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). A ratio of the maximum amplitude to the minimum amplitude of a standing wave along a transmission line as a result of reflected energy. The reflected energy is a result of an impedance mismatch of the load with reference to the transmission line characteristic impedance. Wide Area Augmentation System. Satellite based GPS correction system. Wide Area Network Constructed so that water will not enter the enclosure under test conditions specified in NEMA Standard 250. Constructed or protected so that exposure to the weather will not interfere with successful operation. NOTE: For the purpose of these standards, as applied to marine use, weatherproof implies resistance to rain, spray, and splash. Wired Equivalent Privacy. An encryption method used to secure wireless networks. Superseded by WPA. A set of product compatibility standards for implementing wireless local area networks. Wi-Fi Protected Access. An encryption method used to secure wireless networks that also employs methods of key management. Earlier versions of Ethernet hardware over copper wiring Most common version of Ethernet hardware over copper wiring currently produced today The standard for gigabit Ethernet hardware over copper wiring 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 252 of 313 2014 NMEA 6843 6844 APPENDIX B. VESSEL COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST Commissioning Checklist Boat Name: Owner’s Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Address: Type: Dealer Phone: Radar: Display Type ____________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Scanner Type ___________________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Timing adjustment ____________________Heading offset _______________________ Waypoint data displayed: yes or no Instrument data displayed: yes or no Close-in targets shown: yes or no Closest Target Distance _______________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ Autopilot: Type _______________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Compass: Deviation ___________________________ Heading Offset __________ Location _______________ Pilot Type _________ Cal Lock __________ Rudder Gain ________Counter Rudder _______Rudder Offset _____ Rudder Limit ______ Turn Rate __________ Cruise Speed________Off Course ___________Auto Trim ________ Power Steer ________ Drive Type _________ Rudder Damp _______Variation ____________Auto Adapt _______ Latitude ___________ Wind Trim _________ Tack Angle _________Auto Release _________Response _________ Rudder Low ____________ Rudder High ____________ Counter Rudder Low _____ Counter Rudder High _____ Auto Trim Low __________ Auto Trim High _________ Rudder Limit Low _______ Rudder Limit High _______ Ability to steer to a waypoint: yes or no Ability to sail to wind: yes or no VERIFY Notes______________________________________________________________________ Instruments: Type ____________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Depth: Datum _______________________(water line or keel) Speed: Log cal factor __________________ Wind angle: Offset ____________________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ Ships Compass: Type _________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Deviations Pilot Compass GPS/Magnetic 000 _________________ _________________ 090 _________________ _________________ 180 _________________ _________________ 270 _________________ _________________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ VHF: Type ____________________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Output Test: High Power ___________________ Low Power ________________Weather Stations Rx ________ MMSI _________________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ Date 6845 6846 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 253 of 313 2014 NMEA Commissioning Checklist (page 2) Boat Name: Owner’s Name: Type: SSB: Type _____________________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ MMSI _________________ Band Frequency Selected RF Forward Power RF Reflected Power RF Current 2000 kHz 4000 kHz 6000 kHz 8000 kHz 12000 kHz 16000 kHz 18000 kHz 22000 kHz 25000 kHz Auto tune? yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes or or or or or or or or or no no no no no no no no no Notes______________________________________________________________________ Satellite Phone: Type __________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Satellite TV: Type _____________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Shaded/shadowed Bearings _______________________________________ (from bow) Notes______________________________________________________________________ Other: Type ___________________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ Other: Type ___________________ Model _________________________Serial Number __________________ Notes______________________________________________________________________ General Notes: ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Sea Trial Testing Conducted By: ________________________________________________________________ Sea Trial Testing Sea State____________ Speed at which Depth indication stopped___________ Manual Binder Aboard All Remotes w/batteries Aboard Date 6847 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 254 of 313 2014 NMEA 6848 APPENDIX C: VESSEL INSPECTION INFORMATION 6849 6850 6851 The following forms are available for download on the NMEA website for commercial and recreational vessel electronics inspections. 6852 http://www.nmea.org/content/vessel_inspect/vessel_inspect.asp 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 6862 6863 Compulsory Vessel Inspections • • • • • • • • GMDSS Inspection and Installation Check List 2009 Small Passenger Inspection and Installation Check List 2009 Go to http://www.rtcm.org/navguide.php for navigation requirements. Go to http://www.rtcm.org/gmdssguide.php for equipment requirements. AIS Class A Installation Inspection Check List (Coming Soon) Fishing Vessel Radio Installation For Compliance with the Fishing Vessel GMDSS Waiver Fisheries Inspection Check List (Coming Soon) How to Conduct a Great Lakes Small Passenger Vessel Inspection 6864 6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 6875 6876 6877 6878 6879 FCC Inspector Requirements • • • • • • • Licenses General Radiotelephone Operator License GROL How to Conduct a GMDSS Inspection License Program Who Needs a License Examination License GMDSS Radio Operator Maintainer Licenses Ship Radar Endorsement FCC Forms NOAA Forms FCC Qualified Inspector • • Application For Qualified FCC Inspectors Qualified FCC Inspectors by Location Voluntary Vessel Inspection • • DSC-VHF Installation Check List AIS Class B Installation Inspection Check List (Coming Soon) 6880 6881 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 255 of 313 2014 NMEA 6882 APPENDIX D. WIRE GAUGE AND VOLTAGE DROP REFERENCE TABLES 6883 6884 Common US Wire Gauges with Typical Characteristics Gauge 1 Circular Weight 2 Resistance 2 1 (AWG) Mil Area lbs. per kg per Ω per Ω per 1000 ft. 100 m. 1000 ft. 100 m. 4/0 211,600 837 125 0.049 0.016 3/0 167,800 675 100 0.062 0.020 2/0 133,100 549 82 0.077 0.025 1/0 105,600 437 65 0.099 0.032 1 83,690 350 52 0.127 0.042 2 66,360 266 40 0.157 0.052 4 41,740 181 27 0.240 0.079 6 26,240 118 18 0.400 0.131 8 16,510 75 11 0.620 0.203 10 10,380 46 6.8 0.980 0.322 12 6,530 31 4.6 1.75 0.574 14 4,110 19 2.8 2.73 0.896 16 2,580 13 1.9 4.00 1.31 18 1,620 8.0 1.2 6.92 2.27 20 1,020 5.0 0.7 10.9 3.58 22 640 1.9 0.29 17.5 5.74 24 404 1.2 0.18 27.7 9.09 26 253 0.8 0.11 44.4 14.6 28 159 0.48 0.072 70.7 23.2 30 100 0.30 0.045 112 36.7 32 64 0.20 0.029 164 53.8 34 40 0.12 0.018 261 85.6 36 25 0.08 0.011 415 136 6885 6886 Notes: 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 1. American Wire Gauge (AWG) and Circular Mil Area from Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, 14th Edition, Fink, Donald G. and H. Wayne Beaty, 2000. 2. Wire Weight and Resistance from Ancor and Belden catalogs for industry preferred stranding. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 256 of 313 2014 NMEA 6893 6894 Common Metric Wire Gauges Compared to AWG Gauge 1 A (mm2) Circular Mil Area (AWG) 0.05 0.08 0.14 0.25 0.34 0.38 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 99 158 276 493 671 750 987 1,480 1,974 2,960 4,934 7,894 11,841 19,735 31,576 49,338 69,073 98,676 138,147 187,485 236,823 30 28 26 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 Notes: 1. US wire gauge (AWG) listed is the closest gauge. Area of metric equivalent may vary by – 10% smaller to +22% larger than the AWG listed. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 257 of 313 2014 NMEA 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 Voltage Drop The minimum circular mil area, and thus the wire gauge, necessary to ensure that the voltage drop on any circuit is equal to or less than a certain value, is easily computed for copper wire using the following equation: CM = K x I x L / E Where: K = 10.75 (resistivity constant for copper) I = Current (amps) L = Round Trip Wire Distance (feet) E = Maximum Voltage Drop Allowed (volts) 6905 (Equation C-1) 6906 6907 6908 6909 The following tables are based on application of this equation for specific voltage drop limits and identify the minimum AWG for various circuit lengths in English and Metric units. The table columns identify the round-trip distance between the power source and the load, which is found by multiplying the distance between the source and the load by two. 6910 6911 6912 6913 When the circuit includes a switch loop in addition to the run between the power source and the load, compute the total distance by adding the switch loop length to circuit length, and multiplying by two, as shown in the following diagram. Load Switch Loop L1 Switch L2 Total Distance = (L1 + L2) 6914 6915 6916 Source 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 258 of 313 2014 NMEA 6917 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (US) 1% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 5 20 14 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 22 18 16 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 24 20 16 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 6 Distance from source to device (feet) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 1/0 3/0 4/0 1/0 3/0 4/0 2/0 3/0 2/0 4/0 2/0 4/0 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 3/0 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 10 10 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 6 6 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 2 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 70 8 4 2 2/0 4/0 12 6 4 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 12 8 6 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 6918 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 259 of 313 2014 NMEA 6919 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (US) 3% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 5 24 20 18 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 28 22 20 18 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 8 28 24 22 18 16 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 Distance from source to device (feet) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 22 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 6 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4 2 2 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 16 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 18 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 2 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 8 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 6 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 26 24 22 22 20 20 20 20 18 18 20 20 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 18 16 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 10 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 8 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 10 10 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 1/0 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 70 12 8 6 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 16 12 8 6 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 18 12 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 1/0 2/0 6920 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 260 of 313 2014 NMEA 6921 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (US) 10% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 5 30 24 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 12 12 12 32 28 26 22 20 20 18 18 18 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 32 28 26 24 22 20 20 20 18 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 Distance from source to device (feet) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 26 24 24 22 22 22 20 20 20 18 22 20 18 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 2 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 2 2 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 8 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 30 28 26 26 24 24 24 24 22 22 24 24 22 20 20 20 18 18 18 18 22 20 20 18 18 18 16 16 16 14 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 18 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 8 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 10 10 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 30 28 28 26 26 26 24 24 24 24 26 24 22 22 22 20 20 20 20 18 24 22 20 20 20 18 18 18 16 16 20 20 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 18 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 16 16 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 70 18 14 12 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1/0 22 16 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 2 22 18 16 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 6922 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 261 of 313 2014 NMEA 6923 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (Metric) 1% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 22 16 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 24 20 18 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 26 20 18 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 Distance from source to device (meters) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 18 16 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 6 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 8 6 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 2 1 1/0 3/0 4/0 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 1 2/0 3/0 1 2/0 3/0 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 12 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 8 6 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 8 6 4 2 2 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 4 2 1 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 22 20 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 18 16 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 12 10 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 10 10 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 8 6 6 4 2 2 2 1 1/0 1/0 8 6 4 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 8 6 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 6 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 4 2 1 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 20 6 4 2 2/0 4/0 12 6 4 2 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 12 8 6 2 2 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 6924 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 262 of 313 2014 NMEA 6925 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (Metric) 3% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 26 22 20 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 30 24 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 12 12 10 30 26 24 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 12 12 12 Distance from source to device (meters) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 24 22 20 18 18 16 16 14 14 14 18 16 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 8 6 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 8 6 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 8 6 4 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 6 4 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 6 4 2 2 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4 4 2 1 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 26 24 24 22 20 20 18 18 18 16 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 12 20 18 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 10 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 12 10 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 10 10 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 8 8 6 4 2 2 2 1 1/0 1/0 8 6 6 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 8 6 6 4 2 2 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 8 6 4 4 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 28 26 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 22 20 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 20 18 18 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 18 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 8 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 12 10 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 4 12 10 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 10 10 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 20 14 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 16 12 10 6 4 4 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 18 12 10 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 1/0 6926 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 263 of 313 2014 NMEA 6927 Wire Gauge to Limit Voltage Drop at Various Currents, Lengths, and Voltages (Metric) 10% Drop 12 Volts 24 Volts 32 Volts Current (amps) 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 1 32 26 24 22 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 14 12 34 30 28 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 16 16 16 36 30 28 26 24 22 22 20 20 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 Distance from source to device (meters) – See Diagram Wire gauge sizes are already computed for round trip 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 28 26 26 24 22 22 20 20 20 18 24 22 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 14 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 12 18 16 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 12 10 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 12 10 8 8 6 4 4 4 2 2 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 10 8 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 1 32 30 28 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 26 24 24 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 24 22 22 20 18 18 16 16 16 14 22 20 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 12 20 18 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 18 16 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 18 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 8 8 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 16 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 14 14 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 4 32 30 30 28 26 26 24 24 24 24 28 26 24 24 22 20 20 20 18 18 26 24 22 20 20 18 18 18 16 16 22 20 20 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 20 20 18 16 14 14 14 12 12 12 20 18 16 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 18 16 16 14 12 12 10 10 10 10 18 16 14 14 12 10 10 10 8 8 18 16 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 16 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 6 6 6 14 14 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 6 14 12 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 20 18 14 12 8 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 22 16 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 22 18 16 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 6928 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 264 of 313 2014 NMEA 6929 APPENDIX E. BATTERY CAPACITY CALCULATION 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 Absolute battery capacity depends on many factors including ambient temperature and discharge rate. A battery discharged at a low rate will last longer and provide more apparent ampere-hours than the same battery discharged at a higher rate. In general battery capacities are advertised at only one specific discharge rate, which is usually not the discharge rate for the intended application. The capacity most commonly advertised is Battery Reserve Capacity, which is also known as Reserve Capacity. Reserve Capacity is specified in minutes and represents the time required to discharge the battery to 1.2 volts per cell when the ambient temperature is 80° F (27° C) and the discharge rate is 25 amperes. 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 Peukert’s Equation may be used to determine if a battery with a specified Reserve Capacity is sufficient for the required application. Peukert’s Equation describes a generalized capacity curve where the available capacity decreases as the discharge rate increases. The specific curve characteristics are determined by the constant known as Peukert’s Constant, and vary depending on the battery type and construction. Cp = Ik x t Where: Cp = Peukert's Capacity I = Discharge Current (amps) t = Discharge Time (hours) k = Peukert's Constant 6943 (Equation D-1) 6944 6945 6946 6947 Peukert’s Capacity represents the nominal battery capacity in ampere-hours when discharged at a 1 ampere discharge rate. Whenever possible, Peukert’s Constant should be taken from the battery manufacturer documentation. Typical values are given in the following table for various battery constructions when manufacturer values are not available. 6948 Typical Peukert’s Constant Ranges Minimum Maximum Average Wet Cell 1.2 1.6 1.4 Gel Cell 1.1 1.25 1.175 AGM 1.05 1.15 1.1 6949 6950 6951 6952 The Battery Reserve Capacity required to support a specific application is determined using a straightforward two-step process. The average discharge current and the time duration that the discharge rate is anticipated between charges must be known prior to using this method. 6953 6954 6955 1. Using Peukert’s Equation, compute the Peukert Capacity based on the average discharge current and required discharge time. Select from the table the average value for Peukert’s Constant corresponding to the selected battery type. 6956 6957 2. Rewriting Peukert’s Equation to solve for time as shown in equation 2, compute the discharge time for the computer capacity when with a discharge current of 25 amperes – this 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 265 of 313 2014 NMEA 6958 6959 is the Reserve Capacity provided by battery manufacturers. Be sure to use the same value for Peukert’s Constant as used in step 1. t = Cp / Ik Where: Cp = Peukert's Capacity I = Discharge Current (amps) t = Discharge Time (hours) k = Peukert's Constant 6960 (Equation D-2) 6961 6962 6963 6964 For example, in Section 4.1.2.1, Emergency Communications Battery Capacity, an average discharge current of 12 amperes was required for a 6-hour duration. The following calculations demonstrate how to compute the Battery Reserve Capacity when an AGM battery is used for the Emergency Communications Battery. 6965 Peukert’s Capacity 6966 6967 6968 = (12)1.1 x 6 = 92.3 ampere-hours Reserve Capacity = (92.3) / (25)1.1 = 2.7 hours 6969 6970 Since most manufacturers publish their reserve capacity in minutes, multiply the result obtained above by 60 to get 162 minutes. 6971 6972 6973 6974 6975 Note that this method calculates the capacity required to full discharge! To ensure a long battery life, a battery should not be discharged below 50%. Accordingly, the Reserve Capacity should be doubled for most applications. However, for an Emergency Communications Battery, there is no requirement that that the battery be recharged after encountering a complete 6 hour emergency situation, and would normally be replaced. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 266 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX F NMEA 0183 V 4.10 SENTENCE DESCRIPTIONS The following list contains all NMEA 0183 Sentence Descriptions as of Version 4.10. Please check www.nmea.org for the most up-to-date list as new sentences are occasionally added to the NMEA 0183 standard. AAM – Waypoint Arrival Alarm ABK – AIS Addressed and Binary Broadcast Acknowledgement ABM – AIS Addressed Binary and Safety Related Message ACA – AIS Regional Channel Assignment Message ACF – General AtoN Station Configuration Command ACG – Extended General AtoN Station Configuration Command ACK – Acknowledge Alarm ACM – AIS Base Station Addressed Channel Management Command ACS – AIS Channel Management Information Source ADS – Automatic Device Status AFB – AtoN Forced Broadcast Command AGA – AIS Base Station Broadcast of a Group Assignment Command AID – AtoN Identification Configuration Command AIR – AIS Interrogation Request AKD – Acknowledge Detail Alarm Condition ALA – Set Detail Alarm Condition ALR – Set Alarm State APB – Heading/Track Controller (Autopilot) Sentence "B" ASN –AIS Base Station Broadcast of Assignment Command BBM – AIS Broadcast Binary Message BCG – Base Station Configuration, General Command BCL – Base Station Configuration, Location Command BEC – Bearing & Distance to Waypoint – Dead Reckoning BOD – Bearing - Origin to Destination BWC – Bearing & Distance to Waypoint – Great Circle BWR – Bearing & Distance to Waypoint – Rhumb Line BWW – Bearing – Waypoint to Waypoint CBR – Configure Broadcast Rates for AIS AtoN Station Message Command 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 267 of 313 2014 NMEA CEK – Configure Encryption Key Command COP – Configure the Operational Period, Command CPC – Configure Parameter-code for UNIX Time Parameter (c) CPD – Configure Parameter-code for Destination-identification Parameter (d) CPG – Configure Parameter-code for the Sentence-Grouping Parameter (g) CPN – Configure Parameter-code for the Line-count Parameter (n) CPR – Configure Parameter-code for Relative (epoch / event) Time Parameter (r) CPS – Configure Parameter-code for the Source-identification Parameter(s) CPT – Configure Parameter-code for a Text-string Parameter (t) CUR –- Water Current Layer DBT – Depth Below Transducer DDC – Display Dimming Control DLM – Data Link Management Slot Allocations for Base Station Command DOR – Door Status Detection DSC – Digital Selective Calling Information DSE – Expanded Digital Selective Calling DSI – DSC Transponder Initialize DSR – DSC Transponder Response DTM – Datum Reference ECB – Configure Broadcast Schedules for Base Station Messages, Command ETL – Engine Telegraph Operation Status EVE – General Event Message FIR – Fire Detection FSR – Frame Summary of AIS Reception GBS– GNSS Satellite Fault Detection GEN – Generic Binary Information GFA - GNSS Fix Accuracy and Integrity GGA – Global Positioning System Fix Data GLC – Geographic Position – Loran-C GLL – Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude GMP – GNSS Map Projection Fix Data GNS – GNSS Fix Data GRS – GNSS Range Residuals GSV – GNSS Satellites In View 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 268 of 313 2014 NMEA HDG – Heading, Deviation & Variation HDT – Heading, True HMR – Heading Monitor Receive HMS – Heading Monitor Set HSS – Hull Stress Surveillance Systems HTC – Heading/Track Control Command HTD – Heading/Track Control Data LCD – Loran-C Signal Data LRF – AIS Long-Range Function LRI – AIS Long-Range Interrogation LR1 – AIS Long-range Reply Sentence 1 LR2 – AIS Long-range Reply Sentence 2 LR3 – AIS Long-range Reply Sentence 3 MEB – Message Input for Broadcast, Command MLA – GLONASS Almanac Data MSK – MSK Receiver Interface Command MSS – MSK Receiver Signal MTW Water Temperature MWD Wind Direction & Speed MWV Wind Speed & Angle NAK Negative Acknowledgement NRM – NAVTEX Receiver Mask Command NRX – NAVTEX Received Message OSD – Own Ship Data POS - Device Position and Ship Dimensions Report or Configuration Command PRC – Propulsion Remote Control Status RMA – Recommended Minimum Specific Loran-C Data RMB – Recommended Minimum Navigation Information RMC – Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data ROR – Rudder Order Status ROT – Rate Of Turn RPM – Revolutions RSA – Rudder Sensor Angle 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 269 of 313 2014 NMEA RSD – Radar System Data RST – Equipment Reset Command RTE – Routes RTE – Routes SFI – Scanning Frequency Information Status and Command SID – Set an Equipment’s Identification and Command SPO – Select AIS Device’s Processing and Output, Command SSD – AIS Ship Static Data STN – Multiple Data ID TBR – TAG Block Report Request TBS – TAG Block Listener Source-identification Configuration Command TFR – Transmit Feed-Back Report THS – True Heading and Status TLB – Target Label TLL – Target Latitude and Longitude TPC – Transmit Slot Prohibit, Command TRC – Thruster Control Data TRD – Thruster Response Data TSA – Transmit Slot Assignment TSP – Temporary Transmit Slot Prohibit TSR – Transmit Slot Prohibit Status Report TTD – Tracked Target Data TTM – Tracked Target Message TUT – Transmission of Multi-language Text TXT – Text Transmission UID – User Identification Code Transmission VBW – Dual Ground/Water Speed VDM – AIS VHF Data-link Message VDO – AIS VHF Data-Link Own-Vessel Report VDR – Set & Drift VER – Version VHW – Water Speed and Heading VLW – Dual Ground/Water Distance VPW – Speed – Measured Parallel to Wind 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 270 of 313 2014 NMEA VSD – AIS Voyage Static Data VSI – VDL Signal Information VTG – Course Over Ground & Ground Speed WAT – Water Level Detection WCV – Waypoint Closure Velocity WNC – Distance – Waypoint to Waypoint WPL – Waypoint Location XDR – Transducer Measurements XTR – Cross-Track Error – Dead Reckoning ZDA – Time & Date ZDL – Time & Distance to Variable Point ZFO – UTC & Time from Origin Waypoint 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 271 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX G: NMEA 0183 VERSION 4.10 SENTENCE TALKER IDENTIFIERS TALKER DEVICE Independent AIS Base Station Dependent AIS Base Station HEADING TRACK CONTROLLER (Autopilot): General Magnetic Mobile Class A or B AIS Station AIS Aids to Navigation Station AIS Receiving Station AIS Station (ITU_R M1371, (“Limited Base Station’) AIS Transmitting Station AIS Simplex Repeater Station Bilge Systems Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System COMMUNICATIONS: Digital Selective Calling (DSC) Data Receiver Satellite Radio-Telephone (MF/HF) Radio-Telephone (VHF) Scanning Receiver Direction Finder Duplex Repeater Station Electronic Chart System (ECS) Electronic Chart Display & Information System (ECDIS) Emergency Position Indicating Beacon (EPIRB) Engine Room Monitoring Systems Fire Door Controller/Monitoring Point Fire Extinguisher System Fire Detection Point Fire Sprinkler System Galileo Positioning System GLONASS Receiver Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Global Positioning System (GPS) HEADING SENSORS: Compass, Magnetic Gyro, North Seeking Fluxgate Gyro, Non-North Seeking Hull Door Controller/Monitoring Panel Hull Stress Monitoring Integrated Instrumentation Integrated Navigation Loran C 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT IDENTIFIER AB AD AG AP AI AN AR AS AT AX BI BN CD CR CS CT CV CX DF DU EC EI EP ER FD FE FR FS GA GL GN GP HC HE HF HN HD HS II IN LC 272 of 313 2014 NMEA TALKER DEVICE Multiplexer Navigation Light Controller Proprietary Code Radar and/or Radar Plotting Propulsion Machinery Including Remote Control Physical Shore AIS Station Sounder, depth Steering Gear/Steering Engine Electronic Positioning System, other/general Sounder, scanning Turn Rate Indicator Microprocessor Controller (0 ≤ # ≤ 9) User configured talker identifier1 VELOCITY SENSORS: Doppler, other/general Speed Log, Water, Magnetic Speed Log, Water Mechanical Voyage Data Recorder Watertight Door Controller/Monitoring Panel Weather Instruments Water Level Detection Systems Transducer TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Atomics Clock Chronometer Quartz Radio Update 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT IDENTIFIER MX NL P RA RC SA SD SG SN SS TI UP U# 1 VD VM VW VR WD WI WL YX ZA ZC ZQ ZV 273 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX H: NMEA 2000 PGN NUMBERS & DESCRIPTIONS The following list contains all NMEA 2000 PGN’s as of XXX. Please check www.nmea.org for the most up-to-date list as new PGNs are occasionally added to the NMEA 2000 standard. PGN # PGN Name & Description 059392 ISO Acknowledgment This message is provided by ISO 11783 for a handshake mechanism between transmitting and receiving devices. This message is the possible response to acknowledge the reception of a “normal broadcast” message or the response to a specific command to indicate compliance or failure. 059904 ISO Request As defined by ISO, this message has a data length of 3 bytes with no padding added to complete the single frame. The appropriate response to this message is based on the PGN being requested, and whether the receiver supports the requested PGN. 060160 ISO Transport Protocol, Data Transfer ISO 11783 defines this PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN represents a single packet of a multipacket message. 060416 ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management - RTS group function ISO 11783 defines this group function PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN’s role in the transport process is determined by the group function value found in the first data byte of the PGN. 060416 ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management - CTS group function ISO 11783 defines this group function PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN’s role in the transport process is determined by the group function value found in the first data byte of the PGN. 060416 ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management - EOM group function ISO 11783 defines this group function PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN’s role in the transport process is determined by the group function value found in the first data byte of the PGN. 060416 ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management - BAM group function ISO 11783 defines this group function PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN’s role in the transport process is determined by the group function value found in the first data byte of the PGN. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 274 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 060416 ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management - Abort group function ISO 11783 defines this group function PGN as part of the transport protocol method used for transmitting messages that have 9 or more data bytes. This PGN’s role in the transport process is determined by the group function value found in the first data byte of the PGN PGN # PGN Name & Description 060928 ISO Address Claim This network management message is used to claim a network address and to respond with device information (NAME) requested by the ISO Request or Complex Request Group Function. This PGN contains several fields that are Request Parameters that can be used to control the expected response to requests for this PGN. 065240 ISO Commanded Address ISO 11783 defined this message to provide a mechanism for assigning a network address to a node. The NAME information in the data portion of the message must match the name information of the node whose network address is to be set. 126208 NMEA - Request group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126208 NMEA - Command group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126208 NMEA - Acknowledge group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126208 NMEA - Read Fields - group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126208 NMEA - Read Fields Reply - group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126208 NMEA - Write Fields - group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 275 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 126208 NMEA - Write Fields Reply - group function The Request / Command / Acknowledge Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Request, Command, or Acknowledge Group Function. 126464 PGN List - Transmit PGNs group function The PGN List group function type is defined by the first field. The message will be either a Transmit PGNs or a Receive PGNs group function that identifies the PGNs transmitted from or received by a node. 126464 PGN List - Received PGNs group function The Transmit / Receive PGN List Group type of function is defined by first field. The message will be a Transmit or Receive PGN List group function. 126983 Alert This PGN is used to report the status of an alert. 126984 Alert Response This PGN is used to control an active Alert. 126985 Alert Text The Alert text PGN is used to convey identification and location text strings associated with source of an Alert. 126986 Alert Configuration This PGN is used to report the configuration of an alert. 126987 Alert Threshold The Alert Threshold PGN is used to convey or program the trigger method and threshold level associated with an Alert. 126988 Alert Value The Alert Value PGN is used to convey the instantaneous value parameter directly linked with an associated Alert. 126992 System Time The purpose of this PGN is to provide a regular transmission of UTC time and date; optionally synchronized to other parameter groups from the same source. 126996 Product Information Provides product information onto the network that could be important for determining quality of data coming from this product. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 276 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 126998 Configuration Information Free-form alphanumeric fields describing the installation (e.g., starboard engine room location) of the device and installation notes (e.g., calibration data). 127237 Heading/Track Control Sends commands to, and receives data from, heading control systems. Allows for navigational (remote) control of a heading control system and direct rudder control. 127245 Rudder Rudder order command in direction or angle with current rudder angle reading. PGN # PGN Name & Description 127250 Vessel Heading Heading sensor value with a flag for True or Magnetic. If the sensor value is Magnetic, the deviation field can be used to produce a Magnetic heading, and the variation field can be used to correct the Magnetic heading to produce a True heading. 127251 Rate of Turn Rate of Turn is the rate of change of the Heading. 127257 Attitude This parameter group provides a single transmission that describes the position of a vessel relative to both horizontal and vertical planes. This would typically be used for vessel stabilization, vessel control and onboard platform stabilization. 127258 Magnetic Variation Message for transmitting variation. The message contains a sequence number to allow synchronization of other messages such as Heading or Course over Ground. The quality of service and age of service are provided to enable recipients to determine an appropriate level of service if multiple transmissions exist. 127488 Engine Parameters, Rapid Update Provides data with a high update rate for a specific engine in a single frame message. The first field provides information as to which engine. 127489 Engine Parameters, Dynamic Used to provide real-time operational data and status relevant to a specific engine, indicated by the engine instance field. This message would normally be broadcasted periodically to provide information for instrumentation or control functions. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 277 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 127493 Transmission Parameters, Dynamic Used to provide the operational state and internal operating parameters of a specific transmission, indicated by the transmission instance field. This message would normally be broadcasted periodically to provide information for instrumentation or control functions. 127496 Trip Parameters, Vessel Trip parameters relative to Vessel 127497 Trip Parameters, Engine Engine related trip information. 127498 Engine Parameters, Static Provides identification information and rated engine speed for the engine indicated by the engine instance field. Used primarily by display devices. PGN # PGN Name & Description 127500 Load Controller Connection State / Control Broadcast the state and status of a Load Controller output/connection & control of the output/connection with PGN 126208 Command Group Function. 127501 Binary Status Report Universal status report for binary state devices in banks of up to 28 devices each. 127502 Switch Bank Control Universal commands to multiple banks of two-state devices. 127503 AC Input Status -DEPRECATED Any device with an AC Input may transmit this message. 127504 AC Output Status -DEPRECATED Any device with an AC Output may transmit this message. 127505 Fluid Level Fluid Level contains an instance number, type of fluid, level of fluid, and tank capacity. For example the fluid instance may be the level of fuel in a tank or the level of water in the bilge. Used primarily by display or instrumentation devices. 127506 DC Detailed Status Provides parametric data for a specific battery, indicated by the battery instance field. Used primarily by display or instrumentation devices, but may also be used by battery management controls. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 278 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 127507 Charger Status Any device capable of charging a battery may transmit this message. 127508 Battery Status Provides parametric data for a specific DC Source, indicated by the instance field. The type of DC Source can be identified from the DC Detailed Status PGN. Used primarily by display or instrumentation devices, but may also be used by power management. 127509 Inverter Status Any device capable of inverting a DC source to an SC output may transmit this message. 127510 Charger Configuration Status Any device capable of charging a battery may transmit this message. 127511 Inverter Configuration Status Any device capable of inverting DC to AC may transmit this message. 127512 AGS Configuration Status Any device that is capable of starting/stopping a generator may transmit this message. 127513 Battery Configuration Status Any device connected to a battery may transmit this message. 127514 AGS Status Any device capable of starting/stopping a generator may transmit this message. 127744 AC Power / Current- Phase A The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase A AC Current / Power status. 127745 AC Power / Current- Phase B The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase B AC Current / Power status. 127746 AC Power / Current- Phase C The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase C AC Current / Power status. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 279 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 127747 AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase A The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase A AC Voltage/ Frequency status. 127748 AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase B The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase B AC Voltage/ Frequency status. 127749 AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase C The purpose of this PGN is to provide a common way to report Phase C AC Voltage/ Frequency status. 127750 Converter (Inverter/Charger) Status Provides both state and status information about a Charger, Inverter or combined Inverter / Charger. 127751 DC Voltage / Current Provides a common way to report and extended range of DC Voltage and DC Current status including high voltage / high power systems 128259 Speed, Water Referenced This parameter group provides a single transmission that describes the motion of a vessel. PGN # PGN Name & Description 128267 Water Depth Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer. Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline. 128275 Distance Log This PGN provides the cumulative voyage distance traveled since the last reset. The distance is tagged with the time and date of the distance measurement. 128520 Tracked Target Data Message for reporting status and target data from tracking radar external devices. 129025 Position, Rapid Update This PGN provides latitude and longitude referenced to WGS84. Being defined as single frame message, as opposed to other PGNs that include latitude and longitude and are defined as fast or multi-packet, this PGN lends itself to being transmitted more frequently without using up excessive bandwidth on the bus for the benefit of receiving equipment that may require rapid position updates. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 280 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129026 COG & SOG, Rapid Update This parameter group is a single frame parameter group that provides Course Over Ground (COG) and Speed Over Ground (SOG). 129027 Position Delta, High Precision Rapid Update The "Position Delta, High Precision Rapid Update" Parameter Group is intended for applications where very high precision and very fast update rates are needed for position data. This PGN can provide delta position changes down to 1 millimeter with a delta time period accurate to 5 milliseconds. 129028 Altitude Delta, High Precision Rapid Update The "Altitude Delta, High Precision Rapid Update" Parameter Group is intended for applications where very high precision and very fast update rates are needed for altitude and course over ground data. This PGN can provide delta altitude changes down to 1 millimeter, a change in direction as small as 0.0057 degrees, and with a delta time period accurate to 5 milliseconds. 129029 GNSS Position Data This parameter group conveys a comprehensive set of Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) parameters, including position information. 129033 Local Time Offset This parameter group has a single transmission that provides: UTC time, UTC Date and Local Offset Datum Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum. PGN # PGN Name & Description 129038 AIS Class A Position Report This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Messages 1, 2, and 3 Position Reports, autonomous, assigned, and response to interrogation, respectively. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 1,2 or 3, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN (see ITU-R M.1371-1 for additional information). 129039 AIS Class B Position Report This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 18 Standard Class B Equipment Position Report. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 18, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN (see ITU-R M.1371-1 for additional information). 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 281 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129040 AIS Class B Extended Position Report This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 19 Extended Class B Equipment Position Report containing position and static information. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 19, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129041 AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) Report This PGN provides information received from an AtoN AIS station conforming to ITU-R M.1371-4 Message 21. 129044 Datum This parameter group is used to define the datum to which a position location output by the same device in other PGNs is referenced. 129045 User Datum Settings Transformation parameters for converting from WGS-84 to other Datums. 129283 Cross Track Error This parameter group provides the magnitude of position error perpendicular to the desired course. 129284 Navigation Data This parameter group provides essential navigation data for following a route. Transmissions will originate from products that can create and manage routes using waypoints. This information is intended for navigational repeaters. 129285 Navigation - Route/WP information This parameter group returns Route and WP data ahead in the Active Route. It can be requested or may be transmitted without a request, typically at each Waypoint advance. PGN # PGN Name & Description 129291 Set & Drift, Rapid Update The Set and Drift effect on the Vessel is the direction and the speed of a current. 129301 Time to/from Mark Time to go to or elapsed from a generic mark, that may be non-fixed. The mark is not generally a specific geographic point but may vary continuously and is most often determined by calculation (the recommended turning or tacking point for sailing vessels, the wheel-over point for vessels making turns, a predicted collision point, etc.) 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 282 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129302 Bearing and Distance between two Marks Bearing and distance from the origin mark to the destination mark, calculated at the origin mark, for any two arbitrary generic marks. The calculation type (Rhumb Line, Great Circle) is specified, as well as the bearing reference (Mag, True). 129538 GNSS Control Status GNSS common satellite receiver parameter status 129539 GNSS DOPs This PGN provides a single transmission containing GNSS status and dilution of precision components (DOP) that indicate the contribution of satellite geometry to the overall positioning error. There are three DOP parameters reported, horizontal (HDOP), Vertical (VDOP) and time (TDOP). 129540 GNSS Sats in View GNSS information on current satellites in view tagged by sequence ID. Information includes PRN, elevation, azimuth, SNR, defines the number of satellites; defines the satellite number and the information. 129541 GPS Almanac Data This parameter group provides a single transmission that contains relevant almanac data for GPS products. The almanac contains satellite vehicle course orbital parameters. This information is not considered precise and is only valid for several months at a time. GPS products receive almanac data directly from the satellites. This information would either be transmitted to and from GPS products for update, or system interrogation. 129542 GNSS Pseudorange Noise Statistics GNSS pseudorange measurement noise statistics can be translated in the position domain in order to give statistical measures of the quality of the position solution. Intended for use with a Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) application. 129545 GNSS RAIM Output This parameter group is used to provide the output from a GNSS Receiver's Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) process. The Integrity field value is based upon the parameters set in PGN 130059 GNS RAIM Settings. PGN # PGN Name & Description 129546 GNSS RAIM Settings This PGN is used to report the control parameters for a GNSS Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) process. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 283 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129547 GNSS Pseudorange Error Statistics This parameter group is used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM). Pseudorange measurement error statistics can be translated in the position domain in order to give statistical measures of the quality of the position solution. 129549 DGNSS Corrections This PGN provides a means to pass differential GNSS corrections between NMEA devices. Passing DGNSS data this way allows for more flexibility than traditional methods. One differential correction receiver could supply multiple GNSS receivers. Multiple differential correction receivers or data streams could be connected to a GNSS receiver allowing for network DGNSS approaches. This PGN can accommodate DGPS and DGLONASS corrections. 129550 GNSS Differential Correction Receiver Interface GNSS common differential correction receiver parameter status. 129551 GNSS Differential Correction Receiver Signal GNSS differential correction receiver status tagged by sequence ID. Status information includes frequency, SNR, and use as a correction source. 129556 GLONASS Almanac Data This PGN provides a single transmission that contains relevant almanac data for Glonass products. The almanac contains satellite vehicle course orbital parameters. This information is not considered precise and is only valid for several months at a time. Glonass products receive almanac data directly from the satellites. This information would either be transmitted to and from Glonass products for update, or system interrogation. 129792 AIS DGNSS Broadcast Binary Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 17 GNSS Broadcast Binary Message containing DGNSS corrections from a base station. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 17, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN (see ITU-R M.1371-1 for additional information). 129793 AIS UTC and Date Report This parameter group provides data from ITU-R M.1371 message 4 Base Station Report providing position, time, date, and current slot number of a base station, and 11 UTC and date response message providing current UTC and date if available. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 4 or 11, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 284 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129794 AIS Class A Static and Voyage Related Data This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 5 Ship Static and Voyage Related Data Message. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 5, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129795 AIS Addressed Binary Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 6 Addressed Binary Message supporting address communication of binary data. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 6, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129796 AIS Acknowledge This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Messages 7 Binary Acknowledge Message and 13 Safety Related Acknowledge Message. Message 7 acknowledges receipt of message 6 while message 13 acknowledges receipt of message 14. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 7 or 13, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129797 AIS Binary Broadcast Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 8 Binary Broadcast Message supporting broadcast communication of binary data. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 8, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129798 AIS SAR Aircraft Position Report This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 9 SAR Aircraft Position Report Message for Airborne AIS units conducting Search and Rescue operations. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 9, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request. 129799 Radio Frequency/Mode/Power This PGN provides status and control for a Radiotelephone, connected to a NMEA network. The Radiotelephone will transmit and receive status along with remote control and repeater products. 129800 AIS UTC/Date Inquiry This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 10 UTC and Date Inquiry Message used to request current UTC and date. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 10, or AIS Addressed Safety Related Message. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 285 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129801 AIS Addressed Safety Related Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 12 Addressed Safety Related Message supporting addressed communication of safety related data. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 12, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129802 AIS Safety Related Broadcast Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 14 Safety Related Broadcast Message supporting broadcast communication of safety related data. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 14, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129803 AIS Interrogation This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 15 Interrogation Message used to request a specific ITU-R M.1371 message resulting in responses from one or more AIS mobile units. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 15, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129804 AIS Assignment Mode Command This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 16 Assigned Mode Command Message for assigning specific behavior by a competent authority. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 16, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129805 AIS Data Link Management Message This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 20 Data Link Management Message for reserving slots for base stations. An AIS device may generate this parameter group either upon receiving a VHF data link message 20, or upon receipt of an ISO or NMEA request PGN. 129806 AIS Channel Management This parameter group provides data associated with the ITU-R M.1371 Message 22 Channel Management Message supporting management of transceiver modes and channels by a base station. 129807 AIS Group Assignment The Group Assignment Command is transmitted by a base station when operating as a controlling entity for AIS Stations. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 286 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 129808 DSC Call Information This parameter group provides Digital Selective Calling (DSC) data according to ITU M.493-9 with optional expansion according to ITU M.821-1. DSC is a paging system that is used to automate distress alerts sent over terrestrial communication systems such as VHF, MF and HF marine radio systems. DSC provides a mechanism to report significantly more information regarding a distress call rather than just the distress itself. Products equipped with DSC will transmit and receive this information. 129809 AIS Class B "CS" Static Data Report, Part A This parameter group is used by Class B "CS" ship borne mobile equipment each time Part A of ITU-R M.1372 Message 24 is received. 129810 AIS Class B "CS" Static Data Report, Part B This parameter group is used by Class B "CS" ship borne mobile equipment each time Part B of ITU-R M.1372 Message 24 is received. 130052 Loran-C TD Data This provides Time Difference (TD) lines of position of Loran-C signals relative to a single Group Repetition Interval. 130053 Loran-C Range Data This provides Propagation times (Ranges) of Loran-C signals relative to a single Group Repetition Interval. 130054 Loran-C Signal Data SNR, ECD, and ASF values of Loran-C signals 130060 Label The Label PGN is used to set and retrieve a text label assigned to a particular device or a particular hardware resource within a particular device. The Label PGN supports multiplechannel devices. 130061 Channel Source Configuration The Channel Source Configuration parameter group is used to identify data sources that a device receives from the NMEA network to satisfy device operational requirements. For example, if a device stores the vessel location any time an event monitored by the device occurs, and there are more than one GPS device aboard the vessel, this parameter group may be used to report and also command which GPS is used/to use by the device. An example may be a MOB sensor. 130064 Route and WP Service - Database List Complex request for this PGN should return a list of Databases in which a navigation Device organizes its Routes and WPs. A Database may contain one WP-List and multiple Routes. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 287 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 130065 Route and WP Service - Route List Complex request for this PGN should return a list of Routes in a Database. 130066 Route and WP Service - Route/WP-List Attributes Complex request for this PGN should return the attributes of a Route or the WP-List. 130067 Route and WP Service - Route - WP Name & Position Complex request of this PGN should return the Waypoints belonging to a Route. 130068 Route and WP Service - Route - WP Name Complex request of this PGN should return the Waypoints belonging to a Route. 130069 Route and WP Service - XTE Limit & Navigation Method Complex request of this PGN will return XTE Limit and/or Navigation Method specific to individual legs of a Route. 130070 Route and WP Service - WP Comment Complex request of this PGN should return supplementary Comments attached to Waypoints in a Route or a WP-List. 130071 Route and WP Service - Route Comment Complex request of this PGN should return supplementary Comments attached to Routes. 130072 Route and WP Service - Database Comment Complex request of this PGN should return supplementary Comments attached to Databases in the navigation Device. 130073 Route and WP Service - Radius of Turn Complex request of this PGN should return the Radius of Turn at specific Waypoints of a Route. 130074 Route and WP Service - WP List - WP Name & Position Complex request of this PGN should return the Waypoints of a WP-List. 130306 Wind Data Direction and speed of Wind. True wind can be referenced to the vessel or to the ground. The Apparent Wind is what is felt standing on the (moving) ship, I.e., the wind measured by the typical mast head instruments. The boat referenced true wind is given by the vector sum of Apparent wind and vessel's heading and speed though the water. The ground referenced true wind is given by the vector sum of Apparent wind and vessel's heading and speed over ground. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 288 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 130310 Environmental Parameters - DEPRECATED Local atmospheric environmental conditions. This PGN has been deprecated. Specific PGNs 130316 Temperature, 130313 Relative Humidity, 130314 Actual Pressure, 130315 Set Pressure shall be used. 130311 Environmental Parameters- DEPRECATED This PGN has been deprecated. Specific PGNs 130316 Temperature, 130313 Relative Humidity, 130314 Actual Pressure, 130315 Set Pressure shall be used. 130312 Temperature - DEPRECATED Temperature as measured by a specific temperature source. This PGN has been deprecated. Please use PGN 130316 (Temperature-Extended Range) for all new designs. 130313 Humidity Humidity as measured by a specific humidity source. 130314 Actual Pressure Pressure as measured by a specific pressure source 130315 Set Pressure This parameter group can be sent to a device that controls pressure to change its targeted pressure, or it can be sent out by the control device to indicate its current targeted pressure. 130316 Temperature, Extended Range This parameter group is used to report a wide variety of temperature measurements. 130320 Tide Station Data Tide station measurement data including station location, numeric identifier, and name. 130321 Salinity Station Data Salinity station measurement data including station location, numeric identifier, and name. 130322 Current Station Data Current station measurement data including station location, numeric identifier, and name. 130323 Meteorological Station Data Meteorological station measurement data including station location, numeric identifier, and name. 130324 Moored Buoy Station Data Moored buoy measurement data including station location and numeric identifier. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 289 of 313 2014 NMEA PGN # PGN Name & Description 130560 Payload Mass The Payload Mass parameter group is used to transmit the mass associated with vessel payloads. Applications for this PGN vary from recreational to commercial use. This may include, but is not limited to weighing fish, or weighing cargo . 130576 Trim Tab Status Provides data on various small craft control surfaces and speed through the water. Used primarily by display or instrumentation. 130577 Direction Data The purpose of this PGN is to group three fundamental vectors related to vessel motion, speed and heading referenced to the water, speed and course referenced to ground and current speed and flow direction. 130578 Vessel Speed Components This PGN provides a single transmission that accurately describes the speed of a vessel by component vectors. 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 290 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX I VHF / GPS/ DSC NMEA 0183 WIRING INFORMATION 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 291 of 313 2014 NMEA 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 292 of 313 2014 NMEA 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 293 of 313 2014 NMEA 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 294 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX J: INDEX 1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 13 1.1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................................ 13 1.1.1 Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................... 13 1.1.2 Local Regulations ............................................................................................................. 14 1.2 References ......................................................................................................................... 14 1.2.1 Normative References ....................................................................................................... 14 1.2.2 Informative References ..................................................................................................... 15 1.3 Comments and Corrections ............................................................................................... 16 2 AC and DC Wiring installation......................................................................................... 19 2.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 19 2.1.1 Existing Capacity .............................................................................................................. 19 2.1.2 New Electronic Device Load Requirements ..................................................................... 19 2.1.3 Existing Distribution Panel Capacity ................................................................................ 20 2.1.4 Sub-panels ......................................................................................................................... 20 2.1.5 Wiring and Panel Marking ................................................................................................ 20 2.1.6 Wiring System Documentation ......................................................................................... 21 2.1.7 AC and DC Conductor Designations ................................................................................ 21 2.2 Equipment Wiring Requirements ..................................................................................... 22 2.2.1 Wire Gauge ....................................................................................................................... 22 2.2.2 Connections and Terminations ......................................................................................... 22 2.3 Distribution Panels ............................................................................................................ 23 2.3.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................................ 23 2.3.2 Voltmeters ......................................................................................................................... 23 2.3.3 Multiple Voltages.............................................................................................................. 23 2.4 Ignition Protection ............................................................................................................ 23 2.5 Example Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................... 24 2.5.1 Electronics Power from Main Distribution ....................................................................... 24 2.5.2 Electronics Power from Sub-panel ................................................................................... 24 2.5.3 DC Load Testing ............................................................................................................... 25 3 Grounding, Bonding, and Lightning Protection ............................................................... 26 3.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 26 3.1.1 Grounding Systems ........................................................................................................... 26 3.1.2 Electronic Equipment and Display Grounding ................................................................. 28 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 295 of 313 2014 NMEA 3.1.3 Electrical Equipment Grounding ...................................................................................... 28 3.1.4 MF/HF SSB ...................................................................................................................... 28 3.1.5 Metal Structures ................................................................................................................ 28 3.1.6 Marking and Color ............................................................................................................ 29 3.2 RF Ground System ............................................................................................................ 29 3.3 DC Common Grounding System ...................................................................................... 29 3.3.1 DC Common Grounding Connections .............................................................................. 30 3.3.2 Types of Corrosion ........................................................................................................... 30 3.4 Lightning Ground System ................................................................................................. 31 3.4.1 Conductive and Inductive Strike Protection ..................................................................... 31 3.4.2 Direct Strike Protection..................................................................................................... 31 4 Battery installation ............................................................................................................ 32 4.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 32 4.1.1 Power Source for Electronics............................................................................................ 32 4.1.2 Emergency Communications Battery ............................................................................... 32 4.1.2.1 Emergency Communications Battery Capacity ................................................................ 33 4.1.3 Battery Construction ......................................................................................................... 33 4.1.4 Battery Capacity................................................................................................................ 34 4.2 Battery System Requirements ........................................................................................... 34 4.2.1 Voltage Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 34 4.2.2 Overcurrent Protection ...................................................................................................... 35 4.2.3 Access for Inspection and Maintenance ........................................................................... 35 4.2.4 Battery System Marking ................................................................................................... 35 4.3 Battery Installation and Connection.................................................................................. 36 5 Charging System installation ............................................................................................ 37 5.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 37 5.1.1 Charging Capacity ............................................................................................................ 37 5.1.1.1 Underway Charging .......................................................................................................... 37 5.1.1.2 AC Charging ..................................................................................................................... 38 5.2 Charging System Requirements ........................................................................................ 38 5.2.1 Ambient Conditions .......................................................................................................... 38 5.2.2 Functional Isolation .......................................................................................................... 38 5.2.2.1 Series Voltage Regulators ................................................................................................. 39 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 296 of 313 2014 NMEA 5.2.2.2 Battery Combiners ............................................................................................................ 39 5.2.2.3 Battery Isolators ................................................................................................................ 40 5.2.3 AC Chargers...................................................................................................................... 41 5.2.4 Documentation .................................................................................................................. 41 5.3 Charging System Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 41 5.3.1 Location ............................................................................................................................ 41 5.3.2 Ratings .............................................................................................................................. 41 6 Power Inverter installation ................................................................................................ 42 6.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 42 6.1.1 Power Inverter Types ........................................................................................................ 42 6.1.2 Selection and Sizing.......................................................................................................... 43 6.2 Power Inverter Installation................................................................................................ 43 7 COAXIAL CABLE installation........................................................................................ 44 7.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 44 7.1.1 Background ....................................................................................................................... 45 7.1.2 Length of Cables ............................................................................................................... 45 7.1.3 Equipment Connections .................................................................................................... 46 7.1.4 Extension of Cables .......................................................................................................... 46 7.2 Coaxial Cable Installation ................................................................................................. 46 7.2.1 Total Attenuation (Loss) ................................................................................................... 46 7.2.2 Cable Selection ................................................................................................................. 47 7.2.3 Connector Selection .......................................................................................................... 48 7.2.4 Cable Junctions ................................................................................................................. 49 7.2.5 Physical Installation .......................................................................................................... 49 7.3 Signal Loss Calculations ................................................................................................... 50 7.3.1 Calculation Method ........................................................................................................... 51 7.3.2 Loss Calculation Examples ............................................................................................... 53 7.3.2.1 Extending Cable to 52 Feet (16 Meters) Using RG8X ..................................................... 53 7.3.2.2 Extending Cable to 68 Feet (20.7 Meters) Using RG8X .................................................. 54 7.3.2.3 Extending Cable to 68 Feet (20.7 Meters) Using RG8U .................................................. 54 7.4 Connector Assembly ......................................................................................................... 55 7.4.1 Cable Stripping ................................................................................................................. 55 7.4.2 PL-259 Connector Installation .......................................................................................... 56 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 297 of 313 2014 NMEA 7.4.3 BNC Connector Installation .............................................................................................. 58 7.4.4 TNC Connector Installation .............................................................................................. 59 7.4.5 F Connector Installation .................................................................................................... 60 7.4.6 Other Installation Methods ............................................................................................... 61 8 Data Interfacing- nmea 0183, nmea 2000, Ethernet ......................................................... 62 8.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 62 8.1.1 Cable Routing and Labeling ............................................................................................. 62 8.1.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference ............................................................................................ 63 8.1.2 Documentation .................................................................................................................. 63 8.2 NMEA 0183 Interfacing & Wiring Requirements............................................................ 63 8.2.1 NMEA 0183-HS (High Speed) ......................................................................................... 64 8.2.2 RS-232 and RS-422 Overview.......................................................................................... 65 8.2.2.1 Data Transfer .................................................................................................................... 65 8.2.2.2 RS-232 66 8.2.2.3 RS-422 66 8.2.2.4 What are the other differences between RS-422 and RS-232? ......................................... 66 8.2.2.5 How do we tell if a circuit (a Communication Pair) is RS-422 or RS-232? ..................... 66 8.2.3 NMEA 0183 Circuit .......................................................................................................... 67 8.2.3.1 Talker Circuit .................................................................................................................... 68 8.2.3.2 Multiple Talker Circuits .................................................................................................... 68 8.2.4 Cable Requirements .......................................................................................................... 70 8.2.4.1 Maximum Operational Cable Length ............................................................................... 70 8.2.4.2 Cable Type ........................................................................................................................ 70 8.2.4.3 Connections....................................................................................................................... 70 8.2.4.4 Shielding 70 8.2.4.5 Color-Coding .................................................................................................................... 70 8.2.5 Power Requirements ......................................................................................................... 71 8.2.6 Interface between Versions, to NMEA 2000®, and to Other Devices .............................. 71 8.2.7 NMEA 0183 Setup ............................................................................................................ 71 8.2.8 NMEA 0183 Installation Testing ...................................................................................... 71 8.3 NMEA 2000® Interfacing & Wiring Requirements ......................................................... 72 8.3.1 General Requirements ....................................................................................................... 72 8.3.1.1 Device Power .................................................................................................................... 73 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 298 of 313 2014 NMEA 8.3.2 Cable Requirements .......................................................................................................... 74 8.3.2.1 Cable Types ...................................................................................................................... 74 8.3.2.2 Maximum Operational Cable Length ............................................................................... 76 8.3.2.3 Connection Methods ......................................................................................................... 76 8.3.2.4 Shielding 77 8.3.2.5 Terminations ..................................................................................................................... 77 8.3.2.6 Color Coding..................................................................................................................... 78 8.3.2.7 Cable Installation .............................................................................................................. 79 8.3.3 Backbone Power Requirements ........................................................................................ 79 8.3.3.1 Minimum and Maximum Voltage .................................................................................... 80 8.3.3.2 Maximum Device Load .................................................................................................... 80 8.3.3.3 Backbone Power Source ................................................................................................... 81 8.3.3.4 Backbone Leg Power Connection ..................................................................................... 81 8.3.3.5 Backbone Leg Over-current Protection ............................................................................ 81 8.3.3.6 Redundant Power .............................................................................................................. 81 8.3.3.7 Common Network Reference ........................................................................................... 82 8.3.3.8 Isolated Power Supplies .................................................................................................... 82 8.3.4 Network Planning ............................................................................................................. 82 8.3.4.1 End-Powered Network ...................................................................................................... 83 8.3.4.2 Mid-Powered Network...................................................................................................... 84 8.3.4.3 Initial Voltage Drop Estimate ........................................................................................... 85 8.3.5 Advanced Network Planning ............................................................................................ 87 8.3.5.1 Detailed Segment Voltage Drop ....................................................................................... 87 8.3.5.2 Connecting Devices Drawing More Than 1 Amp ............................................................ 89 8.3.5.3 Other Considerations ........................................................................................................ 90 8.3.6 Example Calculations ....................................................................................................... 90 8.3.6.1 End-Powered Network Initial Estimate ............................................................................ 91 8.3.6.2 Mid-Powered Network Initial Estimate ............................................................................ 91 8.3.6.3 Mid-Powered Network Detailed Analysis ........................................................................ 92 8.3.7 Example Power Connections ............................................................................................ 93 8.3.7.1 Single Leg Backbone Power ............................................................................................. 94 8.3.7.2 Multiple Leg Backbone Power ......................................................................................... 95 8.3.7.3 Two Leg Backbone with Collocated Power Insertion Points ........................................... 96 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 299 of 313 2014 NMEA 8.3.8 Interface to NMEA 0183 and Other Networks ................................................................. 97 8.3.9 General Test and Setup ..................................................................................................... 97 8.3.9.1 Instance Configuration ...................................................................................................... 98 8.3.9.2 Variations of parameter Instancing ................................................................................... 98 8.3.10 NMEA 2000 Installation Testing ...................................................................................... 99 8.4 Ethernet Network Interfacing Requirements .................................................................... 99 8.4.1 General Practices .............................................................................................................. 99 8.4.1.1 Generalized Topology..................................................................................................... 100 8.4.1.2 Multiple Protocols........................................................................................................... 100 8.4.2 Cabling ............................................................................................................................ 100 8.4.2.1 Maximum Operational Cable Length ............................................................................. 100 8.4.2.2 Cable Type ...................................................................................................................... 101 8.4.2.3 Connections..................................................................................................................... 101 8.4.2.4 Shielding 101 8.4.3 Connectors ...................................................................................................................... 102 8.4.3.1 Color Coding................................................................................................................... 102 8.4.3.2 Connector Assembly ....................................................................................................... 103 8.4.4 Power Requirements ....................................................................................................... 104 8.4.4.1 Power over Ethernet ........................................................................................................ 104 8.4.5 Ethernet Network Planning ............................................................................................. 104 8.4.5.1 Choosing Interconnection Devices ................................................................................. 105 8.4.5.2 Equipment Locations ...................................................................................................... 107 8.4.5.3 Multiple Ethernet Networks ............................................................................................ 107 8.4.5.4 Network Diagram............................................................................................................ 108 8.4.6 Advanced Network Planning .......................................................................................... 108 8.4.6.1 Internet Protocol Planning .............................................................................................. 108 8.4.6.2 IP Address Allocation ..................................................................................................... 110 8.4.6.3 Web-Based Configuration .............................................................................................. 111 8.4.6.4 Wireless Networks .......................................................................................................... 112 8.4.6.5 Other Considerations ...................................................................................................... 113 8.4.7 Ethernet Installation Testing ........................................................................................... 113 9 Antenna installation ........................................................................................................ 114 9.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 114 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 300 of 313 2014 NMEA 9.1.1 Transmission Lines ......................................................................................................... 115 9.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................... 115 9.2.1 Arrangement ................................................................................................................... 115 9.2.1.1 Location 115 9.2.1.2 Minimum Spacing........................................................................................................... 115 9.2.2 Antenna Support ............................................................................................................. 117 9.2.2.1 Multipoint Mounting....................................................................................................... 117 9.2.3 Antenna Installation Testing ........................................................................................... 117 10 Display installations ........................................................................................................ 118 10.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 118 10.1.1 Visibility ......................................................................................................................... 118 10.1.2 Accessibility.................................................................................................................... 118 10.1.3 Touchscreen Displays ..................................................................................................... 119 10.1.4 Serviceability .................................................................................................................. 119 10.2 Installation....................................................................................................................... 119 10.2.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................... 119 10.2.1.1 Flush Mount Display Installations .................................................................. 119 10.2.1.2 Bracket Mount Display Installations .............................................................. 121 10.2.1.3 Cored Construction ......................................................................................... 121 10.2.2 Environmental Protection ............................................................................................... 121 10.2.3 Cabinets and Enclosures ................................................................................................. 122 10.2.4 Marking ........................................................................................................................... 122 10.2.5 Display Installation Testing ............................................................................................ 122 11 Black box installations .................................................................................................... 123 11.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 123 11.2 Installation....................................................................................................................... 123 11.2.1 Mounting Location & Orientation .................................................................................. 123 11.2.2 Serviceability .................................................................................................................. 124 11.2.3 Environmental Protection ............................................................................................... 124 11.2.4 Cable Marking ................................................................................................................ 125 11.2.5 Black Box Installation Testing........................................................................................ 125 12 Transducer INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 126 12.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 126 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 301 of 313 2014 NMEA 12.1.1 Transducer Types and Construction ............................................................................... 126 12.1.2 Transducer Configurations.............................................................................................. 127 12.1.2.1 Transom Mount ............................................................................................... 127 12.1.2.2 Through-Hull .................................................................................................. 127 12.1.2.3 In-Hull Transducers ........................................................................................ 129 12.1.2.4 Commercial Tank Mount ................................................................................ 129 12.1.3 Transducer Selection ....................................................................................................... 130 12.1.3.1 Hull Thickness ................................................................................................ 131 12.1.3.2 Steel and Aluminum Hull Vessels .................................................................. 131 12.1.3.3 Vessel Speed ................................................................................................... 131 12.1.3.4 Transducer / Display Matching ....................................................................... 131 12.1.3.5 Non-penetrating Installations .......................................................................... 132 12.1.4 Transducer Location ....................................................................................................... 132 12.1.4.1 Transom Mount Transducers .......................................................................... 132 12.1.4.2 In-hull Transducers ......................................................................................... 133 12.1.4.3 Through-hull Transducers ............................................................................... 134 12.1.5 Dummy Plugs.................................................................................................................. 135 12.1.6 Anti-Fouling Paint .......................................................................................................... 135 12.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................... 135 12.2.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................... 136 12.2.1.1 Transom Mount ............................................................................................... 136 12.2.1.2 In-hull Mount .................................................................................................. 136 12.2.1.3 Through-hull Mounts ...................................................................................... 136 12.2.1.4 Fairing Blocks ................................................................................................. 136 12.2.1.5 Cored Hull Construction ................................................................................. 137 12.2.2 Cable Routing ................................................................................................................. 138 12.2.2.1 Transom Cables .............................................................................................. 138 12.2.3 Fasteners and Sealing...................................................................................................... 138 12.2.4 Electrical ......................................................................................................................... 139 12.2.4.1 Frequency........................................................................................................ 139 12.2.4.2 Power .............................................................................................................. 139 12.2.4.3 Grounding ....................................................................................................... 139 12.3 Installation Procedures .................................................................................................... 139 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 302 of 313 2014 NMEA 12.3.1 Dry Fitting Before Installation ........................................................................................ 139 12.3.2 Surface Preparation ......................................................................................................... 140 12.3.3 Sealing............................................................................................................................. 140 12.3.4 Final Assembly ............................................................................................................... 140 12.3.5 Checking for Leaks ......................................................................................................... 140 12.3.6 Transducer Installation Testing....................................................................................... 140 13 Compass INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 142 13.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 142 13.1.1 Compass Safe Distance ................................................................................................... 142 13.1.2 Pre-Installation Testing ................................................................................................... 142 13.1.3 Compass Compensation .................................................................................................. 143 13.1.4 Compass Installation ....................................................................................................... 143 13.2 Magnetic Compass .......................................................................................................... 143 13.2.1 Location .......................................................................................................................... 143 13.2.2 Electrical Connections .................................................................................................... 143 13.3 Electronic Compass ........................................................................................................ 143 13.3.1 Location .......................................................................................................................... 144 13.3.2 Electrical Connections .................................................................................................... 144 13.3.3 Mounting ......................................................................................................................... 144 13.3.4 Calibration and Compensation ........................................................................................ 144 13.3.5 Compass Testing ............................................................................................................. 144 13.4 SATELLITE COMPASS (GNSS) INSTALLATION .................................................... 144 13.4.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 145 13.4.2 Compass Safe Distance ................................................................................................... 146 13.4.3 Testing............................................................................................................................. 146 13.4.4 Compass Compensation .................................................................................................. 146 13.4.5 Installation....................................................................................................................... 146 13.4.5.1 GNSS Compass............................................................................................... 146 13.4.5.2 Mounting Location.......................................................................................... 146 13.4.5.3 Mounting Orientation...................................................................................... 148 13.4.5.4 Mounting Options ........................................................................................... 148 13.4.5.5 Electrical Connections .................................................................................... 149 13.4.6 Calibration and Compensation ........................................................................................ 149 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 303 of 313 2014 NMEA 13.4.7 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 149 13.4.7.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 149 13.4.7.2 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 149 13.5 Gyrocompass................................................................................................................... 150 13.5.1 Mounting Location.......................................................................................................... 150 13.5.2 Data Outputs ................................................................................................................... 150 13.5.3 Compass Installation Testing .......................................................................................... 151 14 RADAR INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 152 14.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 152 14.1.1 Radiation ......................................................................................................................... 152 14.1.2 Location .......................................................................................................................... 153 14.1.2.1 14.2 Spacing............................................................................................................ 153 Radar Installation ............................................................................................................ 153 14.2.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................... 153 14.2.2 Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 154 14.2.3 Processing Unit Installation ............................................................................................ 154 14.2.4 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 154 14.2.4.1 Cable Routing ................................................................................................. 154 14.2.4.2 Cable Extensions............................................................................................. 155 14.2.5 Interference ..................................................................................................................... 155 14.2.6 Calculating Radar Range ................................................................................................ 155 14.2.7 Radar Installation Testing ............................................................................................... 156 15 Autopilots........................................................................................................................ 157 15.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 157 15.2 Autopilot Component Installation................................................................................... 158 15.2.1 Control Head Installation ................................................................................................ 158 15.2.2 Course Computer Installation ......................................................................................... 158 15.2.3 Compass Installation ....................................................................................................... 158 15.2.4 Rudder Reference Unit Installation (RRU)..................................................................... 158 15.3 Autopilot Drive Types & Installations ............................................................................ 159 15.3.1 Installation Considerations.............................................................................................. 160 15.3.2 Hydraulic Drive Unit Installations .................................................................................. 160 15.3.2.1 Hoses ............................................................................................................... 161 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 304 of 313 2014 NMEA 15.3.2.2 Fittings ............................................................................................................ 161 15.3.2.3 Isolation Valves .............................................................................................. 161 15.3.2.4 Check Valves .................................................................................................. 161 15.3.2.5 Fluid Types ..................................................................................................... 162 15.3.2.6 Independent Steering Systems ........................................................................ 162 15.3.2.7 Testing and Adjustments................................................................................. 162 15.3.2.8 Bleeding Air .................................................................................................... 162 15.3.2.9 System Integrity .............................................................................................. 162 15.3.2.10 Additional Notes ............................................................................................. 162 15.3.3 Mechanical Drive Unit Installation................................................................................. 163 15.3.3.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................... 163 15.3.3.2 Protective Covers ............................................................................................ 163 15.3.3.3 Accessibility.................................................................................................... 163 15.3.4 Autopilot Installation Testing ......................................................................................... 163 16 Electromagnetic Interference .......................................................................................... 164 16.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 164 16.2 Identification and Elimination of EMI Problems............................................................ 165 16.2.1 Identifying and Isolating the Interference Source ........................................................... 165 16.2.1.1 Tracking Radiated Emissions ......................................................................... 166 16.2.1.2 Tracking Conducted Emissions ...................................................................... 166 16.2.2 Techniques for Eliminating Interference Effects ............................................................ 166 16.2.2.1 Shielded Cables ............................................................................................... 166 16.2.2.2 Grounding ....................................................................................................... 166 16.2.2.3 Filters .............................................................................................................. 167 16.2.2.4 Ferrites ............................................................................................................ 167 16.2.2.5 Relocating Cable Runs .................................................................................... 167 16.2.2.6 Relocating Equipment Displays ...................................................................... 167 16.2.2.7 Relocating Antennas ....................................................................................... 167 17 VHF & SSB Radio Installation ....................................................................................... 168 17.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 168 17.1.1 Digital Selective Calling (DSC)...................................................................................... 168 17.1.2 Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) Number ...................................................... 168 17.1.3 DSC Interfacing to GPS via NMEA 0183 ...................................................................... 169 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 305 of 313 2014 NMEA 17.1.4 DSC Interfacing to GPS via NMEA 2000 ...................................................................... 170 17.2 Prerequisite Equipment ................................................................................................... 170 17.3 VHF Radio Transceiver Installation Requirements ........................................................ 170 Power Source .............................................................................................................................. 171 17.3.1 Equipment Location ........................................................................................................ 171 17.3.2 VHF Transmission Line Requirements .......................................................................... 171 17.3.3 VHF Antenna Requirements ........................................................................................... 171 17.4 MF/HF SSB Transceiver Installation Requirements ...................................................... 173 17.4.1 General Requirements ..................................................................................................... 173 17.4.2 Equipment Locations ...................................................................................................... 174 17.4.3 SSB Transmission Line Requirements ........................................................................... 175 17.4.4 SSB Antenna Requirements ............................................................................................ 175 17.4.4.1 Lead-in Wire ................................................................................................... 175 17.4.4.2 Whip Antennas................................................................................................ 176 17.4.4.3 Backstay and Other Rigging Antennas ........................................................... 176 17.4.5 SSB Counterpoise (Ground) System .............................................................................. 179 17.4.5.1 Installation in Metal Hull Vessels ................................................................... 179 17.4.5.2 Non-metal Hull Vessels .................................................................................. 180 17.4.6 VHF & SSB Installation Testing .................................................................................... 182 18 Computer System Installation ......................................................................................... 183 18.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 183 18.1.1 Computer Types .............................................................................................................. 183 18.1.1.1 Rugged Marine Computer Device .................................................................. 183 18.1.1.2 Portable Computer Devices ............................................................................ 184 18.1.1.3 General Purpose Computer Devices ............................................................... 184 18.1.2 Selection and Application ............................................................................................... 184 18.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................... 185 18.2.1 Uninterruptible Power ..................................................................................................... 185 18.2.2 Interfaces ......................................................................................................................... 185 18.2.2.1 USB Universal Serial Bus ............................................................................... 186 18.2.2.2 USB Hubs ....................................................................................................... 187 18.2.3 Purpose-built Equipment Configuration ......................................................................... 188 18.2.3.1 Physical Access Control ................................................................................. 188 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 306 of 313 2014 NMEA 18.2.3.2 Passwords ........................................................................................................ 188 18.2.3.3 Software Installation and Configuration ......................................................... 189 18.2.3.4 Data Backup .................................................................................................... 189 18.2.4 Documentation and Restoration ...................................................................................... 189 19 Automatic Identification Systems (AIS) Installation..................................................... 191 19.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 191 19.1.1 AIS Classes ..................................................................................................................... 191 19.1.2 AIS Installation Documentation ..................................................................................... 192 19.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................... 193 19.2.1 Antenna Location ............................................................................................................ 193 19.2.2 Power Source .................................................................................................................. 194 19.2.3 Equipment Location ........................................................................................................ 194 19.2.3.1 Pilot Plug......................................................................................................... 195 19.2.4 Data Interface .................................................................................................................. 195 19.2.5 Long-Range Option ........................................................................................................ 197 19.3 Configuration .................................................................................................................. 197 19.3.1 Vessel Data ..................................................................................................................... 197 19.3.2 Reference Point ............................................................................................................... 199 19.3.3 AIS Installation Testing .................................................................................................. 199 20 Satellite TV & Communications System installation ..................................................... 200 20.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 200 20.1.1 Satellite Dome Basics ..................................................................................................... 201 20.1.2 Satellite System Installation Documentation .................................................................. 202 20.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................... 203 20.2.1 Satellite Dome Location and Mounting .......................................................................... 203 20.2.2 Control Unit Installation ................................................................................................. 204 20.2.3 Satellite Communications System Grounding ................................................................ 205 20.2.4 Connections..................................................................................................................... 205 20.2.5 Satellite System Installation Testing............................................................................... 205 21 Security, Tracking, and Video / Camera Installation ...................................................... 206 21.1 Purpose and Scope .......................................................................................................... 206 21.2 Terminology.................................................................................................................... 206 21.3 Power .............................................................................................................................. 207 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 307 of 313 2014 NMEA 21.3.1 Battery Backup................................................................................................................ 207 21.4 Equipment Installation Considerations ........................................................................... 207 21.4.1 Panel ................................................................................................................................ 207 21.5 Sensors ............................................................................................................................ 207 21.5.1 Sensors - Security Zones- Exterior ................................................................................. 208 21.5.2 Sensors - Security Zones- Interior .................................................................................. 208 21.6 Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 209 21.6.1 Outputs-Programming..................................................................................................... 210 21.7 Tracking Antenna............................................................................................................ 210 21.8 Users ............................................................................................................................... 212 21.9 Maritime Camera Systems .............................................................................................. 212 21.9.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 212 21.9.2 Installation Considerations.............................................................................................. 213 21.9.3 Camera Types ................................................................................................................. 213 21.9.4 Installation Location ....................................................................................................... 213 21.9.5 Cable Routing ................................................................................................................. 213 21.9.6 Camera Connection Diagrams ........................................................................................ 213 22 Test Criteria .................................................................................................................... 216 22.1 General Considerations ................................................................................................... 216 22.1.1 Commissioning Check-off .............................................................................................. 216 22.1.2 Test Procedure Overview ................................................................................................ 216 22.2 DC Load Tests ................................................................................................................ 218 22.2.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 218 22.2.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 218 22.2.2.1 Operation from Batteries................................................................................. 218 22.2.2.2 Charging and Underway Operation ................................................................ 218 22.3 NMEA Interfacing Testing ............................................................................................. 219 22.3.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 219 22.3.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 219 22.3.3 NMEA 0183 Setup and Testing ...................................................................................... 219 22.3.3.1 NMEA 2000® .................................................................................................. 220 22.3.3.2 NMEA 2000 Testing and Analysis: ................................................................ 220 22.3.3.3 NMEA 2000 Network Design and Documentation Tools : ............................ 221 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 308 of 313 2014 NMEA 22.3.4 Ethernet Testing .............................................................................................................. 222 22.4 Antenna Installation Testing ........................................................................................... 222 22.4.1 GPS Receivers ................................................................................................................ 222 22.4.1.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................... 222 22.4.1.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................ 222 22.4.1.3 Main GPS Unit Dockside Testing................................................................... 222 22.4.1.4 Optional Differential Beacon Receiver Dockside Testing.............................. 223 22.4.1.5 Optional Differential Beacon Receiver Sea Trial Testing .............................. 223 22.4.1.6 Optional GNSS Augmentation Receiver (i.e.WAAS, EGNOS etc.) Dockside Testing 223 22.4.2 Wind Instrument Antennas ............................................................................................. 224 22.4.2.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................... 224 22.4.2.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................ 224 22.4.2.3 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 224 22.5 Display Testing ............................................................................................................... 224 22.5.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 224 22.5.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 224 22.5.2.1 22.6 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 224 Black Box Testing........................................................................................................... 225 22.6.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 225 22.6.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 225 22.6.2.1 22.7 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 225 Transducer Testing.......................................................................................................... 225 22.7.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 225 22.7.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 225 22.7.2.1 Testing for Leaks ............................................................................................ 225 22.7.2.2 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 225 22.7.2.3 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 225 22.7.3 Sea Temperature Transducers ......................................................................................... 226 22.7.3.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................... 226 22.7.3.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................ 226 22.7.3.3 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 226 22.7.4 Speed Transducers .......................................................................................................... 226 22.7.4.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................... 226 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 309 of 313 2014 NMEA 22.7.4.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................ 226 22.7.4.3 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 226 22.7.4.4 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 226 22.8 Compass Installation Testing .......................................................................................... 226 22.8.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 226 22.8.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 226 22.8.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 227 22.8.2.2 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 227 22.9 Radar Installation Testing ............................................................................................... 228 22.9.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................................... 228 22.9.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................................ 228 22.9.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 228 22.9.2.2 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 228 22.10 Autopilot Testing ............................................................................................................ 229 22.10.1 Test Criteria ...............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.10.2 General Considerations ..............................................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.10.3 Autopilot Testing .......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.10.3.1 Rudder Limit Settings ..................................................................................... 229 22.10.3.2 Recommended Test Equipment .........................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.10.3.3 Detailed Test Requirements ...............................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.10.3.4 Dockside Tests- Autopilot .............................................................................. 230 22.10.3.5 Sea Trial Testing- Autopilot ........................................................................... 230 22.11 SSB Radio Testing .......................................................................................................... 231 22.11.1 General Considerations ........................................................................................... 231 22.11.2 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 231 22.11.3 Detailed Test Requirements .................................................................................... 231 22.11.3.1 RF Power, Modulation and Power Consumption ........................................... 231 22.11.3.2 RF Balance/Impedance/Ground Current......................................................... 233 22.11.3.3 Voice Radio Check ......................................................................................... 234 22.11.3.4 DSC Radio Check ........................................................................................... 234 22.11.4 Dockside Testing .................................................................................................... 235 22.12 VHF Radio Testing ......................................................................................................... 236 22.12.1.1 Recommended Test Equipment ...................................................................... 236 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 310 of 313 2014 NMEA 22.12.1.2 22.12.2 Detailed Test Requirements ............................................................................ 236 VHF Antenna Testing ............................................................................................. 237 22.12.2.1 RF Power and Power Consumption ................................................................ 237 22.12.2.2 Voice Radio Check ......................................................................................... 238 22.12.2.3 DSC Radio Check and Test Call ..................................................................... 238 22.12.2.4 Dockside Testing ...............................................Error! Bookmark not defined. 22.13 AIS Testing ..................................................................................................................... 239 22.13.1 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 239 22.13.2 Detailed AIS Test Requirements ............................................................................ 239 22.13.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 239 22.14 Satellite TV & Communications System Setup and Testing .......................................... 239 22.14.1 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 239 22.14.2 Detailed Test Requirements .................................................................................... 239 22.14.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 239 22.14.2.2 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 240 22.15 Satellite Telephone Installation Testing.......................................................................... 240 22.15.1 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 240 22.15.2 Detailed Test Requirements .................................................................................... 240 22.15.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 240 22.15.2.2 Sea Trial Testing ............................................................................................. 241 22.16 Cellular Telephone Installation Testing .......................................................................... 241 22.16.1 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 241 22.16.2 Detailed Test Requirements .................................................................................... 241 22.16.2.1 Dockside Testing ............................................................................................ 241 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 311 of 313 2014 NMEA APPENDIX K REVISION HISTORY Version Scope Date Number 1 March 2002 1 October 2004 Original 1.1 1 January 2006 2.0 1 December 2006 2.1 31 July 2008 3.0 February 2012 3.1 April 2014 DRAFT 2014 First edition. Editorial reformatting and rewrite to improve overall readability. Incorporated select ABYC Standards as appendices. Added new sections 8.4 Ethernet Network Wiring Requirements, 17 VHF and SSB Radio Transceivers, and 18 Computer System Installation, Appendix E Commissioning Checklist. Moved Section 3.3 SSB Ground System to Section 17. Revised Section 8.3 NMEA 2000 Wiring Requirements to address equipment and backbone power connections and improve network planning readability. Resolved miscellaneous errata received from the field. Implemented as a Change Package. Added new sections 4.1.2 Emergency Communication Battery, 19 Automatic Identification Systems, and 20 Satellite Communication Systems. No longer published ABYC Standards as appendices. Established new NMEA Standard identification number (NMEA 0400). Added Revision History. Added new appendix containing voltage drop tables in English and Metric units. Revised Section 8.3 NMEA 2000® Wiring Requirements to provide additional equipment and backbone power alternatives and ensure harmonization with local regulatory requirements. Added references to local regulatory agencies to assure the compliance with local standards. Updated images based on new NMEA 2000 training materials and MEI Training Materials. Major revision Draft. End of NMEA 0400, Version 4.00, 2014 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 312 of 313 2014 NMEA 20140429 NMEA 0400 Installation Standard V 4.00N DRAFT 313 of 313
